(11.19) Inglés Owner’s manual Arona SEAT Arona SEAT...Owner’s manual SEAT Arona 6F9012720BF...

Owner’s manualSEAT Arona

6F9012720BF

Ingl

és 6

F901

2720

BF (

11.19

)

SEA

T A

rona

Ing

lés

(11.19

)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve-hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoya vehicle with state-of-the-art technologyand top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-ual carefully to learn more about your vehicleso you can enjoy all its benefits in your dailydriving.

Information about handling is complementedwith instructions regarding the operation andmaintenance of the vehicle in order to ensureits safety and maintain its value. Moreover, wewant to give you valuable advice and tips todrive your vehicle efficiently and respectingthe environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 29, Fitting and us-ing child seats.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of the ve-hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some ofthe features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,backwards) in this manual refer to the traveldirection of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement for theinstruction manual. Access the instructionmanual to see the complete information andwarnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or only of-fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaranteethat the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continues onthe next page.

You can access the information in this manualusing:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the environ-ment.

®

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Printed and digital instruction man-ualThe printed instruction manual contains rele-vant information about the use of the vehicleand the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals containsmore in-depth information. It is available onSEAT's official website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Related videosThe operation of some of the vehicle's fea-tures can be shown as an instruction video:

Fig. 2 SEAT website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 2● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.

NoteVideo instructions are only available incertain languages.

Frequently Asked Ques-tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 122

How do you adjust the steering wheel?››› page 14

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors?››› page 120

How do you turn on the exterior lights?››› page 110

How does the automatic gearbox selector leverwork? ››› page 226

How do you refuel? ››› page 299

How do you activate the windscreen wipers andwindscreen washer system? ››› page 117

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What doesthis mean? ››› page 82

How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 309

How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 47

Where is the vehicle tool kit located?››› page 37

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncturekit? ››› page 39

How do you change a wheel? ››› page 41

How do you change a fuse? ››› page 52

How do you change a light? ››› page 56

How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 48

Useful tips

How do you set the time? ››› page 75

When should the vehicle inspection should beperformed? ››› page 79

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels onthe steering wheel perform? ››› page 87

How do you remove the luggage compartmentcover? ››› page 128

How do you drive in an economical and environ-mentally-friendly way? ››› page 236

How do you check and top up the engine oil?››› page 311

How do you check and top up the engine cool-ant? ››› page 314

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?››› page 316

How do you check and top up the brake fluid?››› page 316

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-ues? ››› page 322

Vehicle washing tips ››› page 333

Functions of interest

Easy Connect, Car menu ››› page 85

How does the START-STOP system work?››› page 223

What parking assistants are available?››› page 269

How does the rear assist work? ››› page 282

How does the adaptive cruise control work?››› page 248

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?››› page 234

How does tyre pressure monitoring work?››› page 326

How do you open the vehicle without a key (Key-less Access)? ››› page 99

Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 117

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsGeneral views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Correct sitting position of vehicle occu-pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 15How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 18Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 45Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Instruments and warning/controllamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Easy Connect system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Windscreen wiper and rear window wipersystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 127Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159SEAT Media Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 218Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Drive Pro-file)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

5

Table of Contents

Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 248Using the blind spot detector (BSD) withparking assistant (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 269Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* . . . . . . 269Parking aid parking and manoeuvring(ParkPilot)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . 282Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Engine management and emissions controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Tyre pressure loss indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 330Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Accessories and modifications to the ve-hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 338

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 341Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Indications about the technical data . . . . 346Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Rear lid– Opening from outside ››› page 107– Emergency opening ››› page 107Fuel tank– Fuel capacity ››› page 346– Open/Close cap ››› page 299Opening and closing– Doors ››› page 104– Central locking ››› page 95– Manual release ››› page 105

1

2

3

Bonnet– Unlocking lever ››› page 309– Open/close ››› page 309Levels control– Oil ››› page 311– Brake fluid ››› page 316– Battery ››› page 317Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 51– Tow start ››› page 49

4

5

6

Action in the event of a puncture– Anti-puncture kit ››› page 38– Wheel change ››› page 41

7

7


Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows ››› page 108Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 120Open bonnet lever ››› page 309Headlight switch ››› page 110Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 112Cruise control ››› page 238Warning lamps ››› page 82Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 117

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Driver information system ››› page 81Easy Connect ››› page 85Hazard warning lights ››› page 114Fuses ››› page 52Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14Ignition lock ››› page 218Air conditioning ››› page 136Starter button ››› page 219Central locking ››› page 95

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Front passenger airbag disconnectiondisplay ››› page 25

16

8


Overview (right hand drive)

Open bonnet lever ››› page 309Easy Connect ››› page 85Hazard warning lights ››› page 114Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 112Cruise control ››› page 238Warning lamps ››› page 82Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 117Driver information system ››› page 81

1

2

3

4

5

6

Headlight switch ››› page 110Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 120Electric windows ››› page 108Central locking ››› page 95Air conditioning ››› page 136Starter button ››› page 219Front passenger airbag disconnectiondisplay ››› page 25Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14Ignition lock ››› page 218

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Fuses ››› page 5216

9


Interior view

Isofix anchors ››› page 31Headrest adjustment ››› page 122Seat belts ››› page 15Interior mirror ››› page 120Disconnecting the front passenger frontairbag ››› page 25Handbrake ››› page 264Seat adjustment ››› page 122

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

10

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documenta-tion also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 127.

– Make sure that no objects can interfere withthe pedals.

– Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seatsalways have the headrests in the in-use po-sition ››› page 122.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the headrestsaccording to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 28.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 12.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly ››› page 15.

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers.

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, take breaksregularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGDriving under the influence of alcohol,drugs, medication or narcotics may resultin severe accidents and even loss of life.● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcoticsmay significantly alter perception, affectreaction times and safety while driving,which could result in the loss of control ofthe vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »

11

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover partof the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts,● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,● belt tensioners for the front and rear sideseats*,● front airbags,● side airbags in the front seat backrests,● head-protection airbags,● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats onthe rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,● height-adjustable front headrests,● rear headrests with in-use position andnon-use position,● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position ofvehicle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driverand the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm(10 inches).

Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driver andpassengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct sitting position,contact a specialised workshop for help withany special devices. The seat belt and airbagcan only provide optimum protection if a cor-rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend thefollowing positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants:● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head, oras close as possible to the same level as thetop of your head and under no circumstancesbelow eye level. Keep the back of your neckas close as possible to the headrest ››› Fig. 4.● Short people must lower the headrest com-pletely, even if your head is below its upperedge.● Tall people must raise the headrest com-pletely.● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion.

1) Depending on the version/market.12

Safe driving

● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly››› page 18.

The following also applies to the driver:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the steering wheel so it is at least25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum››› Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both handson both sides, on the outer part, with yourarms slightly bent.● The steering wheel must always point to-wards the chest and never towards the face.● Move the seat in such a way that you canstep on the pedals with your knees slightlybent and with a distance between the kneesand the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-ches) ››› Fig. 3.● Adjust the height of the seat so that youcan reach the top of the steering wheel.● Always keep both feet in the footwell sothat you have the vehicle under control at alltimes.

For the passenger, the following applies:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-

board check translation). If you are sittingcloser than 25 cm, the airbag system cannotprotect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 inthe rear. All seats are equipped with a safetybelt.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position may in-crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring, in case of collision or accident and ifthe airbags deploy.● Before starting the car, all passengersmust be sitting in a correct position andstay like that for the entire journey. This al-so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.● The maximum amount of people in thevehicle is the same as the amount of seatswith seat belts.● For children, always use a certified pro-tection system, certified and suited for theirweight and height ››› page 28.● While driving, always keep your feet inthe footwell. Never place them over theseat or the dashboard, for example, or out-side the window. Otherwise the airbag andseat belt may offer insufficient protection

and also increase the risk of injury in theevent of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-tion

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrectsitting positions substantially reduce the pro-tective function of seat belts and, therefore,increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-cially heightened when a deploying airbagstrikes a vehicle occupant who has assumedan incorrect sitting position. The driver is re-sponsible for all people, particularly children,inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of incor-rect sitting positions that could be dangerousfor all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to therear.● Never lean against the dash panel. »

13

Safety

● Never lie on the rear seats.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the dash panel.● Never place your feet on the bench or onthe backrest of the seat.● Never travel in a footwell.● Never sit on the armrests.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position increasesthe risk of severe or fatal injuries in theevent of accidents and sudden braking ormanoeuvres.● All occupants must sit correctly duringthe journey and wear the seat belt correct-ly.● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt orare not at a proper distance of the airbagrisk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,especially if the airbags deploy and strikethem.

Steering wheel position adjust-ment

Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steeringcolumn.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip andonly when the vehicle is stationary.

● Pull the ››› Fig. 5 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-ment function and an incorrect adjustmentof the steering wheel can result in severe orfatal injury.● After adjusting the steering column, pushthe lever ››› Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en-sure the steering wheel does not acciden-tally change position while driving.

● Never adjust the steering wheel while thevehicle is in motion. If you need to adjustthe steering wheel while the vehicle is inmotion, stop safely and make the properadjustment.● The adjusted steering wheel should befacing your chest and not your face so asnot to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-tection in the event of an accident.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positionsto reduce injuries when the driver's frontairbag deploys.● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,you may sustain injuries to your arms,hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim-paired to the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

14

Seat belts

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must bepressed down thoroughly in order to stop thevehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● Restricting pedal operation can lead tocritical situations while driving.● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores ofseat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind thedriver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight››› page 28.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedexceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedwhile driving, a warning sound will be heardfor a few seconds. The warning light will alsoflash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with theignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Fig. 6 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu-pied and corresponding seat belt fastened dis-play.

Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seatis empty.Indicates that the seat is occupied andthe occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. Anaudible warning will also be heard if the vehi-cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened whiledriving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt »

15

Safety

status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-onds. The indication can be hidden by press-ing the button on the dash panel.

The protective function of seatbelts

Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts willnot be thrown forward in the event of suddenbraking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just drivingaround the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Important safety instructions forthe use of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts of

16

Seat belts

the buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat beltsat regular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in anaccident and have been stretched must bereplaced by a specialised workshop. Re-newal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorageshould also be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrownforward violently.

Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seatis thrown forward violently, hitting the driverwho is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain: themoment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting onboth the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weight ofthe vehicle and of its passengers. The higherthey are, the more energy there is to be “ab-sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands. Ina frontal collision, unbelted passengers arethrown forward and will make violent contactwith the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-screen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 8.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 9.

17

Safety

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seatbelt

Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat beltinto the buckle.

Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protectsthem in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

Fastening the seat beltFasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly››› page 12.● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-bing evenly across your chest and lap. Donot twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of thecorresponding seat ››› Fig. 10.● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat beltOnly unfasten the seat belt when the vehiclehas come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from thebuckle.● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-right position and the seat belt is worn cor-rectly, according to your size.● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion can cause severe or fatalinjuries in the event of an accident or sud-den braking.● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,can cause severe injuries if the belt movesfrom hard areas of the body to soft areas(e.g. the stomach).

18

Seat belts

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi-tions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection inthe event of an accident and reduce the riskof sustaining severe or fatal injuries only whenthey are properly positioned. Furthermore, ifthe webbing is correctly positioned, the seat

belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-timum position to ensure the airbag providesthe maximum protection. The seat belt musttherefore always be worn and the webbingcorrectly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severeor even fatal injuries ››› page 12, Correct sit-ting position of vehicle occupants.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm, under the arm or behindthe shoulder.● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take upany slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat beltmust lie evenly across the chest and as lowas possible over the pelvis, never across thestomach and must be worn properly at alltimes during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 13.

Adapting the position of the belt webbingto your sizeThe seat belt can be adapted using the fol-lowing equipment:

● Belt height adjustment for the front seats.

WARNINGAn incorrectly worn seat belt web cancause severe or fatal injuries in the event ofan accident.● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-ably on the torso● The lap part of the seat belt must lieacross the pelvis, never across the stom-ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight ifnecessary to take up any slack.● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible overthe pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”the stomach››› Fig. 13.● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-tened.● Once the seat belt is positioned correct-ly, don't pull it away from your body withyour hand.● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid orfragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.● Never use seat belt clips, retaining ringsor similar instruments to alter the positionof the belt webbing.

NoteIf your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct position of the »

19

Safety

belt webbing, contact a specialised work-shop for help with any special devices toensure the optimum protection of the seatbelt and airbag. SEAT recommends takingyour car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the front seats and the siderear seats1) are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,although only in severe head-on, lateral andrear-end collisions. This retracts and tightensthe seat belts, reducing the forward motion ofthe occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combinationwith the airbag system. In case of overturn,the pre-tensioners do not activate unless thehead airbags are deployed.

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or components

of the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seatbelt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequencemay be that, in the event of an accident, thebelt tensioners function incorrectly or maynot function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known to thespecialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.

● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environmentAirbag modules and belt tensioners maycontain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-quirements for their disposal.

1) Depending on version/market.20

Airbag system

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Related video

Fig. 14 Vehicle interior

Why is it so important to wear aseat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, itis most important to properly wear the seatbelts at all times, not only because this is re-quired by law in most countries, but also for

your safety ››› page 15, The whys andwherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to bethrown forward into the area of the deployingairbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orhead-protection airbags will not be triggered.Take into account that the visible damage ina vehicle involved in an accident, no matter

how serious, is not a determining factor forthe airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-gered. Children up to 12 years old shouldalways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-port children in the vehicle if they are notrestrained or the restraint system is not ap-propriate for their age, size or weight.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly ››› page 15.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec-tion for the occupants in combination with theseat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow-ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):● Electronic control unit● Front airbags for driver and passenger● Side airbags● Head airbag »

21

Safety

● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 23● Key-operated switch for front passengerairbag● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 23,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 12.● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwisethere is a danger that during a collision, thesystem may fail to trigger, or not triggercorrectly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousands of a second, to provide additionalprotection in the event of an accident. A finedust may develop when the airbag deploys.This is normal and it is not an indication of firein the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-

alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even though theaccident may cause extensive damage to thecar.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);

22

Airbag system

● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru-ment

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Fault in the airbag system.Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

Front passenger front airbag deactivated.Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag activated.The control lamp turns off automatically 60 secondsafter the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind you thatthe airbag is deactivated. If, with the frontpassenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit along with thecontrol lamp on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . Ifthe control lamp is flashing, there is a fault inthe disabling of the airbag system ››› . Havethe system checked immediately by a speci-alised workshop.

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbag

may deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

23

Safety

Front airbags

Fig. 15 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 16 Front passenger airbag located indash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in thesteering wheel ››› Fig. 15 and the airbag forthe front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 16. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 15 ››› Fig. 16.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-

ditional protection for the head and chest inthe event of a severe frontal collision ››› .

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occu-pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, thehead and chest are protected by the airbag.After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not inany case be occupied by other passenger,pets and objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

24

Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front pas-senger front airbag*

Fig. 17 Switch for activating and deactivatingthe front passenger airbag.

Fig. 18 Central part of the dashboard: controllamp for the deactivation of the front passen-ger front airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in therear seat to avoid having to deactivate thefront passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen-ger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passenger side.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 17. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its position to (deactivate) or to (activate). If you havedifficulty, ensure that you have inserted thekey as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● When deactivating the airbag, switch theignition on and check that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the central part of thedashboard ››› Fig. 18.● When reactivating the airbag, check thatwhen the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turnsoff.

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before dis-abling the front passenger airbag! Failureto do so could result in a fault in the airbagdeactivation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

25

Safety

Side airbags*

Fig. 19 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 20 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbag on left side of vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 19.

The locations are identified by the text “AIR-BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-bag system provides additional protection forthe upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce therisk of injury to passengers to the areas of thebody facing the impact. In addition to theirnormal protection, the seat belts also holdthe passengers in the event of a side collision;this is how these airbags provide maximumprotection.

WARNING● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly whilethe vehicle is in motion, you are at a greaterrisk of injury if the side airbag system istriggered in an accident.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribedsitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escapingthrough the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted.● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,

unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door pan-els.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploy-ment space between them and the airbags,or allow children or other passengers totravel in this position. It is also importantnot to attach any accessories (such as cupholders) to the doors. This would impair theprotection offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with sideairbags unless the covers have been ap-proved for use in your vehicle. Because theairbag deploys from the side of the back-rest, the use of conventional seat coverswould obstruct the side airbag, seriouslyreducing the airbag's effectiveness.● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbag

26

Airbag system

units must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag com-ponents for other repairs (such as removalof the front seat) should only be performedby a specialised workshop. Otherwise,faults may occur during the airbag systemoperation.

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 21 Location and deployment area of thehead-protection airbag.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 21 and are identified with the text “AIR-BAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

The area framed in red is covered by thehead-protection airbag when it is deployed››› Fig. 21 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-jects should never be placed or mounted inthis area ››› .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro-tection airbag is triggered on the impact sideof the vehicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the riskof injury to passengers in the front and rearside seats facing the impact.

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the head-protectionairbag must be disabled in those vehiclesfitted with a screen dividing the interior ofthe vehicle. See your technical service tomake this adjustment.● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that the

head-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should onlybe performed by a specialised workshop.Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-bag system operation.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct oper-ation of the side and head-protection air-bags neither the doors nor the door panelsshould be modified in any way (e.g. fittingloudspeakers). If the front door is dam-aged, the airbag system may not work cor-rectly. All work carried out on the front doormust be done in a specialised workshop.

27

Safety

Transporting childrensafely

Safety for children

Related video


Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 17. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-

tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-ways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries) (seewww.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seatsshown on the website as described below:

● Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket(Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIXDUO Plus).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX(RÖMER KIDFIX XP©).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX(TATAKI MAXI PLUS©).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-

stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 29.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Child seats group classification

Fig. 23 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight groupThe child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

28

Transporting children safely

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg



Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 orECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the rightchild seat for your model and age group atSEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific

(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In the caseof universal approval for ISOFIX, the childseat is additionally provided with a Top Tetherbelt.● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements ofuniversal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation andsafety. Child seat manufacturers can tell youwhich seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-cle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 24 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sunvisor

Fig. 25 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of thepassenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seatTake the following general warnings into ac-count if you are going to fit a child seat. Theyare valid for all child seats regardless of theirattachment system. »

29

Safety

● Please read and follow the child seat man-ufacturer's operating instructions.● The child seat should preferably be fitted tothe rear seat behind the front passenger seatso that the child can exit the vehicle on thepavement side.● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● To correctly use a child seat in the back,the front backrest must be adjusted so thatthere is no contact with the child seat in theback in the case that it goes opposite to thedirection of the car. In the case of front facingrestraint systems, the front backrest must beadjusted so that there is no contact with thechild's feet.● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment to thecar is through the seat belt and supportbracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.

● When fitting a child seat on the front pas-senger seat, the seat must be moved back-wards as far as possible and placed in thehighest position. The backrest must also beput in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas-senger front airbagA sticker with important information about thepassenger airbag is located on the passeng-er's sun visor and/or on the passenger sidedoor frame ››› Fig. 24.

Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 21.● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 24.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 25.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 28.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if necessary, the frontpassenger front airbag must be deactiva-ted ››› page 25. If the passenger seat has aheight adjustment option, move it to thehighest, most upright position. If you have afixed seat, do not install any child restraintsystem in this location.

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

30


● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag,the vehicle must be taken to a technicalservice. Do not forget to reconnect the air-bag when an adult wants to sit in the frontpassenger seat.● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, orto stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-ling. In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatalinjuries to themselves and to the other vehi-cle occupants.● Never leave a child alone in the child seator in the vehicle.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries tothe abdominal and neck areas during asudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-dent.● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated ››› page 106.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 32. If necessary, ISOFIX at-tachment may have to be supplemented witha Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system rather thanattaching them with an automatic three-pointseat belt ››› page 35.

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchor pointsare located at the back of the rear seat back-rest on the boot side ››› page 34. The ringsfor retaining the Top Tether belt are markedwith an anchor symbol.

● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.The support bracket prevents the child seatfrom tipping forward in the event of impact.Child seats fitted with a support bracketshould only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attachingchild seatsSEAT recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or i-Size.● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

31

Safety

Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether* system

Fig. 26 Rear seat: slots die cut to access theISOFIX / iSize securing rings.

Fig. 27 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with theISOFIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear side seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on eachrear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are

secured to the seat frame and, in others, theyare secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX”rings are located between the rear seatbackrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 26.The Top Tether* rings are located on the rearpart of the backrests of the rear seats (be-

hind the seat backrest or in the boot)››› page 34.

To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the tablebelow.

Age group Height classification Front passenger seat Side rear seats Middle rear bench seat

Group 0: up to 10 kg E X IL-SU X

Group 0+: up to 13 kg

E X

IL-SU

X

D X X

C X X

32


Age group Height classification Front passenger seat Side rear seats Middle rear bench seat

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

D X

IL-SU, IUF

X

C X X

B X X

B1 X X

A X X

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg – X IL-SU X

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg – X IL-SU X

i-Size child restraint system – X i-U X

Height classification: The height classification indication is equivalent to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In the case of child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the height classification is shown on the ECE approval label. The height classification is specified on each child seat.X: Vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat.IL-SU: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting an ISOFIX child seat with semi-universal approval. The vehicle list provided by the child seat manufacturer must be consulted.IUF: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting an ISOFIX child seat with universal approval.i-U: Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward- or rear-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval.Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward- or rear-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval. Vehicle seat suitable for fitting a forward-facing i-Size child seat withuniversal approval.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” systemYou are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Open the cut-out section behind themarked grooves to access the retaining rings››› Fig. 26.● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize”retaining rings until the child seat is heard toengage securely ››› Fig. 27. If the child seat is

equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, se-cure it to the correspondent ring››› page 34. Observe the manufacturer's in-structions.● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensurethat it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Tech-nical Services.

WARNINGThe retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* systemchild seats.● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-tening rings - this can result in potentiallyfatal injuries to the child. »

33

Safety

● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*securing rings.

Top Tether* securing belts

Fig. 28 Rear seats: adjustment and assemblyaccording to the Top Tether belt.

Fig. 29 Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se-curing rings.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainingstrap.● Place the belt under the headrest of theback seat ››› Fig. 28 (depending on the in-structions of the chair itself, lift or remove theheadrest if necessary).● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 29.● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

34


Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego-ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you mustcheck that the seat is approved for your vehi-

cle. You will find any necessary informationon the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-

bel. The following table shows the differentfitting options.

Age group Weight of the childFront passenger seat

Rear seatsFront passenger air-bag activated

Front passenger air-bag deactivated

Group 0 Up to 10 kg X U U

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X U U

Group 1Rear-facing From 9 to 18 kg X U U

Forward-facing From 9 to 18 kg U X U

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg U X U

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg U X U

U: universal.X: vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● Put the seat belt in place and pass itthrough the child seat according to the in-structions of the child seat manufacturer.● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.

● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckleuntil you hear the engagement click.

WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.● Read and always observe informationand warnings concerning the use of childseats ››› page 29.

35

Safety

Fitting a child seat to the middleseat of the rear bench using theseat belt

Fig. 30 Position of the belt buckle on the rearseat

Belt buckle for the middle seatBelt buckle for the side seat

Child seats must always be fitted in the mid-dle of a vehicle seat. Take into account theseinstructions to ensure that this is possible onthe middle seat of the rear bench:

● Place the middle seat's belt buckle››› Fig. 30 1 behind the side seat's beltbuckle ››› Fig. 30 2 .● Plug the middle seat's seat belt into themiddle seat's belt buckle ››› Fig. 30 1 andmake sure it clicks in place.● For seat belts to be correctly fitted, thebuckles must not be twisted ››› Fig. 30.

1

2

36

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

First aid kit, warning triangle andfire extinguishers*

Warning triangleThe use of reflective warning triangles isobligatory in emergencies in some countries.As are the first aid kit and a set of spare lightbulbs.

The warning triangle is under the storagecompartment which is located under the lug-gage compartment floor.

First aid kitThe first-aid kit can go in the storage com-partment which is located under the luggagecompartment floor.

The first aid kit must comply with legal re-quirements. Check the expiry date of thecontents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisherThe fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug-gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legalrequirements, be ready for use and bechecked regularly. Check the certificationseal on the extinguisher.

WARNINGLoose objects in the vehicle interior can beviolently thrown in case of a sudden ma-noeuvre or braking and especially in acci-dents causing serious injury.● Secure or store fire extinguishers, first aidkit, reflective vests and warning trianglesecurely in the vehicle.

Note● The first aid kit, warning triangle, reflec-tive vests and fire extinguishers are not partof the vehicle's standard equipment.● The warning triangle should meet legalrequirements.● Before acquiring accessories and emer-gency equipment see the instructions in“Accessories and spares” ››› page 338.

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 31 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment. To ac-cess the vehicle tools ››› page 128.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt*Towing eye, removableWheel spanner*Crank handle for jackJack*Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional extras. »

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

37

Emergencies

WARNINGWhen the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility setand spare wheel are loose in the interiorthey can be violently thrown in case of asudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-cially in accidents, causing serious injury.● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyremobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-rary spare wheel are safely secured in theluggage compartment.

WARNINGUnsuitable or damaged vehicle tools cancause injury or accidents.● Never work with inappropriate or dam-aged tools.

NoteThe jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about

4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if thevehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-miliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.

● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.● Always stop the engine, apply the handbrake and put it in gear when using a man-ual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofinvoluntary movement of the vehicle.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).

38

Self-help

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

NoteA new bottle of sealant can be purchasedat SEAT dealerships.

NoteTake into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 32 Standard representation: anti-punc-ture kit contents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 32:

Valve insert removerA sticker to be adhered to the instrumentcluster, within the driver's visual field, toremind that the maximum advisablespeed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”Filler tube with capAir compressorON/OFF switchAir bleed screw (it can also be integratedin the inflator tube).

1

2

3

4

5

6

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe inflator tube).Tube for inflating tyres12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap atthe lower end for a valve insert. The valve in-sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 32 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 32 10 .● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 32 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 32 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.● With the bottle upside down, empty all ofthe contents into the tyre. »

7

8

9

10

11

39

Emergencies

● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 32 1 .

Inflating the tyre● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 32 8 into the tyre valve.● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 32 6 .● Start the engine and leave it running.● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 32 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 135.● Turn the air compressor on with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 32 5 .● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).A maximum of 8 minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.

● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 32 2 to the instru-ment cluster, within the driver's visual field.● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 40.

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoidoverheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 32 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

40

Self-help

Changing a wheel

Related video

Fig. 33 Wheels

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface andin a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the handbrake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.● Automatic transmission: Move the selectorlever to position P.● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 37 and thespare wheel* ready ››› page 328.● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).

● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

Wheel central trim*

Fig. 34 Correct positioning of the centralwheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for accessto the wheel nuts.

Removing● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools››› page 37) to one of the recesses of thecentral wheel trim and remove it.

Fitting● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. Thebottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge shouldalign with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 34 1 .● Press the central trim firmly until it locks inwith an audible click.

NoteThere is also a valve mark on the back ofthe central wheel trim that indicates thecorrect alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 35 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps. »

41

Emergencies

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools ››› Fig. 31)over the cap until it clicks into place››› Fig. 35.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and shouldbe remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has aspecial cap. This only fits on anti-theft lockingbolts and is not for use with standard wheelnuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 36 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap andadapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.

● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 36 1 (ve-hicle tools ››› page 37) onto the anti-theftwheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 42.

NoteMake a note of the code number of the an-ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle. If you need anew adapter, you can obtain it from theSEAT Official Service, indicating the codenumber.

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 37 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Fig. 38 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and thecorrect position for the anti-theft wheel lockingbolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to thecar to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully pushon the end of the wheel wrench with yourfoot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go››› Fig. 37.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› .

42

Self-help

Important information about wheel nutsFactory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-cially matched during construction. There-fore, if different rims are fitted, the correctwheel nuts with the right length and headsmust be used. This ensures that wheels arefitted securely and that the brake systemfunctions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not evenuse wheel nuts from vehicles of the samemodel.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theftlocking bolt must be threaded onto positions››› Fig. 38 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po-sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not bepossible to mount the hubcap.

WARNINGIf the wheel nuts are not properly tight-ened, they could come loose while drivingand cause an accident, serious injury andloss of vehicle control.● Use only wheel nuts which correspond tothe rim in question.● Never use different wheel nuts.● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-sible to screw them easily.● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, onlyuse the wheel wrench that came with thecar from the factory.

● The wheel nuts should only be loosenedslightly (about one turn) before raising thevehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts orto the wheel hub threads. Even if the boltshave been tightened to the prescribed tor-que, they could come loose while driving.● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.● If wheel nuts are tightened below theprescribed torque, the bolts and rims couldcome loose while driving. If tightening tor-que is too high, the wheel nuts or threadscan be damaged.

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 39 Jack position points.

Fig. 40 Cross member: positioning the jack onthe vehicle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 39.● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 40 is below the housing provi-ded.● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and the mo-bile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel isslightly lifted off the ground. »

43

Emergencies

WARNINGThe factory-supplied jack* is only de-signed for changing wheels on this model.On no account attempt to use it for liftingheavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in-jury.● Make sure that the jack* remains stable.If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-sultant risk of injury.● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,even those approved for other SEAT mod-els could slip, with the consequent risk ofinjury.● Only mount the jack* on the supportpoints designed for this purpose on thestrut, and always align the jack correctly. Ifyou do not, the jack* could slip as it doesnot have an adequate grip on the vehicle:risk of injury!● You should never place a body limb suchas an arm or leg under a raised vehicle thatis solely supported by the jack.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!.● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to oneside or the engine is running.● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised. The vehicle may come loose fromthe jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Only place the jack* on thepoints designed for this purpose on thestrut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-aged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelnuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim mayhit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-son, please take care and get a second per-son to assist you.

Taking off the wheel● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheelCheck the direction of rotation of the tyre››› page 45.

● Place the spare wheel or temporary sparewheel into position.● Screw on the wheel nuts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.

● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nutsuse the corresponding adaptor.● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of thewheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-agonal pairs (not in a circle).● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on.

The wheel nuts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nutsThe recommended tightening torque forwheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is120 Nm. After changing a wheel, have thetightening torque checked immediately with atorque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have anyrusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re-placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or tothe wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts havebeen tightened to the prescribed torque, theycould come loose while driving.

44

Self-help

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when rotatingin only one direction. An arrow on the tyresidewall indicates the direction of rotation ontyres with directional tread. Always observethe indicated direction of rotation in order toguarantee optimum grip and help avoidaquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite directionof rotation, drive with extreme caution, as thetyre is no longer being used correctly. This isof particular importance when the road sur-face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-sible or remount it with the correct directionof rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-gage compartment ››› page 127.● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.

● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory››› page 326.● Have the tightening torque of the wheelnuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench ››› page 44. Meanwhile, drivecarefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Changing the windscreenwiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 41 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 41.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 308.● Switch the ignition on and off.● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly ››› page 117 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

Note● The windscreen wiper arms can bemoved to the service position only whenthe bonnet is properly closed.● You can also use the service position, forexample, if you want to fix a cover over thewindscreen in the winter to keep it clear ofice.

45

Emergencies

Changing the wiper rear wiperblades

Fig. 42 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Fig. 43 Removing and fitting the rear windowwiper blade.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of

the water as it is wiped across the windscreenwill be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across theglass, they should be changed if they aredamaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should bechecked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately. These are availa-ble from qualified workshops.

Raising and lowering windscreen wiperarms● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 45.● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade'sfastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades● Raise the wiper arms.● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 42 1and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade● Lift the wiper arm away from the glass● Slide the blade adapter in the direction ofthe arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 43 .● With one hand, hold the top end of the rearwiper arm.● Fit a new blade, of the same length andtype, as shown in ››› Fig. 43 and slide theadapter until it clicks into place.

WARNINGWorn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-ger clean the windscreen properly.

46

Self-help

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 45.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

Jump start: description

Fig. 44 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start Stop system

Fig. 45 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connectionsSwitch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 44.Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .In vehicles without a Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadto the negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 44.In vehicles with a Start-stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadX to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, orto the engine block itself ››› Fig. 45. »

1.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

47

Emergencies

Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component bol-ted to the engine block or to the engineblock itself of the vehicle with the flatbattery. Do not connect it to a point nearthe battery A .Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

StartingStart the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

Removing the jump leadsBefore you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 308.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery(12V) and approximately the same capaci-ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-ply could result in an explosion.● Never use jump leads when one of thebatteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!Even after the battery has thawed, batteryacid could leak and cause chemical burns.If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-ted from the battery could be ignited bysparks. Danger of explosion.

● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of thevehicle, this can cause a short circuit.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relatingto tow-starting and towing.

48

Self-help

For technical reasons, towing a vehiclewith a discharged battery is not allowed.The jump start should be used instead››› page 47.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with theKeyless Access system, the steering wheelcould lock ››› .

WARNINGA vehicle with no power should never betowed.● When towing, never remove the ignitionkey or disconnect the ignition with the startbutton. Otherwise, the electronic lock ofthe steering column could suddenly be-come blocked and it would be impossibleto steer the vehicle. This could cause anaccident, serious injury and loss of controlof the vehicle.● If during towing the vehicle runs out ofpower, stop towing immediately and re-quest the assistance of specialist person-nel.

WARNINGVehicle handling and braking capacitychange considerably during towing. Pleaseobserve the following instructions to mini-mise the risk of serious accidents and in-jury:● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:– You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op-erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoidcrashing into the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steer-ing wheel as the power steering doesnot operate when the engine is switch-ed off.

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:– Accelerate with particular care and

caution.– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.– Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-ple the paint, remove and replace the lidand towing eye carefully.● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalyticconverter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-started. The jump start should be used in-stead ››› page 47.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can theelectronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate correct-ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely betow-started (in the case of manual gear-boxes):● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.● Keep the clutch pressed down.● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights of both vehicles.● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.● Once the engine starts, press the clutchand disengage the gear to avoid collidingwith the towing vehicle. »

49

Emergencies

CAUTION● When tow-starting, unburnt fuel couldenter the catalytic converter and damageit.● Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 min attempt to start it. There is risk of dam-age to the catalytic converter.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the difficultiesinvolved in towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that noimpermissible tractive forces or shocks aregenerated. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloading anddamaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signalthe change of direction even with the hazardwarning lights turned on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be oper-ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, thehazard warning lights will go off. When theturn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-matically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering isnot blocked, and the electronic parking brakemay be deactivated and the turn signals andwash/wipe operated.● More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not oper-ate when the engine is switched off.● You should depress the brake much harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow barIt is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. Atow rope should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar tothe towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-vice, towing with a tow bar is only permittedif it has been specially designed to be instal-led on a tow hitch ››› page 285.

When the vehicle has to be towed:Check whether the vehicle may be towed››› page 51, Cases where towing the ve-hicle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the road; it can also be towed witheither the front or rear wheels lifted off theroad.

● Switch the ignition on.● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-lector lever in the N ››› page 225 position.● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed atspeeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).● The vehicle must not be towed further than50 km (30 miles).● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles withautomatic transmission are only allowed tobe towed with the front wheels suspended.

50

Self-help

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-mitted● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-cant.● If the battery is flat and the steering cannotbe unlocked as a result, the electronic steer-ing lock and electronic parking brake cannotbe disengaged.● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-elled.● When, for example, after an accident, thesmooth rotation of the wheels or the steeringoperation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:● Observe legal requirements.● Keep in mind the instructions in the manualon towing vehicles.

CAUTIONIf there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-cant in the automatic transmission the carmay only be towed with the driven wheelslifted clear of the road, or transported on aspecial car transporter or trailer.

NoteThe vehicle can only be towed if the steer-ing lock electronic gearbox lock is deacti-vated. If the vehicle has no power supply orthere is an electric system fault, the engine

must be started using jump leads to deacti-vate the steering column electronic gear-box lock.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 46 Right side of the front bumper: removethe cover.

Fig. 47 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage in position.

The housing of the removable towline an-chorage is on the right side of the front bump-er underneath a cover ››› Fig. 46.

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 50.

Fitting the towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 37.● Remove the cover by pressing down on itsright-hand side and leave it hanging from thevehicle ››› Fig. 46.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 47 ››› . Use a suitable objectthat can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Replace the cover and press on its left sideuntil the tab snaps into the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools. »

51

Emergencies

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 48 On the right side of the rear bumper:remove the cover.

Fig. 49 On the right side of the rear bumper:towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the rear bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 48.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 50.

Fitting the rear towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 37.● Press the right hand side of the cover››› Fig. 48 to unclip it.● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.● Screw the towline anchorage into the hous-ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 49››› . Use a suitable objectthat can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same

52

Fuses and bulbs

amperage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec-tric system, before replacing a fuse alwaysturn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-trical elements and remove the key fromthe ignition.● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as theycan damage the electrical system.

Note● One component may have more than onefuse.● Several components may run on a singlefuse.● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 50 On the driver's side dashboard: fusebox cover.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel● Open: remove the fuse box cover in the di-rection indicated ››› Fig. 50.● Close: click the cover back into place.

Identifying fuses below below the dash-board by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Colour Amp rating

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.● Protect the fuse boxes when open toavoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt andhumidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-age to the electrical system.

53

Emergencies

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 51 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover.

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Open the bonnet ››› page 308.● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 51.● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 52 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 53, ››› page 54.

Recognise a blown fuseA fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 52.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Fuse placement

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumer/Amps

1 Tow hook 20

2 Cigarette lighter/12V power point 20

3 Sound amplifier 30

6 Central locking 40

8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30

10 Tow hook 20

11 CNG Gauge 7.5

13Lights switch, steering column LSSand SMLS, diagnostic port,rain/light sensor

7.5

14 Steering Column LSS: wiper control 10

15 Instrument panel 7.5

16 Right lights power supply 40

17 Right Door Window Control 30

18 Windscreen wipers 3054

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps

19 Radio, Multimedia System 25

20 Heated rear window 30

21 SCR Control Unit 30

23 Rear View Camera 7.5

24Connectivity Box, external audiosource wiring (Double USB-Aux IN),MIB display

5

25 Steering column electronics (MFL) 7.5

26 Gateway 7.5

27 Active suspension control unit 7.5

28 DWA Sensor 7.5

29 DWA Horn 7.5

319AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5

9AK Climatronic control unit 15

32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5

33 Left Door Window Control 30

35 Left lights power supply 40

36 Signal Horn 20

37 Heated seats control unit 30

38 BCM Power C63 30

39 BSD, PDC, MRR, PLA 10

No. Consumer/Amps

40

Light switch, diagnosis input, head-lamp range regulator, LSS steeringcolumn: lamps, halogen lamps,switch, reverse gear, electrochromicmirror, RKA without radio.

7.5

41 Regulation of unfolded exterior mir-rors, 7.5

42 Clutch pedal, ignition relays, CNGrelay coil, AC pressure sensor 7.5

43 DWP relay coil, rear window wipermotor, heated nozzles 15

44 Airbag 7.5

45 Left full LED headlight 7.5

46 Right full LED headlight 7.5

48 Steering column lock, Kessy ControlUnit 7.5

49 SCR relay 7.5

53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5

58 Windscreen washer pump 7.5

59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

60 Tow hook 30

61 Tow hook 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumer/Amps

1

MPI Engine Injection Module 10

TSI Engine Injection Module 15

Diesel Engine Injection Module 30

2

Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7),Low temperature coolant pump(TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil pressure regulat-ing valve (TJ1), AGR coolant valve(TJ1), High and low pressure waterpumps (TJ1), SCR relay coil, cylin-der head water valve

7.5

3 Lambda probes 15

4 Engine petrol pump relay (MPI),Gauge control unit (TSI and diesel) 15

5

Electric fan (EC), LDR valve, canni-ster and variable distribution valve,oil pressure regulating valve, cylin-der disconnection valves, WIV sen-sor and CNG pressure regulator

10

6Spark plugs (MPI and TSI) 20

Glow plug relay, Suction hose resis-tor (diesel) 7.5

7 Vacuum pump (TSI, CNG) 15

8 Injectors and EKP relay coil (MPI),Fuel metering valve (diesel) 10

9 Servo sensor 7.5 »

55

Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps

10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM andBCM 7.5

12 Detachable compressor 10

14 Injection Module, Engine Hauptre-lay, ESC / ABS, Relay Coil 87 7.5

15 Automatic gearbox DQ200 andAQ160 30

17 50 Diag 7.5

18 BDM starter motor 30

20ESC (Pump) 60

ABS (Pump) 40

21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25

24 TH4 Electric fan without A/C formoderate climate countries 30

25TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder-ate climate countries 20

PTC1 40

26 TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electricfan for warm climate countries 50

27TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder-ate climate countries 30

PTC2 40

28 PTC3 40

Note● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. Theseshould only be changed by a specialisedworkshop.● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-bles below pertain only to certain versionsof the model or are optional extras.● Please note that the above lists, whilecorrect at the time of printing, are subjectto change.

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom-mends that you consult a technical service orrequest assistance from a specialist. In gen-eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to thebulbs, other vehicle components require re-moval.

If you choose to change the engine compart-ment lamps yourself, remember that it is adangerous area ››› in Working in the en-gine compartment on page 308.

Always use identical bulbs with the samedesignation. The name can be found on thebase of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,there are different sets of headlights and taillights:

● Halogen headlights.● Full-LED main headlights*● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-ning lights*● Rear bulb light● LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*Full-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beamand route light) with light emitting diodes(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go to anauthorised workshop to have it replaced.

Bulbs (12 V)Depending on the level of equipment fitted inthe vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or allof the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDshave an estimated life that exceeds that ofthe vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an au-thorised workshop for its replacement.

56

Fuses and bulbs

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Dipped beam headlights H7

Main beam headlights H7

Side light/DRL (daytime runninglight) W21W

Turn signal PY 21W

Halogen headlight withLED DRL

Type

Dipped beam headlights H7

Main beam headlights H7

Turn signal PY 21W

Side light/DRL (daytime runninglight) LEDa)

a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have it replaced.

Full-LED main headlights Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are withLEDs. In case of a LED failure, go to an authorisedworkshop to have it replaced.

Bulb lighta) Left Right

Brake lights2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL

Side lights

Retro fog light P21 WLL –

Reverse light – P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi-cle. The position of lights may vary according to thecountry.

Light withLEDsa)

Left Right

Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED –

Reverse light – P21 WLL

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL

a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi-cle. The position of lights may vary according to thecountry.

WARNING● Take particular care when working oncomponents in the engine compartment ifthe engine is warm. Risk of burns.

● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.● When changing bulbs, please take carenot to injure yourself on sharp edges, inparticular on the headlight housing.

CAUTION● Remove the ignition key before workingon the electric system. Otherwise, a shortcircuit could occur.● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.● Take good care to avoid damaging anycomponents.

For the sake of the environmentPlease ask your specialist retailer how todispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note● Depending on weather conditions (coldor wet), the front lights, the fog lights, thetail lights and the turn signals may be tem-porarily misted. This has no influence onthe useful life of the lighting system. Byswitching on the lights, the area throughwhich the beam of light is projected willquickly be demisted. However, the edgesmay continue to be misted.● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) on »

57

Emergencies

your vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.● Do not touch the glass part of the bulbwith your bare hands, use a cloth or papertowel instead, since the fingerprints left onthe glass will vaporise as a result of theheat generated by the bulb, they will bedeposited on the reflector and will impairits surface.● Depending on the level of equipment fit-ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used forpart or all of the interior and/or exteriorlighting. LEDs have an estimated life thatexceeds than that of the car. If an LED lightfails, go to an authorised workshop for itsreplacement.

Main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 53 In the engine compartment: mainbeam headlight bulb.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Turn the cover 1 anti-clockwise and take itout ››› Fig. 53.

– Remove the bulb connector 2 by pulling itoutwards.

– Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit thenew one.

– Fit the bulb connector 2 .

– Fit cover 1 , turning it towards the right.

– Check whether the new bulb is working.

Dipped beam headlight bulb

Fig. 54 In the engine compartment: removethe cover.

Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: dippedbeam headlight bulb.


– Move the loop ››› Fig. 54 1 in the directionof the arrow and remove the cover.

– Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 55 2 .

58

Fuses and bulbs

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 55 3pressing inwards to the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat the lug on the base fits into the recesson the reflector.

– Fit the connector.

– Fit the cover and close the strap. Make surethat the gasket sits well on the casing coverduring the operation.

– Check whether the new bulb is working.

Turn signal and DRL/side light(daytime running light)1)

Fig. 56 In the engine compartment: turn signallight bulb 1 and DRL (daytime running light)bulb 2 .


– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 56 1 or 2 tothe left and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anticlockwise at thesame time.

– Installation involves all of the above steps inreverse sequence.

Front fog light bulb

Fig. 57 Front fog light: remove the grille

Fig. 58 Front fog light: remove the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated: »

1) In headlight versions with LED DRL, this lightsource cannot be replaced. It is designed to lastthe length of the vehicle’s service life. In case offailure, go to an authorised workshop to have itreplaced.

59

Emergencies

– Lever the groove with a screwdriver››› Fig. 57 (arrow). Next, unclip the clips lo-cated on the edge of the grille, pulling on it.

– Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 58 1 and re-move the fog light.

– Remove the bulb connector 2 .

– Turn the bulb holder 3 to the left and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on it and turn-ing it anticlockwise at the same time.

– Replace the bulb, making sure that the fix-ing guides are in the right position and thenpress it and turn it clockwise

– To install the headlight go back through theabove steps in reverse.

– Check that the bulb works properly.

Tail light bulbs located in the body-work

Fig. 59 Luggage compartment: access to thebolt securing the tail light unit.

Fig. 60 Retaining tabs on reverse side of taillight.

Follow the steps indicated:

– Check which of the bulbs is defective.

– Open the rear lid.

– Remove the lid, levering the flat side of ascrewdriver into the recess ››› Fig. 59 1 .

– Remove the bulb connector 2 .

– Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 by handor using a screwdriver.

– Remove the light from the body, gently pull-ing it toward you, and place on a clean,smooth surface.

– Remove the bulb holder unlocking the re-taining tabs ››› Fig. 60 A .

– Change the damaged bulb.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, tak-ing special care when fitting the bulb hold-er. The securing tabs must click into place.

CAUTIONTake care when removing the rear light unitto make sure there is no damage to thepaintwork or any of its components.

Note● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready toplace under the glass on the rear light unit,to avoid any scratches.● For LED lights, you can only change theturn signal and reverse light bulbs.

60

Fuses and bulbs

Tail lights bulbs located in the rearlid

Fig. 61 Rear lid open: remove the cover.

Fig. 62 Remove the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

– Check which of the bulbs is defective.

– Open the rear lid.

– Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated ››› Fig. 61.

– Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 62 1 .

– Remove the bulb holder unlocking the re-taining tabs A .

– Change the damaged bulb.

– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints fromthe glass part of the bulb.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

– Carry out the same actions in reverse orderfor assembly and pay special attention toplacing the bulb holder, ensuring that thetabs are properly secured.

NoteFor LED lights, you can only change the turnsignal and reverse light bulbs.

number plate light

NoteNumber plate lights use LED technology.LEDs have an estimated life that exceedsthan that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails,go to an authorised workshop for replace-ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 63 Turn signal integrated in the rear viewmirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-grated in the rear view mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LEDbulbs, the change should be made at a tech-nical service centre.

61

Emergencies

Interior light and front readinglights

Fig. 64 Front reading light.

To remove the glass– Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-

ing and the glass ››› Fig. 64.

– Carefully remove the glass, levering it toavoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs– Pull the bulbs outwards.

– To remove the central bulb, hold and pressto one side.

Assembly– Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-

tly on the outer edge of the side light.

– First fit the glass with the fastening tabsover the frame of the switch. Next press the

front part until the two long tabs click onthe support.

NoteIn LED courtesy lights it is not possible toreplace the light sources. If the light doesnot work, take the vehicle to an officialService.

Luggage compartment lighting*

Fig. 65 Boot light.

Fig. 66 Boot light.

– Extract the bulb by pressing on its insideedge using the flat side of a screwdriver››› Fig. 65.

– Disconnect the cable.

– Press the bulb sideways and remove it fromits housing ››› Fig. 66.

– Change the bulb.

– Connect the cable again.

– Refit the bulb and press it in until it engages.

62

Operation

Fig. 67 Instruments and controls.

64

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Interior door handleControl for adjusting electric exteri-or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Air ventsLever for:– Turn signals/main beam head-

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112– Cruise control system (GRA) and

speed limiter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 241According to features, lever for:– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 238– Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241– Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 248Steering wheel with horn and– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21– On-board computer controls . . . . . 81– Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialoguesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 228

Instrument panel and warninglamps:– Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66– Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . 82Lever for:– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 117– Wipe and wash system* . . . . . . . . . . . 117– Multi-function display control* . . . 72Infotainment system:Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Depending on the equipment, glovecompartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133– CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 184Front passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Front passenger airbag disconnec-tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Switches for:– Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 139– Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139– Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Front passenger seat heating con-trol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Gear lever– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Depending on the equipment, but-tons for:– Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98– Start-Stop operation button . . . . . . . 223– SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269– Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . 326Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-cess closing and start-up sys-tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Depending on the equipment:– USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216– Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Driver's seat heating control* . . . . . . . 141Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Steering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Lever for unlocking the bonnet . . . . . . 309Light range control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Note● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or areoptional extras. »

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

65

Operation

● The arrangement of switches and con-trols on right-hand drive models* may beslightly different from the layout shown in››› page 64. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

Fig. 68 Related video:Dash panel

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrumentpanel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEATCockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged some system settings (such as thetime, the date, the personalised comfort set-tings and the programming) might be alteredor deleted. Check and correct these settingsonce the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructionson the screen of the instrument panel andto the instructions on the screen of the Info-tainment system when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

66

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 69 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 69:

Revolution counter (with the engine run-ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-nute) ››› page 76.

1

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 79 or natural gas gauge in ve-hicles with natural gas engine (CNG)››› page 78Displays on the screen ››› page 70.

2

3

Adjuster button and display.Speedometer.Fuel gauge ››› page 76.

4

5

6

67

Operation

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 70 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrumentpanel (classic view).

Details of the instruments:Engine coolant temperature display››› page 79Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-nute the engine is running ››› page 76.Gear engaged or position of the selec-tor lever currently selectedScreen display ››› page 70SpeedometerDigital speed displayFuel gauge ››› page 76.Information Profile ››› page 68.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrumentpanel digital with monochrome screen in col-our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi-ble using the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel. By selecting different infor-mation profiles, indications other than theclassic circular instruments can be displayed,such as navigation data, multimedia informa-tion or travel data.

The 3 views are:

Classic ViewDigital maps (no information profiles)Semicircular watches

–––

All views will display information on thescreen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

In Classic View and Semicircular watches it ispossible to customise the information dis-played under Information Profiles››› Fig. 70 8 .

Information profilesWith the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option (info-tainment button > View > Instru-ment cluster) you can choose between thedifferent information display options that willbe shown in the SEAT Digital Cockpit.

1) Depending on the version.68


Classic ViewThe revolutions per minute and speedometerneedles appear along the entire length››› Fig. 70.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap-pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 ofthese items of information can be displayedat the same time, but the user chooses whichto display, and in what order, by moving thefinger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can bememorised by exiting the menu or keepingthe View button pressed.

● Consumption. Graphic representation ofthe current consumption and digital displayof the average consumption.● Audio. Digital display of the current audioplayback.● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-tude above sea level.● Compass. Digital display of the compass.● Information about the final destination.Digital display of the remaining travellingtime, distance to the destination and the esti-mated time of arrival.

● Operating range. Digital display of the re-maining range.● Travel time.● Route guidance.● Journey. Digital display of the distancetravelled.● Assistance systems. Graphic representa-tion of different assistance systems.● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-ted.● Navigation. Graphical representation ofthe navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num-ber and the contents of the selectable infor-mation profiles..

Navigation map in the SEAT DigitalCockpit*

Fig. 71 Infotainment system:: map transfer key

Depending on the features, the SEAT DigitalCockpit can display a detailed map. To dothis, select the Navigation option in themenu menu on the instrument panel››› page 71.

Depending on the features or the navigationmap, it can be shown in the Digital SEATCockpit or on the Infotainment system or onboth at the same time. If it is displayed only inthe Infotainment system, the SEAT DigitalCockpit will only display the arrows for ma-noeuvres. »

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Drivingmode” selected.

69

Operation

Transfer of navigation mapUsing the map transfer key ››› Fig. 71, the mapis transferred from the Infotainment system tothe Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice versa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,you can transfer the map back to the Info-tainment System.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrumentpanel displayDifferent pieces of information can be dis-played on the screen of the instrument panel,depending on the features of the vehicle.● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages● Odometer● Time ››› page 75● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-tem● Indications of the phone● Outside temperature● Indications of the compass● Selector lever positions● Gear-change recommendation››› page 232

● Display of travel data (multifunction dis-play) and menus for different settings››› page 71● Service interval display ››› page 79● Speed warning ››› page 72● Speed warning for winter tyres● Start-Stop system status display››› page 223● Indication of active cylinder managementstatus (ACT®) ››› page 236● Low consumption driving ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM)● Driver assistance system display››› page 238● Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display mayvary according to the type of instrument pan-el fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutchshift)The current position of the selector lever isshown on the side of the lever and on the in-strument panel display. When the lever is inthe D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in

some cases, the gear engaged in each caseis shown on the instrument panel display .

Outside temperature indicatorIf the outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystalsymbol” on the outside temperature dis-play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C(+43 °F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux-iliary heater is switched on or when driving atvery low speeds, the outside temperature in-dicated may be higher than the actual tem-perature due to the heat produced by the en-gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).

Gear-change recommendationWhile driving, the instrument panel of certainvehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-tion for saving fuel ››› page 232.

OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-tance travelled since the last time it was resetto zero.

70


Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 69 4to reset the trip recorder to 0.● Keep the button 4 pressed forabout 3 seconds and the previous value willbe displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-ment system or the multifunction steeringwheel ››› page 72.

Speed warning for winter tyresIf the maximum speed set is exceeded, this isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 71.

Speed warning settings can be changed inthe infotainment system, by pressing the info-tainment button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 85.

Indications of the compassDepending on the equipment, when the igni-tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-cates the direction in which you are drivingwith a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and thereis no route guidance active, the graphic rep-resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving *Depending on the equipment, when driving,the display appears on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is in low consumptionstatus due to active cylinder management(ACT®)* ››› page 236.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Switch the ignition on, but do not start theengine.● Hold the button ››› Fig. 69 4 downfor more than 15 seconds to display the iden-tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).

CopyrightLegal text about the property rights andcopyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNINGEven when the outside temperature is high-er than freezing temperature, some roadsand bridges could be frozen.● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates thatthere may be a risk of freezing.● At outside temperatures above +4 °C(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the“ice crystal symbol” is not on.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note● There are different instrument panels andtherefore the versions and instructions onthe display may vary. In the case of dis-plays without warning or information texts,faults are indicated exclusively by the con-trol warning lamps.● Some indications on the instrument panelscreen may be concealed by a suddenevent, e.g. an incoming call.● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove thecause.● If when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information itemsavailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-tronics and features. »

71

Operation

A specialised workshop can programme ormodify additional functions, according to thevehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.■ Driving data ››› page 72■ Assistance systems■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 244■ ACC (only display) ››› page 248

■ Navigation■ Audio■ Telephone■ Vehicle status ››› page 74

Service Menu3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display(Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can beadjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menuTo open up the Service menu, select theRange information profile while in the Driv-ing data menu, and keep the key press-ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap-proximately 4 seconds. When it is released,the Service menu will be displayed. Nowyou can browse through the menu using the

keys on the multifunction steering wheel asusual.

Restart the service interval displaySelect the Service menu and follow the in-structions on the screen of the instrumentpanel.

Restart the oil serviceSelect the Restore Oil service menu andfollow the instructions on the instrument pan-el display.

Restart journey dataSelect the Reset trip menu and follow theinstructions on the instrument panel displayto reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Select the menu Engine code. The identify-ing letters of the engine will be shown on theinstrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clockSelect the Time menu and set the correcttime by turning the right thumbwheel of themultifunction steering wheel.

Driving data indicator (multifunc-tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to anotherVehicles without multifunction steering wheel:● Press the rocker switch on the wiperlever ››› page 81.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel ››› page 82.

Changing memoryVehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button of the multifunc-tion steering wheel.

72


Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● While in Travel data > General infor-mation press on the multi-function steer-ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo-ries1):

Since start: The memory is deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than 2hours.Since refuelling: Display and stor-age of the journey data and the con-sumption values collected. When refuel-ling, the memory is deleted.Long-term: This memory contains trav-el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or9999.9 km. When one of these values isexceeded (varies depending on the ver-sion of the instrument panel), the memo-ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets● Select the memory that you wish to erase.● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the multi-

–

–

–

function wheel pressed down for about 2seconds.

Select the instructionsIn the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-cle settings, you can display different traveldata ››› page 85.

Current consumption: The currentfuel consumption display operatesthroughout the journey, in litres/100 km;and with the engine running and the ve-hicle stopped, in litres/hour.Average consumption: The averagefuel consumption is displayed after driv-ing for approximately 300 metres.Travelling time: This indicates thehours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig-nition was switched on.Range: Approximate distance in km thatcan still be travelled if the same drivingstyle is maintained.AdBlue range or : Approximatedistance in km that can still be travelledwith the current level of the AdBlue® tankwith the same driving style. The indica-

–

–

–

–

–

tion appears from a range of less than2,400 km and cannot be deactivated.2)

Distance: Distance covered in km (m)after switching on the ignition.Average speed: The average speedwill be shown after driving for approxi-mately 100 metres.Digital speed display: Currentspeed displayed in digital format.Convenience consumers: Displays alist of the connected comfort systemsthat increase energy consumption, e.g.air conditioning.

Setting a speed warning● Select the display Warning at --- km/hor Speed warning at --- mph.● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel to store the current speedand activate the warning.● Activate: adjust to the desired speed within5 seconds using the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever or by turning thethumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel. Next, press the button or »

–

–

–

–

1) This will show all data on the display at thesame time: distance travelled, average con-sumption, average speed and autonomy.2) Not available in all countries.

73

Operation

again or wait several seconds. The speed isstored and the warning activated.● Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be-tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h(155 mph).

Display Oil temperatureThe engine reaches its operating tempera-ture when, under normal driving conditions,the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is requiredfrom the engine and the outside temperatureis high, the engine oil temperature may in-crease. This does not present any problem aslong as the warning lamps or ››› page 312 do not appear on the display.

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults displayed on the instrument panel asred and yellow warning symbols accompa-nied with messages and, depending on thecase, even an audible warning ››› page 82.The representation of the messages and

symbols may vary depending on the versionof the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.To do so, open the menu Vehicle status orVehicle ››› page 71.

Priority 1 warning (red)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Stopdriving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids cancause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon as possible.If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Information messageIt provides information about processes in thevehicle.

Driver alert system (break recom-mendation)*

Fig. 72 On the instrument panel display: driveralert system symbol.

Function and operationFatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-stantly compared with the current driving be-haviour. If the system detects that the driver istired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 72. The mes-sage on the instrument panel display isshown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the

74


button on the multi function steeringwheel ››› page 81.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 72.

Conditions of operationDriving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and offDrowsiness detection can be activated or de-activated in the Easy Connect system withthe key > SETTINGS > Driver as-sistance ››› page 85. A mark indicates thatthe adjustment has been activated.

System limitationsThe Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)● When cornering● On roads in poor condition● In unfavourable weather conditions● When a sporty driving style is employed

● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri-od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-tem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

WARNINGDo not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-gue detection system tempt you into takingany risks when driving. Take regular breaks,sufficient in length when making long jour-neys.● The driver always assumes the responsi-bility of driving to their full capacity.● Never drive if you are tired.● The system does not detect the tirednessof the driver in all circumstances. Consultthe information in the section ››› page 75,System limitations.● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving ma-noeuvre as driver tiredness.● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!

● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note● Fatigue detection has been developedfor driving on motorways and well pavedroads only.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-tem● Press the infotainment button.● Press the SETTINGS > Date and timefunction button to adjust the time››› page 85.

Setting the time on analogue the instru-ment panel● To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), pressand hold the button on the instrumentpanel until the Time is displayed.● Release the button . The time is dis-played on the instrument panel display andthe hours field is highlighted.● Afterwards, press the button until thedesired time is displayed. To scroll quickly,hold the button . »

75

Operation

● When they have finished setting the hour,wait until the minute field is marked on the in-strument panel display.● Afterwards, press the button until thedesired time is displayed. To scroll quickly,hold the button .● Release the button in order to finishsetting the time.

Adjusting the time in the SEAT DigitalCockpit● While in the Driving data menu, selectthe Range function (infotainment button > View > Driving data > Range).● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel until the Service menu is dis-played on the instrument panel display››› page 72.● Select the menu Time.● Adjust the correct time by turning the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed in anygear after running-in and with the engine hot.However, it is advisable to change up a gearor move the selector lever to D (or lift yourfoot off the accelerator) before the needlereaches the red zone ››› .

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the addition-al information in ››› page 232, Selecting theoptimal gear.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in thered zone for a short period of time.● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not makethe engine work hard.

For the sake of the environmentChanging up a gear early will help you tosave fuel and minimise emissions and en-gine noise.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 73 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge

Fig. 74 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

76


Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level hasbeen reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have theopportunity.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in diesel.Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrumentpanel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-hicle in the ››› page 346 section.

WARNINGWhen driving with low fuel, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel couldreach the engine irregularly, particularlywhen driving up or down slopes.● The steering system and the driver assis-tance systems and brakes do not workwhen the engine is running irregularly orswitches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-lar supply thereof.● Always refuel when there is only onequarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicleto stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply can cause misfiringand unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem. The catalytic converter or the par-ticulate filter may get damaged!

NoteThe small arrow on the fuel gauge next tothe fuel pump symbol points out towardsthe side of the vehicle with the fuel tankflap.

77

Operation

Natural gas level (CNG)3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas engine (CNG)

Fig. 75 Analogue instrument panel: natural gasgauge

Natural gas gaugePetrol gauge

Control lamp

It lights up green ››› Fig. 75 1

The vehicle is running on natural gas.The lamp goes off when the natural gas runs out. Theengine changes to operate with petrol.

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

The fuel reserve level has been reached.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es red.

A

B

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

Things to noteIf the vehicle is left parked for a long time im-mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev-el indicator may not accurately indicate thesame level shown after refuelling when thevehicle is started up again. This is not due to aleak in the system, but to a drop in pressure inthe gas tank for technical reasons after acooling phase just after refuelling.

NoteIn vehicles with natural gas engines, thepetrol tank fuel level gauge may display

the refuelled amount with a slight delay(depending on the refuelled amount).

78


Engine coolant temperature indica-tor

Fig. 76 Analogue instrument panel: enginecoolant temperature indicator.

Fig. 77 Digital instrument panel: engine cool-ant temperature indicator.

Cool zone. The engine has not reachedoperating temperature yet. Avoid highspeeds and stressing the engine if it hasnot reached operating temperature.

A

Normal zone. At high outside tempera-tures and when making the engine workhard, the diodes may continue lighting upand reach the upper zone. This is nocause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work-ing hard, especially at high outside tem-peratures, the diodes may light up in thewarning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only workswhen the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature toohigh.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andlet it cool down.● Check the engine coolant level››› page 314.● If the warning lamp does not switch off evenif the coolant level is correct, request assis-tance from specialised personnel.

B

C

CAUTION● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warmalso depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 72››› page 74 as a guide.● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-atures and high engine loads, there is a riskof the engine overheating.● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-tribution of the cooling air when the vehicleis moving. If the spoiler is damaged this canreduce the cooling effect, which couldcause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display and the Infotain-ment system.

There are different versions of instrumentpanels and infotainment systems, so the ver-sions and instructions on the screens mayvary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and »

79

Operation

services without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established bytime or mileage, the service intervals are al-ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this variation(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of useand individual driving styles are considered.The advance warning first appears 20 daysbefore the date established for the corre-sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-maining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) andthe time is given in complete days. The cur-rent service message cannot be viewed until500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminderIf a service or an inspection has to be carriedout soon, a service reminder will be dis-played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres thatcan still be travelled or the time until the nextservice.

Service dueWhen the time for a service or an inspec-tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-ted when the ignition is switched on and thefixed key symbol may appear on the in-strument panel for a few seconds, along withone of the following messages:

● Service now!● Please have your vehicle inspec-ted.● Oil change service due!● Oil change service and inspectiondue!

Inspection of compressed natural gastanks (CNG) reminderWhen less than 90 days for the review of thecompressed natural gas tanks (CNG), whenthe ignition is switched on, the instrumentpanel display will a reminder for review ofthe gas tanks and an audible warning will beemitted.

As approaches the service date of inspectionof the gas tanks, the message and the audi-ble warning will stop modify accordingly.

Consult a service notificationWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on theinfotainment system● Press the infotainment button .● Press the function button SETTINGS››› page 85.● Select the Service menu option to displayinformation about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Press and hold the button ››› Fig. 69 4 for more than 5 seconds to con-sult the service message

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The date of the service can only be readthrough the Service menu ››› page 72.

Resetting service interval displayIf the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-ton ››› Fig. 69 4 .● Switch ignition back on.● Release the button and press itagain for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The service interval display can only be re-set through the Service menu ››› page 72.

80


Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, theservice interval display changes to a fixedservice interval, also in vehicles with Flexibleoil change service.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen button is pressed on the wiperlever, or the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnectedfor a long period of time, it is not possible tocalculate the date of the next service.Therefore the service interval display maynot be correct. In this case, bear in mind themaximum service intervals permitted››› page 330.● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For thisreason we recommend that the service in-terval display be reset by a SEAT author-ised Dealer.● If the period of 48 months for an inspec-tion at a specialised workshop of com-pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee-ded, the vehicle may not working in thismode.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible toread the different functions of the display byscrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only be operat-ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the wiper lever

Fig. 78 Wiper lever: control keys.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 74 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button ››› Fig. 78 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press button 1 ; if necessary, several times.● To display the menus ››› page 71 or to re-turn to the selection of menus from a menu orfrom an informative display, hold down therocker button 2 .● To change from one menu to another, pressthe upper or lower part of the rocker switch.● To open the menu or the informative displayshown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds »

81

Operation

until the menu or the informative displayopens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, press the upper orlower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re-quired menu option is checked. The optionappears framed.● Press button 1 to make the required modi-fications. A mark indicates that the system orfunction is activated.

Back to menu selectionSelect Back on the corresponding menu toexit.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Operation using the multifunctionsteering wheel

Fig. 79 Right side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons to the menus and informationdisplays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 74 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 79.

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press the button ››› Fig. 79; if necessary,several times.● To change menus, use buttons or ››› Fig. 79.● To open the menu or the information dis-played, press the button ››› Fig. 79 or wait

a few seconds until the menu or the informa-tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-wheel of the multifunction steering wheel››› Fig. 79 until the desired option of the menuis highlighted. The option appears framed.● Press the button ››› Fig. 79 to make therequired modifications. A mark indicates thatthe system or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionPress the button or ››› Fig. 79.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

Fig. 80 Related video

The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.Some control and warning lamps come onwhen the ignition is switched on, and switch

82


off when the engine starts running, or whiledriving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 66, Instrument panel.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on ››› page 262.

Fault in the brake system ››› page 262.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 233.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seatbelt ››› page 15.

Press the foot brake ››› page 249.

AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCRsystem ››› page 305.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused bythe system; OR ESC or ASR in operation››› page 265.

Fault in ASR or disconnection caused bythe system; OR ASR in operation››› page 265.

ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC inSport mode ››› page 265.

Fault in the ABS ››› page 265.

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 110.

Fault in the emission control system››› page 306.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR faultin the management of the diesel engine››› page 306.

Fault in the petrol engine management››› page 306.

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 306.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 233.

Tyre monitor system ››› page 326.

Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 76.

Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys-tem ››› page 305.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-sioners ››› page 23.

Front passenger front airbag is disa-bled ››› page 23.

The front passenger front airbag is activa-ted ››› page 23.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle››› page 110.

Low engine oil level ››› page 312.

Fault in the gearbox ››› page 231.

Other warning lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 110.

Trailer turn signals ››› page 110.

Press the foot brake ››› page 226.

Cruise control (GRA) ››› page 238; ORspeed limited ››› page 241; OR Adaptivecruise control (ACC) ››› page 249.

Natural gas operating mode ››› page 78.

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 110.

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 70.

Engine cooling fluid ››› page 79.

Engine oil pressure ››› page 312. »83

Operation

Fault in the battery ››› page 319.

Service interval display ››› page 79.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-tooth® ››› page 204.

Mobile telephone battery charge status››› page 204.

Risk of freezing ››› page 70.

Start-Stop system activated ››› page 223.

Start-Stop system unavailable››› page 223.

Low consumption driving status››› page 71.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, itmay stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-ous injuries may occur.● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.

● In any vehicle, the engine compartment isa hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 308.

84


Easy Connect system

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im-portant vehicle functions and systems into asingle central control unit, e.g. menu settings,radio equipment and the navigation system.

General operating informationThe following section contains all of the rele-vant information for changing the settings inthe Vehicle Settings menu. General infor-mation on the operation of the infotainmentsystem, as well as on the warning and safetyinstructions that must be taken into account,is found in ››› page 143

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury. Operating the EasyConnect system while driving could dis-tract you from traffic.

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 81 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 82 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu

Open the Vehicle settings menu● Switch the ignition on.● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.● Press the Infotainment button andthen the Vehicle ››› Fig. 81 function button.

● OR: Press the infotainment button togo to the Vehicle ››› Fig. 82 menu.● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Vehicle settings menu.

● To select a function in the menu, press thedesired button. »

85

Operation

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 266

TyresTyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 326

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warningvalue ››› page 325

Vehicle lightsLight assistance Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touch

signalling. ››› page 110

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 116

Coming/Leaving home function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 114

Driver assis-tance

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 248

Front Assist (ambient trafficmonitoring system)

Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis-play ››› page 244

Driver alert system Activation and deactivation ››› page 74

Parking and ma-noeuvring

Parking and manoeuvring set-tings

Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear soundtreble ››› page 281

Ambient lighting – Activate and deactivate, select colour ››› page 117

Mirrors andwindscreen wip-ers

Rear view mirrors Activate and deactivate folding after parking ››› page 120

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipers if raining, rear window wiping in re-verse gear ››› page 117

Opening andclosing

Electric windows Convenience open function, all, only driver ››› page 108

Central locking Door unlocking, interior monitoring ››› page 95

Instrument panel Multifunction displayCurrent consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad-vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display,speed warning, oil temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset data for “to-tal calculation”

››› page 72

86


Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Date and time – Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format ››› page 75

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption,electric consumption, pressure –

Service – Vehicle ID number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil changeservice ››› page 79

Factory settingsRestore all settings and data Restore all settings –

Restore settings/data sepa‐rately Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring –

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing thosemenus.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

Multifunction steering wheel*

Operation of the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 83 Controls on the steering wheel. »87

Operation

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract the driv-er.

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

ATurn Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn announcement volume

up/down.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation

B a) Activate/deactivate voice control.b)

This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationc).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next track.Long press: Fast rewind/for-wardd).

No function– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functionality (exceptAUX)– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes(navigation, assistants, vehiclestatus, travel data).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

G Colour instrument panel: switch to the previous menu.Monochrome instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

HTurn

Coloured instrument panel:List of stations available(only if the instrument panelis in audio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:next track (only if the instru-ment panel is in audiomenu).

No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list.– Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

– Active route: access the view tostop route guidance.– No active route: list last destina-tions.

88



HPress Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)



up/down.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation.

B a) Enable/disable voice controlb).This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationc).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next track.Long press: Fast rewind/for-wardd).

No function– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functionality (exceptAUX)– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes(navigation, assistants, vehiclestatus, travel data).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

G Short press b): Change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semicircular dialsLong press b): access the “Personalised Profiles” configuration view. »

89

Operation


HTurn

List of sources available(audio/media).

List of sources available(audio/media). No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list.– Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

If there is a map on the DigitalScorecard: Zoom in-out (with andwithout active route).If there is no map on the DigitalPanel: the map is transferred fromthe infotainment System displayto the Digital Panel (with andwithout active route).

HPress No function No function No function No function Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

90


Operation of the audio, telephone and navigation system without voice control

Fig. 84 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract the driv-er.



up/down.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation.

B a)

– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (long press).– Active call: hang up active call (short press).– No active / incoming call: open phone menu (short press), re-dial the last active call (long press).This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, driving data).

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationb).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next track. Long press: Fast rewind/for-wardc).

No function

– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functionality (exceptAUX) – Active call: no function

No function for the othermodes (navigation, assis-tants, vehicle status, traveldata).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data). »

91

Operation


G Cycles through the audio source: FM / AM - CD - SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only if available).This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

HTurn

Coloured instrument panel:List of stations available (on-ly if the instrument panel is inaudio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:next track (only if the instru-ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list. – Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

– Active route: access theview to stop route guidance. – No active route: list lastdestinations.

HPress Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

92

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Related video

Fig. 85 Opening andclosing

Vehicle key

Fig. 86 Assignment of buttons on the remotecontrol key.

Fig. 87 Vehicle key with alarm button.

Key to the ››› Fig. 86, ››› Fig. 87Unlock the vehicleLock the vehicleUnlock only the rear lid. Press the buttonuntil all the turn signals on the vehicleflash briefly. You have 2 minutes to openthe rear lid. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again. In addition, the lamp onthe key flashes.Folding the key shaft in and outAlarm button*. Only press in the event ofan emergency! When the alarm button ispressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turnsignals light up for a short time. Pressagain to disconnect.

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 95.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-

1

2

3

4

5

cle. The range of the vehicle key with remotecontrol and new battery is several metresaround the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicleusing the remote control key, this should bere-synchronised ››› page 95 or the batterychanged ››› page 94.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle keyWhen a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 86 (arrow)once briefly, but if the button is held down fora longer period the control lamp flashes sev-eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 94.

Spare keyTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehicleelectronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will notwork if it does not contain a microchip or themicrochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys which are specially cut for thevehicle. »

93

Operation

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-cialised workshop or an approved key servicequalified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronisedbefore use ››› page 95.

WARNING● Never leave children or disabled personsin the vehicle. In case of emergency, theymay not be able to leave the vehicle ormanage on their own.● An uncontrolled use of the key could startthe engine or activate any electric equip-ment (e.g. electric windows), causing riskof accident. The doors can be locked usingthe remote control key. This could becomean obstacle for assistance in an emergen-cy situation.● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.An unauthorised use of your vehicle couldresult in injury, damage or theft. Thereforealways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly block and it wouldbe impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTIONAll of the vehicle keys contain electroniccomponents. Protect them from damage,impacts and humidity.

Note● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing thebutton unnecessarily could accidentallyunlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It isalso possible even when you are outsidethe radius of action.● Key operation can be greatly influencedby overlapping radio signals close to thevehicle working in the same range of fre-quencies, for example, radio transmitters ormobile telephones.● Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditionsand discharged batteries can considerablyreduce the range of the remote control.● If the buttons of the vehicle key arepressed or one of the central locking but-tons ››› page 98 is pressed repeatedly inshort succession, the central locking brief-ly disconnects as protection against over-loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lockit if necessary.● Spare remote control keys are availableat your Technical Service, where they mustbe matched to the locking system.● Up to five remote control keys can beused.

To change the battery

Fig. 88 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-partment cover.

Fig. 89 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

94

Opening and closing

Changing the battery● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 93.● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 88 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 89.● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 89, pressing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow ››› .● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 88, pressing itonto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di-rection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

For the sake of the environmentPlease dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environ-ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-synchronised as described below:

While the vehicle is open:● Press the button on the vehicle key.● Then close the vehicle using the key shaftwithin one minute. If necessary, remove thecover from the driver door lever ››› page 105.

While the vehicle is closed:● Press the button on the vehicle key.● Then close the vehicle using the key shaftwithin one minute. If necessary, remove thecover from the driver door lever ››› page 105.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when allthe doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. Ifthe driver door is open, the vehicle cannot belocked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system, it may only be locked

with the ignition off and the driver's doorclosed.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked fora long period (e.g. in a private garage) mayrun down and fail to start the motor.

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the central lockingsystem may cause serious injuries.● The central locking system will lock alldoors. A vehicle locked from the inside canprevent any non-authorised individual fromopening the doors and accessing the vehi-cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency oraccident, locked doors will complicate ac-cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-sengers.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. The central lockingbutton can be used to lock all the doorsfrom within. Therefore, passengers will belocked inside the vehicle. Individuals lockedin the vehicle can be exposed to very highor very low temperatures.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.● Never leave individuals locked in a closedand locked vehicle. In case of emergency,they may not be able to exit the vehicle bythemselves or get help.

95

Operation

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lidand the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

● From outside, using the vehicle key››› page 97.● From outside with the Keyless Access››› page 99 system,● From inside, by pushing the central lockingbutton ››› page 98.

Various functions are available to improve thevehicle safety:

● Security system “Safe” ››› page 101● Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlocking● Selective unlocking system● Automatic speed dependent locking andunlocking system (Auto Lock)● Emergency unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlockingIt is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-onds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle onlyWhen you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock only thedriver door, or all the vehicle doors. To selectthe required option, use Easy Connect*››› page 96.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speedof about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehiclecan also be unlocked via the central lockingswitch or by pulling one of the inside doorhandles.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Turn signalsThe turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-outThe central locking system prevents you frombeing locked out of the vehicle in the follow-ing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the central locking switch››› page 98.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

Note● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle isnot a safe.● If the LED on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a SEATOfficial Service or specialised workshop.● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-ti-theft alarm* system will only function asintended if the windows and the sunroof*are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed inthe Easy Connect* system.

96

Opening and closing

Unlocking doors● Select: key > SETTINGS > Open-ing and closing > Central locking >Unlocking the doors.

You can choose to unlock all the doors oronly the driver door when you unlock thevehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap isalso unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, onlythe driver door is unlocked. If that button ispressed twice, the rest of the doors and therear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 90 Remote control key: buttons.

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 90 button.● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-curity system: push the button again andhold for 2 seconds.● Unlock: press the button.● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or therear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply if youpress the button for at least one second.

Selective unlocking systemThe selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:● Press (once) the button on the remotecontrol key or turn the key once in the open-ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and thetank flap simultaneously:● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-ton on the remote control key, or turn the keytwice within 5 seconds in the opening direc-tion.

The Safe* security system and the anti-theftalarm* deactivate immediately when onlythe driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-gramme the security central locking systemdirectly ››› page 96.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Lock-ing system “Safe” on page 102.

Note● Do not use the remote control key untilthe vehicle is visible.● Other functions of the remote control key››› page 108, Convenience open/closefunction.

97

Operation

Unlocking and locking from the in-side

Fig. 91 Centre console: central locking button.

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 91 button.● Unlock: Press the button again ››› Fig. 91.

Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside willbe automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-cess and assistance.

WARNING● The central locking switch also workswith the ignition switched off, except whenthe “safe” system is activated.● The central locking switch does not oper-ate if the vehicle is locked from the outsideand the security system is switched on.● Locked doors could delay assistance inan emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-cially children, in the vehicle.

NoteYour vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 96. You can unlock thevehicle again using the button on thecentral locking switch.

Related video Keyless Access

Fig. 92 Convenience

Fig. 93 Technology

98

Opening and closing

Unlock and lock the vehicle withKeyless Access*

Fig. 94 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 95 Door handle: sensor surfaces

››› Fig. 95Unlocking sensor surface on the inside ofthe door handle.Locking sensor surface on the outside ofthe door handle.

A

B

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. To do this, allthat is required is to have a valid vehicle key inthe detection area where you are attemptingto access the vehicle ››› Fig. 94 and to touchone of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles ››› Fig. 95 ››› .

The vehicle can only be unlocked and lockedvia the driver's door. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further than ap-prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre-sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-essary adjustments can be made in vehicleswith a driver information system››› page 85››› page 71.

General informationIf a valid key is in the proximity of the car››› Fig. 94, the Keyless Access locking andstarting system gives the key entry as soon as

one of the sensor surfaces on the front doorhandles is touched.

The following features are then availablewithout having to use the vehicle key actively:

● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handle of the front driver’s door or thesofttouch/handle on the rear lid.● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor on the driver door handle.● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the enginewith the starter button ››› page 218.

The central locking and locking systems op-erate in the same way as a normal lockingand unlocking system. Only the controlschange.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; locking bya single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside, thevehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch. »

99

Operation

Unlocking and opening the doors(Keyless-Entry)● Grip the driver door handle. When you dothis, you touch the sensor surface ››› Fig. 95A (arrow) of the handle and the vehicle un-

locks.● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 95 B (arrow) on the driver's doorhandle. The door that is used must be closed.

In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 95B (arrow) on the driver's door handle. The

vehicle locks with the “Safe” security system››› page 101. The door that is used must beclosed.

● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 95B (arrow) of the driver door handle to lock

the vehicle without activating the “Safe” se-curity system ››› page 101.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatchWhen the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 94.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. Ifthe complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lidwill not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehiclewith a second keyIf there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a second ve-hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blockedfor engine ignition ››› page 218. In order toenable engine ignition, press the button onthe key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensorsIf the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is often activated in an unusual mannerwith the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches

of a bush rubbing against it), all proximitysensors are disabled for a certain period oftime.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.● OR: if the boot is opened.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle's KeylessAccess unlocking for one locking and unlock-ing cycle.

● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-wise the vehicle cannot be locked.● Close the door.● Push the central locking button on the re-mote control and touch the locking sensorsurface of the driver door handle››› Fig. 95 B within the following 5 seconds.Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise thevehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is alsopossible if the vehicle is locked through thedriver’s door lock.● To check that the function has been deacti-vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull

100

Opening and closing

on the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functionsTo close all the electric windows using thecomfort function, keep a finger on the lock-ing sensor surface ››› Fig. 95 B (arrow) ofthe door handle for a few seconds until thewindows have closed.

How the doors open when touching the sen-sor surface on the door handle will dependon the settings that have been activated inthe infotainment system, using the button > SETTINGS > Opening and clos-ing.

CAUTIONThe sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehiclekey in the proximity. If at least one of theelectric windows is open and the sensorsurface ››› Fig. 95 B (arrow) on one of thehandles is activated continuously, all win-dows will close.

Note● If the vehicle battery has little or nocharge, or the vehicle key battery is almostor entirely out of charge, you will probablynot be able to lock or unlock the vehiclewith the Keyless Access system. The vehi-cle can be unlocked or locked manually››› page 105.● To control the proper locking of the vehi-cle, the release function is disabled for ap-prox. 2 seconds.● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system.Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis.● Depending on the function set on the in-fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-rior mirrors will unfold and the surroundlighting will come on when unlocking thevehicle using the sensor surface on thedriver and passenger door handles››› page 120.● If there is no valid key inside the vehicleor the system fails to detect one, a warningwill display on the dash panel screen. Thiscould happen if any other radio frequencysignal interferes with the key signal (e.g.from a mobile device accessory) or if the

key is covered by another object (e.g. analuminium case).● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have alayer of salt, the correct functioning of thesensors on the door handles may be affec-ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic gearbox, it may only be locked in thegear stick is in position P.● To improve the safety of your vehicle, theremote control of the system is equippedwith a position sensor. If this remote controldoes not detect movement for a certainlength of time, the system will concludethat the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. ona night table) so it will be disabled.

Locking system “Safe”1)

When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-ty system puts the door handles out of opera-tion and makes it difficult for unauthorizedpeople to enter. The doors cannot be openedfrom inside ››› .

Depending on the vehicle, when switching theignition off, a warning may be displayed onthe control panel screen stating that the“Safe” security system is activated. »

1) Available depending on market and version.101

Operation

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”security system.● Press the locking button once on the ve-hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the“Safe” system.● Press the locking button on the vehiclekey twice.● On vehicles with the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system: touch the sensor surfaceon the outside part of the door handle twice.

When the “Safe” security system is disa-bled, the following needs to be taken intoaccount:● The vehicle can be opened and unlockedfrom the inside using an inside door handle.● The anti-theft alarm is activated.● The vehicle interior monitoring system andthe anti-tow system are disabled.

“Safe” statusOn the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-ble from outside the vehicle through the win-dow which shows the “Safe” system status.

We will know that “Safe” system is activatedby the flashing warning lamp. The indicatorwill flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fittedwith an alarm, until they unlock.

● “Safe” activated with or without the alarm:continuous flashing of the warning lamp.● “Safe” deactivated without the alarm: thelamp stays off.● “Safe” deactivated with the alarm: thewarning lamp stays off.

WARNINGDo not leave anyone (especially children)in the vehicle if it is locked from the outsideand the “Safe” security system* is activa-ted, as the doors and windows cannot thenbe opened from the inside. Locked doorscould delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it. The systemwill initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.The system is immediately activated and theturn signal light located on the driver door willflash along with the turn signals, indicatingthat the alarm and the locking security sys-tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,they will not be included in the protectionzones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-quently closed, they will be automatically in-cluded in the protection areas of the vehicleand the turn signals will flash accordinglywhen the doors close.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered forabout 30 seconds alongside a sound andoptical (flashing) warning signals and will berepeated about ten times when the vehicle islocked and the following unauthorised ac-tions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switchingon the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there isno 15 second waiting time and the alarm isactivated immediately on opening the door).● A door is opened.● Opening the bonnet.● The rear lid is opened.● When the ignition is switched on with a non-authorised key.

102

Opening and closing

● Undue manipulation of the alarm.● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 103).● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 103).● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 103).● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 103).● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key.● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanicallyusing the key, the key must be inserted intothe ignition, and the ignition must be turnedon within 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTIONIf the anti-theft security system is switchedoff, the vehicle interior monitoring and thetow-away protection are automaticallydisconnected.

Note● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery from ex-hausting if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.● The anti-theft alarm is not activatedwhen the vehicle is locked from within usingthe central locking button .● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-ly with the key, only the driver door is un-locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.Only when the ignition has been turned onwill the other doors be available - but notunlocked - and the central locking buttonwill be activated.● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operatecorrectly.● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not workingfor any reason.● The alarm is triggered immediately if oneof the battery cables is disconnected whilethe alarm system is active.

Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detectsunauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-sound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 101 isswitched off, the vehicle interior monitoringand the tow-away protection are automati-cally disconnected.

Activation● It is automatically switched on when theanti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation● Open the vehicle with the key, either me-chanically or by pressing the button on theremote control. The time period from whenthe door is opened until the key is inserted inthe contact should not exceed 15 seconds,otherwise the alarm will be triggered.● Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensorswill be deactivated. The alarm system re-mains activated. »

103

Operation

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

Deactivation through the infotainmentsystem● Turn off the ignition and select: key > SETTINGS > Opening and closing>Central locking > Interior monitor-ing.● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicleinterior monitoring and the tow-away protec-tion are switched off until the next time thedoor is opened.

False alarmsInterior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a falsealarm:● Open windows (partially or fully).● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially orcompletely).● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging from therear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, relocking will activate the alarmwith all its functions, except the volumetricsensor. This function is reactivated whenthe alarm is switched on again, unless it isdeliberately switched off.● If the alarm has been triggered by thevolumetric sensor, this will be indicated bya flashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flashis different to the flash indicating the alarmis activated.● The vibration of a mobile phone left in-side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as bothsensors react to movements and shakes in-side the vehicle.● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-vated. The vehicle interior monitoring andthe anti-tow system will only be activated

once all the doors are closed (including therear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-ually and partially opened, for example if thekey or the central locking is damaged.

WARNINGOpening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped inthe car in an emergency and will not beable to get themselves to safety.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.

WARNINGGetting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.

104

Opening and closing

● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTIONWhen opening and closing in an emergen-cy, carefully disassemble components andthen reassemble them carefully to avoiddamage to the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking or locking ofthe driver’s door

Fig. 96 Driver door handle: Concealed lockcylinder.

Fig. 97 Driver door handle: lever the cover off

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructionsrelating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 102.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 93.● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening inthe cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 97then remove the cover upwards.● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder tounlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics● The anti-theft alarm will remain activewhen vehicles are unlocked. However, thealarm will not be triggered ››› page 102.● After the driver door is opened, you have 15seconds to switch on the ignition. Once thistime has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-activates the anti-theft alarm system.

NoteThe anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked manually using thekey shaft ››› page 95.

Emergency lock of doors withoutlock cylinders

Fig. 98 Locking the door manually. »

105

Operation

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the front ofthe front passenger's door and the reardoors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it tothe right as far as it will go (if the door is onthe right side) or to the left (if the door is onthe left side).● Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-rior door handle once to unlock and open thedoor.

Childproof locks

Fig. 99 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, clockwise forthe left hand side doors ››› Fig. 99 and anti-clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, anti-clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 99 andclockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNINGCareless and unsuitable locking, openingand closing of the rear lid can cause acci-dents and serious injury.● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury!● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving.

106

Opening and closing

● Closing the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear could cause seriousinjury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid.● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate intothe interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-soning!● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-low children to play inside or next to it, es-pecially if the rear lid is open. Childrencould enter the luggage compartment,close the rear lid and become trapped. Alocked vehicle can reach extremely highand low temperatures, depending on thetime of year, thus causing serious injuries,illness or even death.

CAUTIONBefore opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in agarage.

NoteBefore closing the rear lid, make sure thatthe key has not been left inside the luggagecompartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 100 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressureon the handle ››› Fig. 100.

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing● To open: place slight pressure on the han-dle. The rear lid opens automatically.● Close: hold the gate by one of the handlesfitted to the inner lining and close it by movingit downwards.

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 101 Detail of the luggage compartment:emergency unlocking

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside inthe event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-ment allowing access to the emergencyopening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-gage compartment● Insert the key blade into the slot and movethe key in the direction of the arrow until thelock unlocks ››› Fig. 101.

107

Operation

Window controls

Electrically opening and closingthe windows

Fig. 102 Detail of the driver's door: windowcontrols.

● Opening the window: press the button .● Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right doorWindow on the rear left doorWindow on the rear right doorSafety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door has been opened and the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch *The safety control ››› Fig. 102 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off.

Convenience open/close functionThe electric windows can be opened orclosed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening:● Press and hold the button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* have reached the desired position.● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-ton on the remote control key and then keepthe key in the driver door lock until all the win-dows and the sunroof* have reached the re-quired position.

Convenience closing:● Press and hold button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* are closed ››› .● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the"lock" position until all the windows and thesunroof* are closed.

Different settings can be changed using theEasy Connect system. Select: key >SETTINGS > Opening and closing >Window operations > Convenienceopening.

One-touch opening and closingThe one-touch automatic opening and clos-ing is used to open or close the windowscompletely. It will not be necessary to holdthe button of the corresponding electric win-dow.

For the automatic raising function: pull thebutton for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

108

Opening and closing

For the automatic lowering function: pullthe button for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull onthe button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closingThe one-touch opening and closing functionis not active after the vehicle battery hasbeen disconnected or is flat and will have tobe reset.

● Pull the button of the corresponding win-dow and hold it for one second in this posi-tion.● Release the button and pull upwards andhold again. The one-touch function is nowready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windowscan be reinitialised individually or several at atime.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 104.● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.

● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergencysituation.● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-able the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on thewindows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

NoteIf the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, thewindow will automatically open again››› page 109. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before at-tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .● Next, check why the window does not closebefore attempting it again.● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficulty orthere is an obstruction, the automatic closingwill stop working for 10 seconds.● If the window is still obstructed, the windowwill stop at this point.● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Elec-trically opening and closing the windowson page 109.● The roll-back function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body getting »

109

Operation

pinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Related video

Fig. 103 Lights and visi-bility

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 112.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turnsignal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 114.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 112.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Con-trol and warning lamps on page 84.

Headlight switch

Fig. 104 Dash panel: lights control.

110

Lights

● Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 104.

Sym-bol

Ignition switch-ed off

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and sidelights off.

Light off or day-time driving lighton

The “Cominghome” and “Leavinghome” guide lightsmay be switchedon.

Automatic controlof dipped beamand daytime run-ning light.

Side light on. Daylight runninglights switched on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beamswitched on.

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control*The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on automatically in thefollowing situations ››› :

● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex-ample, when driving through a tunnel. Theyswitch off when adequate lighting is detec-ted.● The rain sensor detects rain and activatesthe wipers. They switch off when the wipershave not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime running lights consist of individu-al lights, integrated in the front headlights.These lights come on when the daytime run-ning lights are switched on. On vehiclesequipped with LED tail lights, the rear sidelight is switched on as well ››› .

The daytime running lights turn on every timethe ignition is switched on, if the switch is inposition or , according to the level of ex-terior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a lightsensor automatically switches dipped beamon and off (including the control and instru-ment lighting) or the daytime running lightsdepending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light*The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected and disconnectedvia the corresponding Easy Connect systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), thedipped beam immediately returns to its nor-mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched offIf the key is not in the ignition and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this will remindyou to turn the light off.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 112.● When the light switch is in position or .

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enoughor at all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control( ) only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are changes in light conditionsbut not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNINGThe side lights or daytime running lightsare not bright enough to illuminate the road »

111

Operation

ahead and to ensure that other road usersare able to see you.● Always use your dipped beam headlights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions.● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,when activating the daytime running lightthe rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-cle which does not have the rear lights onmay not be visible to other drivers in thedarkness, in the case of heavy rain or inconditions of poor visibility.

WARNINGIf the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could re-sult in a serious accident.● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Note● The legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.● The dipped beam headlights will onlywork with the ignition on. The side lightscome on automatically when the ignition isturned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 105 Dash panel: lights control.

The warning lamps or also show, on thelight switch or instrument panel, when thefront fog lights are on.

● Turning on the front fog lights* : pull thelight switch out to its first click position››› Fig. 105 1 , from positions , or .● Turning on the rear fog light : pull thelight switch fully out 2 from position , or. This control has only one position in ve-hicles without fog lights.● To switch off the fog lights, press the lightswitch or turn it to position .

NoteThe rear fog light can dazzle drivers behindyou. You should use the rear fog light onlywhen visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 106 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Left turn light or left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Main beam on: control lamp lit up onthe instrument panel.Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-trol lamp lit up.

Push the lever all the way down to turn off thecorresponding function.

Convenience turn signalsWhen the ignition is switched on, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

1

2

3

4

112

Lights

The convenience turn signal can be activatedand deactivated in the Easy Connect systemusing the key > SETTINGS > Light-ing > Light assistance > Convenienceturn signal ››› page 85.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the igni-tion off. If said light is on, an audible warningwill sound while the driver door is open.

● Switch the ignition off.● Move the turn signal lever up or down.

When the parking light is switched on, thefront side light and the tail light on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

WARNINGImproper or lack of use of the turn signals,or forgetting to deactivate them can con-fuse other road users. This could result in aserious accident.● Always give warning when you are goingto change lane, overtake or when turning,activating the turn signal in good time.● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the headlights may causeaccidents and serious injury, as the mainbeam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note● If the turn signal lever is left on after thekey has been taken out of the ignition lock,an acoustic signal sounds when the driverdoor is opened. This is intended as a re-minder to switch off the turn signal, unlessyou wish to leave the parking light on.● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal willflash at double speed.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normaland in no way effects the useful life of thevehicle lighting system.

● The parking light does not activate auto-matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-ted.

Fog lights with cornering light func-tion*

3 Not available on vehicles equipped with full-LED headlights and bulb fog lights.

The cornering light function is an additionalfunction to the dipped beam headlights toimprove lighting of the side of the road whentaking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when thedipped beam headlights are already on andit is activated when driving at speeds belowapproximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

● If the steering wheel is turned or the turnsignal is switched on, the front fog light grad-ually turns on. After the turn, the corneringlight function is gradually switched off.● When engaging reverse gear, both front foglights turn on.

113

Operation

“Coming home” and “Leav-ing home” function


The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”function lights up the vehicle’s immediateproximity when getting into and out of it in thedark. When switched on, the front positionand dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-cense plate light come on.

The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-ment system you can adjust the duration ofthe light switch-off delay, and activate anddeactivate the function.

Activating the “Coming Home” functionFor vehicles with light and rain sensors.● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition with the light switch in posi-tion ››› page 110.● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors.● Switch the ignition off.● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on. The delay inswitching off the headlights is counted fromwhen the last door or boot hatch is closed.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off inthe following cases:● Automatically, once the headlight turn offdelay has elapsed.● Automatically, when a vehicle door or therear lid is still open 30 seconds after startingthe engine.● When the rotary light switch is turned to po-sition ››› page 110.● With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the “Leaving Home” function● Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-ted when the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

The “Leaving Home” lighting switches offin the following cases:● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”delay period ends (default 30 sec).

● When the vehicle is locked using the remotecontrol.● When the light switch is turned to position .● With the ignition is switched on.

NoteTo activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-ing Home” function, the rotary light switchmust be in position and the light sensormust detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 108 Dash panel: hazard warning lightsswitch

The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

114

Lights

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

Emergency braking warningIf the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several times persecond to warn the vehicles driving behind. Ifyou continue braking, the hazard warninglights will come on automatically when thevehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off

automatically when the vehicle starts tomove again.

WARNING● The risk of an accident increases if yourvehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-ard warning lights and a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.● Due to the high temperatures that thecatalytic converter can reach, never parkin an area where the catalytic convertercould come into contact with highly inflam-mable materials, for example dry grass orspilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

Light range control

Fig. 109 Next to the steering wheel: headlightrange control.

The headlight range control ››› Fig. 109 ismodified according to the value of the head-light beam and the vehicle load status. Thisoffers the driver optimum visibility and theheadlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 109:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty »

115

Operation

Value Vehicle load statusa)

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

Driver only, luggage compartment fullWith trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to thoseshown in the table, it is possible to select intermediarypositions.

Dynamic headlight range controlThe control is not mounted in vehicles withdynamic headlight range control. The head-light range is automatically adjusted accord-ing to the vehicle load status when they areswitched on.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may meanthat the headlights dazzle and distract oth-er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-cident.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the head-light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-justment of the headlights to avoid dazzlingother drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution. Thisis known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-LED headlights allows the specific “touristlight” values to be met without the need forstickers or changes in the settings.

Note“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a countrythat drives on the other side, you shouldtake the vehicle to an Authorised TechnicalService to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel,displays and switches


Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument panel and switched can be adjus-ted in the Easy Connect system, using thebutton > SETTINGS ››› page 85.

With the ignition on and without light activa-tion, the analogue instrument panel lightingremains activated in daytime light conditions.The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-minishes. In some cases, e.g. when drivingthrough a tunnel without the function ac-tive, the instrument panel lighting may evenswitch off. The objective of this function is toprovide the driver with a visual indication thathe or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), thefollowing message will appear Turn on thelights on the instrument panel.

116

Visibility

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 111 Detail of roof lining: front lighting ofthe passenger compartment.

Knob Function

Turning the interior lights on or off.

The interior lights come on automati-cally when you unlock the vehicle,open a door or remove the key fromthe ignition.The light goes out a few seconds afterclosing all the doors, when locking thevehicle or connecting the ignition.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

The light controls may vary depending on thevehicle version.

Luggage compartment lightingThe light is activated when the rear lid isopen, even when the ignition and lights are

turned off. For this reason, ensure that therear lid is always closed.

Ambient light*The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console and the footwell area and,depending on the version, the front door pan-els as well.

It will be switched on at full brightness whenthe doors are opened and the lights will bedimmed during driving, when the light selec-tor is set to , or .

The brightness of the ambient light can beadjusted through the Easy Connect menu, ascan colour, in versions with lighting on thefront door panel (button > SETTINGS> Ambient lighting ››› page 85).

NoteIf not all the vehicle doors are closed, theinterior lights will be switched off after ap-prox. 10 minutes, providing the ignition keyhas been removed and the courtesy lightposition selected. This prevents the batteryfrom discharging.

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rearwindow wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 112 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals.Use control ››› Fig. 112 A to set the in-terval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe. »

117

Operation


4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.Hold the lever down for more time to in-crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreenwasher function is activated by push-ing the lever towards the steeringwheel, and the wipers operate simulta-neously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-er will wipe the window approximatelyevery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti-vated by pressing the lever, and therear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNINGIn cold conditions you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the heatingand ventilation system. The windscreenwasher fluid could otherwise freeze on thewindscreen and obscure your view of theroad.

CAUTIONIf the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operateat the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-age the wiper and the windscreen wipermotor.● If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe windscreen wipers before starting yourjourney.● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for this operation.● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can causedamage.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 45.

Note● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched onand the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.● The interval wipe speed varies accordingto the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicleis moving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.● The rear wiper is automatically switchedon when the windscreen wiper is on and thecar is in reverse gear.

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-ent situations● If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi-tion temporarily moves to the previous posi-tion.● The air conditioner comes on for approxi-mately 30 seconds in air recirculation modewhen the windscreen washer is activated, to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.● When wiping at intervals, the intervals varyaccording to the speed. The higher the vehi-cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Note● The wiper will try to wipe away any ob-stacles that are on the windscreen. Thewiper will stop moving if the obstacleblocks its path. Remove the obstacle andswitch the wiper back on again.● If you stop the vehicle with the wind-screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-matically change to a lower positionspeed. The set speed will be resumed whenthe vehicle pulls away.● The windscreen will be wiped again ap-proximately 5 seconds after the wind-screen washer has been activated, provi-ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-onds after the “drip” function, a new wash

118

Visibility

sequence will begin without performing thelast wipe. For the “drip” function to workagain, you have to turn the ignition off andthen on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 113 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 114 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending on theamount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rainsensor can be adjusted manually. Manualwipe ››› page 117.

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 113:

Rain sensor off.Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor stays on and startsoperating again when the windscreen wipersare in position 1 and the vehicle is travellingat more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Modified behaviour of the rain sensorPossible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 114 of therain sensor include:

● Damaged wipers: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activa-tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-sult in a fast and continuous wipe.● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.

0

1

A

● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread onthe roads may cause an excessively longwipe when the windscreen is almost dry.● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all.● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-duction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of thesensor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNINGThe rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

Note● Clean the sensitive surface of the rainsensor regularly and check the blades fordamage ››› Fig. 114 (arrow).● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alco-hol.● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may causesensor disruption or faults.

119

Operation

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-zle function*The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, theinterior rear vision mirror will darken auto-matically according to the amount of light itreceives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNINGIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This could cause irritation tothe skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If youcome into contact with this liquid, it mustbe rinsed with large quantities of water. Ifnecessary, get medial help.

CAUTIONIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soonas possible.

Note● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirrorwith automatic setting will not operate per-fectly.● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darkenwith automatic adjustment for anti-dazzleposition.● If you have to stick any type of sticker onthe windscreen, do not do so in front of thesensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or evenfrom working at all.

Manually folding the exterior mir-rors

The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to-wards the vehicle.

NoteBefore washing the vehicle with an auto-matic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrorsto avoid damage.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 115 Detail of the driver's door: control forthe exterior mirror.

Turn the control to the corresponding posi-tion:

Turning the knob to the desired position,adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,left) and the passenger side (R, right) tothe direction desired.Folding in mirrors.

Heated exterior mirrors*● Press the demisting switch next to the airconditioning controls ››› page 136.● The mirrors demist for some minutes to pre-vent draining the battery unnecessarily.● If necessary, press the button again to re-peat the function.

L/R

120

Visibility

● The exterior mirror heating is not activatedin temperatures above approximately +20°C(+68°F).

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking thevehicle*Using the Easy Connect system, button > SETTINGS > Mirrors and wip-ers > Mirrors can be selected to fold theoutside mirrors when parking and to lock thevehicle ››› page 85.

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-tomatically. When the vehicle is opened withthe remote control, the exterior mirrors aredeployed automatically.

WARNINGConvex or wide-angle* exterior mirrorsgive a larger field of vision. However, theymake objects look smaller and furtheraway than they really are. If you use thesemirrors to estimate the distance to vehiclesbehind you when changing lane, you couldmisjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNINGFold and unfold the exterior mirror, takingcare to avoid injuries.● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirrorwhen there is no-one in the way of the mir-ror.

● When moving the mirror, take care not totrap fingers between the mirror and themirror bracket.

CAUTION● If one of the mirror housings is knockedout of position (e.g. when parking), the mir-rors must first be fully retracted with theelectric control. Do not readjust the mirrorhousing by hand, as this will interfere withthe mirror adjuster function.● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electrically retracta-ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in orout by hand. Always use the electricalpower control.

Note● If the electrical adjustment should fail tooperate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge ofthe mirror glass.● The fold-in function on the exterior mir-rors will not activate at speeds over40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

Sun blind

Fig. 116 Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 116 1 .● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-tudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with acover 2 .

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility. »

121

Operation

● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Related video


Manual adjustment of the frontseats

Fig. 118 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat. The seat must engagewhen the lever is released!Raise/lower: pull the lever up or pushdown (several times if necessary) from itshome position.Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

WARNINGIncorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-cidents and severe injuries.● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle isstationary, as the seats could move unex-pectedly while the vehicle is in motion andyou could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-thermore, an incorrect position is adoptedwhen adjusting the seat.● Adjust the height, position and inclinationof the front seats only when their move-ment area is empty.● Make sure there are no objects in thatarea.● Make sure that the movement and lock-ing areas of the seats are clean.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-sembly of the headrests are described below.

1

2

3

122

Seats and headrests

Always make sure that the seats are correctlyadjusted ››› page 12.

All seats are equipped with a headrest. Thecentral rear headrest is only intended for thecentral seat of the rear bench. Therefore, donot install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrestAdjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head andunder no circumstances below eye level.Keep the back of your head always as closeto the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short peopleLower the headrest completely, even if yourhead is below its upper edge. In the lowestposition, there may be a small distance be-tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall peoplePush the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNINGIf travelling with the headrests removed orimproperly adjusted, the risk of severe orfatal injuries in the event of accidents andsudden braking or manoeuvres increases.● Always travel with the headrest correctlyinstalled and adjusted.● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries inthe event of an accident, adjust the head-

rest correctly based on your height, alwaysmaking sure that its upper edge is at thesame height as the top of the head, butnever below eye level. Keep the back ofyour head always as close to the headrestas possible and centred.● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-cle is in motion.● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the headrests arein the non-use position.

CAUTIONWhen assembling and disassembling theheadrests, do not let them meet the top lin-ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the frontseat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,this could damage the vehicle.

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 119 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 120 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests● Move the headrest up or down in the direc-tion of the corresponding arrow. Regardingthe rear headrest, to both raise and lower,press the button ››› Fig. 119 1 ; for the rearheadrests it is only necessary to press the »

123

Operation

button ››› Fig. 120 1 to lower them ››› inIntroduction on page 123.● The headrest must lock correctly in one po-sition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 121 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press the side button ››› Fig. 119 1 and re-move the headrest.● To refit, insert the headrest into the holes inthe backrest, pushing it down until it engages.

Removing the rear headrestsTo remove the headrest, the correspondingbackrest must be partially folded forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 124.● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press button ››› Fig. 121 1 , while simultane-ously pressing on the security hole 2 with aflat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide,and remove the headrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 125.

Fitting the rear headrestsTo mount the external headrests, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 124.● Insert the headrest bars into the guides untilthey perceptibly engage. It should not bepossible to remove the headrest from thebackrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 125.

WARNINGRemove the rear headrests only when it isnecessary to fit a child seat. After removinga child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

Seat functions

Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest

Fig. 122 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

On split rear seats*, the backrest can be low-ered in two sections.

Folding the backrest forwards● Completely lower the rear headrests››› page 123.● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 122 1 for-wards and at the same time fold the backrestdown. The rear seat backrest is not engagedwhen the red marking of the button 2 is visi-ble.

124

Seats and headrests

Converting the table to a seat● Raise and lock in the back rest. The redmarking on the tab 2 should no longer bevisible when the backrest is properly secured.

WARNINGSerious injuries can be caused if the rearseat backrest is lowered or lifted withoutdue care and attention.● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.● When lowering or lifting the rear seatbackrest, keep your hands, fingers, feetand other body parts out of its path.● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-sary protection all the parts of the rearbackrest must be properly engaged. This isparticularly important in the case of thecentre rear seat. If someone is seated in aseat whose backrest is not properly engag-ed they will fly forward, along with thebackrest, during an accident or a suddendriving or braking manoeuvre.● A red signal on the button 2 warns thatthe backrest is not engaged. Always checkthat the red marking is not visible when thebackrest is in the upright position.● When the rear seat backrest is lowered oris not properly engaged nobody else cantravel in the corresponding seats (not evena child).

CAUTIONSerious damage can be caused to the vehi-cle and other objects if the rear seat back-rest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.● Before lowering the rear seat backrest,always adjust the front seats so that nei-ther the headrests nor the cushions of therear backrest can hit them.

Removable seat covers

Fig. 123 Remove the covers. Left front seat; Rear seats »

125

Operation

Fig. 124 Label on the covers: washing instruc-tions symbols

Seasonal seats are seats with removable, re-versible, exchangeable and washable covers.

Removing the coverIt is suggested to move the rear seats to theirrearmost position so it is easier to remove andput the covers.

● Move the seat backwards until the handleof the zip is completely accessible››› Fig. 123 1 1).● Move the handle of the zip in the directionindicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 123. The re-movable cover is released.● Pull the cover off.● Move the seat back to driving position1).

Putting the cover● Move the seat backwards until the anchorpoint of the zip is completely accessible1) .● Place the removable cover on the anchorof the zip (the pillows have 2 anchor points).● Move the handle of the zip against the di-rection indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 123.● Insert the excess fabric in the joint betweenpillow and backrest, ensuring that the remov-able cover is firm1) .● Move the seat back to driving position1) .

CAUTION● Washing instructions for removable cov-ers ››› Fig. 124:– Wash the covers in a washing machine

using a delicate program, with water at30ºC and separately.

– Do not use bleach, centrifuge or dry-clean.

– Hang out the covers horizontally.– Iron the covers with steam, placing a

piece of fabric between cover and iron.– Avoid contact between the iron and the

Alcantara leather parts.

Note● If using the seats without removable cov-ers, the handle of the zip must be at thestart of the zip.● To clean the upholstery of the seats, seethe fabric cleaning section ››› page 336.

1) Only in font seats.126

Transport and practical equipment

Transport and practicalequipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage inthe vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 285 and onthe roof ››› page 131. When doing so, pleaseconsider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenlyas possible.● Always place equipment and heavy ob-jects in the boot ››› .● Position heavy items in the boot as far for-ward as possible.● Take into account the maximum authorisedweight per axle, as well as the maximum au-thorised weight of the vehicle ››› page 346.● Secure the objects to the fastening rings ofthe boot using appropriate chains or belts››› page 130.● Also place small objects safely.● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take intoaccount the pressure adhesive of the tyres››› page 322.

● In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys-tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa-ry ››› page 326.

WARNINGLoose or unsecured objects can cause seri-ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvringor braking or in case of an accident. Partic-ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-ing and they are thrown across the inside ofthe vehicle. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-ly.● Secure all objects, little and large.● Place the objects in the cabin in such away that they can never reach the airbagdeployment areas while the vehicle is inmotion.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.● Place the objects in such a way that theynever force any occupant of the vehicle tosit in an incorrect position.● When transporting objects that take up aseat, never let anyone use that seat.● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsloose in open storage compartment of thevehicle, on the cover behind the rear seator on the dashboard.● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objectsfrom the fabrics and bags inside the cabinand store them safely.

WARNINGThe transport of heavy object changes ve-hicle handling and increases braking dis-tance. Heavy objects that are not properlyplaced or secured may cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.● Never put too much load in the vehicle.Both the carrying capacity as well as thedistribution of the load in the vehicle haveeffects on the driving behaviour and brak-ing ability.● When transporting heavy objects, thedriving behaviour of the vehicle varies dueto the displacement of the centre of gravi-ty.● Always distribute the load in the vehicleas evenly and horizontally as possible.● Always place heavy objects in the bootbefore the rear axle and as far away from itas possible.● Objects in the luggage compartmentthat are unsecured could move suddenlyand modify the handling of the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual. »

127

Operation

WARNING● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Close and lock all the doors and the rearlid when you leave the vehicle. Before youlock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTIONElectrical wires or, depending on the fea-tures, the antenna embedded into the rearwindows could be damaged, even irrepara-bly, if they are in contact with objects.

NoteStraps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available fromaccessory shops.

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 125 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and fitting the shelf.

Fig. 126 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and fitting the shelf.

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 125 B fromtheir hooks A .

● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 126 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

Storing the rear shelfDepending on the equipment, once the lug-gage compartment shelf has been removed,it can be stored under the boot's variablefloor ››› page 129.

● Remove the side cover sliding it upwardsand place the shelf in the bottom.● Replace the side cover.

To remove it proceed in reverse order.

Fitting● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-cess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 126 and press down until it engages.● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 125 B to the rear lid.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-jects or in bags on the rear shelf.● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

128


CAUTION● Before closing the rear lid, ensure thatthe rear shelf is correctly fitted.● An overloaded luggage compartmentcould mean that the rear shelf is not cor-rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-aged.● If the luggage compartment is overloa-ded, remove the tray.

NoteEnsure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rearvisibility is not reduced.

Variable luggage compartmentfloor

Fig. 127 Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 128 Variable luggage compartment floor:inclined position.

Variable floor in high position● To move from the low position to the highposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 127 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Move the floor forward over the supports asfar as the rear seat backrest and then lowerthe floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 127 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Now let the front part fall to the floor andslide the floor forwards as far as the rear seatbackrest; lower the floor at the same timewith the handle 1 . »

129

Operation

Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kitarea.

● Lift the variable floor in the high position us-ing handle ››› Fig. 127 1 , pull it up and push ittowards the backrest of the rear seats until itfolds along the hinge line and the movablepart of the floor is resting on itself.● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 128 (ar-rows).

WARNING● Always secure objects, even when theluggage compartment floor is properly lif-ted.● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-ried between the rear seat and the raisedluggage compartment floor.● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage com-partment floor.

CAUTION● The maximum weight that can be loadedon the luggage compartment variable floorin the top position is 100 kg.● Do not let the luggage compartmentfloor fall when closing it. Always carefully

guide it downwards in a controlled manner.Otherwise, the lining and the floor of theluggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 129 Location of fastening rings in luggagecompartment.

There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 129 on thefront and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-jects and luggage with fastening belts andcords.

WARNINGIf unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in theevent of braking or an accident. Objectscould then be launched across the passen-ger compartment and cause serious or fa-tal injuries.

● Always use belts or straps that are suita-ble and in good condition.● Tighten the belts and straps in a crosslayout over the load placed on the bootfloor and secure them to the fastening ringssafely.● Never exceed the maximum tensile loadof the fastening rings when securing ob-jects.● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-jects, the upper edge of the load is higherthan the fastening rings.● Depending on the features, take into ac-count the instruction panels on the boot onhow to place the load.● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note● The maximum tensile load that the fas-tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.● Belts, straps and securing systems for theappropriate load can be obtained fromspecialised dealerships. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

130


Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roofcarrier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.● Any cross bars, roof carrier systems orloads secured to them must not interferewith the roof aerial or block the path of therear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environmentWhen cross bars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Securing the crossbars and theroof carrier system

Fig. 130 Attachment points for the roof railingsfor the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety rea-sons, special fixtures must be used to safelytransport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boardsor boats on the roof. Suitable accessoriescan be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-sembly instructions that come with the cross-bars and the roof carrier system in questioninto account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-ings. The distance between cross bars »

131

Operation

››› Fig. 130 A should be 75 cm and the dis-tance between the cross bars and the brack-ets of the roof railings B should be 5 cm.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roofThe maximum authorised cargo permitted tobe transport on the roof is 75 kg. This figurecomes from the combined weight of the roofcarrier, the cross bars and the load itself onthe roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNING● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system,even if the maximum authorised roof loadhas not been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward aspossible and distribute the vehicle loaduniformly.

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for smallor light items.

WARNINGObjects inside the vehicle that are not se-cured could be thrown across the cabin in

132


the event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring. This may cause severe injuries aswell as loss of control of the vehicle.● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard orheavy items in open storage compartmentsof the vehicle, on the dashboard or on thecover behind the rear seats, or insidepieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-cle.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell could diffi-cult the use of the pedals. This may causeloss of control of the vehicle and increasesthe risk of severe injuries.● Make sure that nothing prevents you fromusing the pedals at any time.● Always secure the mat in the footwell.● Never place other mats or other type ofcovers on the factory-fitted mat.● Ensure that no objects can fall into thedriver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-tion.● When the vehicle is stationary, removethe objects in the footwell.

WARNINGIf you leave lighters inside the vehicle, theymight be damaged or lit inadvertently. This

could lead to severe burns and damage tothe vehicle.● Before moving a seat, make sure thereare no lighters in the moving part area ofthe vehicle.● Before closing a storage compartment,make sure there are no lighters in the clos-ing area.● Never leave a lighter inside a storagecompartment or any other surface of thevehicle as it could ignite due to the hightemperatures on such surfaces, particular-ly during the summer.

CAUTION● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heatand cold could damage them or renderthem useless.● Objects made from transparent materi-als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,magnifying glasses or transparent suctionpads stuck to the windows can concentratesunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 131 On the front passenger side: glovecompartment.

This compartment can hold documents in A4format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, theCD player and SD card reader are located inthe glove compartment. Its operation is de-scribed in ››› page 177.

Opening and closing the glove compart-mentOpening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 131 and openthe glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up-wards.

WARNINGIf the glove compartment is left open, therisk of causing severe injuries in the event »

133

Operation

of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-vring increases.● Always keep the glove compartmentclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

Object holder under front seats*

Fig. 132 Storage compartment under the rightfront passenger seat.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handleand take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat untilit engages.

WARNINGIf the drawer is left open, it could preventuse of the pedals. This may cause seriousaccidents and injuries.● Always keep the drawer closed while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer

and any objects in it could fall into the driv-er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTIONThe drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Storage bag in the seat*

Fig. 133 Storage pocket.

There is a storage pocket on the rear of thefront seats.

CAUTIONDo not place overly large objects in thepockets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharpedges. Risk of damage to the pockets andthe upholstery.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-cle:

● In the centre console.● Inside the central armrest*.● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats.

Drink holder

Introduction

Bottle holderThe storage compartments of the driver andpassenger doors contain a bottle holder.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the bottle holders maycause injuries.● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.In the event of sudden braking or an acci-dent while driving, hot beverages in thebottle holders might spill and cause burns.● Ensure that no bottles or other objectsare dropped in the driver footwell whiledriving, as they could get under the pedalsand obstruct their working.

134


● Never place glasses, food or other heavyobjects drink holders. These heavy objectsmay be thrown across the cabin in theevent of an accident and cause serious in-juries.

WARNINGClosed bottles may explode inside the ve-hicle due to cold or heat.● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicleif the temperature inside is very high or verylow.

CAUTIONDo not leave open cans in the drink holderswhen the vehicle is in motion. If the drink isspilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it maydamage the vehicle and its electrical sys-tem.

NoteThe inside elements of the drink holderscan be extracted for cleaning.

Front drink holders*

Fig. 134 Front drink holders in the centre con-sole.

In the central console, next to the hand brake,there are two drinks holders ››› Fig. 134.

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 135 Front power socket.

● Remove the plug from the socket located inthe centre console ››› Fig. 135.● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected tothe 12 volt power socket.

The appliances connected to each powersocket must not exceed a power rating of 120Watt.

WARNINGThe power socket works only when the igni-tion is on. Improper use may cause seriousinjury or even fire. Children should there-fore not be left in the vehicle unattended ifthe button is also left behind. Otherwise »

135

Operation

there is a possibility that they may be in-jured.

CAUTIONAlways use the correct type of plugs toavoid damaging the sockets.

Note● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a batterydischarge.● Should the connected appliance over-heat, immediately switch it off and discon-nect it from the socket.● Before switching the ignition on or off, un-plug the appliances from the USB ports toprotect them from any damage caused byfluctuations in voltage.

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation andcooling

Related video

Fig. 136 Air conditioning

Introduction

Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever-al systems may have been fitted:

● The heating and ventilation heats andventilates the passenger compartment. Itcannot cool.● The manual air conditioning and the Cli-matronic cool and dehumidify the air. Theyoperate most effectively with the windowsand the sunroof closed.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

Dust and pollen filterThe dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrieragainst impurities in the air taken into the ve-hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due touse in areas with very high levels of air pollu-tion, the filter must be changed more fre-quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are freeof ice and snow, and that they are not fog-ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-erything outside.● Only drive when you have good visibility.● Always ensure that you use the air condi-tioning, heater or rear window heating tomaintain good visibility to the outside.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation mode

136

Air conditioning

switched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.

CAUTION● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.● Switch the climate control or air condi-tioner off if you think it may be broken. Thiswill avoid additional damage. Have the cli-

mate control or air conditioning checkedby a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the climate control or air con-ditioning require specialist knowledge andspecial tools. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT Official Service.

Note● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried.To prevent fogging of the windows, SEATrecommends leaving the cooling system(compressor) turned on. To do this, pressthe button. The button lamp shouldlight up.● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.● The air from the vents flows through thevehicle interior and is extracted by slots in

the luggage compartment designed for thispurpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-structing these slots with any kind of ob-ject.● Do not smoke while air recirculationmode is on, as smoke drawn into the airconditioning system leaves residue on theevaporator, producing a permanent un-pleasant odour.● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-ing at least once a month, to lubricate thesystem gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-crease in the cooling capacity is detected,a Technical Service should be consulted tocheck the system.● When the engine is under extreme strain,switch off the compressor for a moment.

137

Operation

Climatronic* controls

Fig. 137 In the centre console: Climatronic con-trols.

Automatic mode Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan,and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa-bled when the ventilation is modified manual-ly.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool-ing system.

Temperature 1 / 2

The temperature of the right and left sidescan be adjusted separately using the adjust-ers. The selected temperature is shown onthe display of the climate control panel.

Synchronisation: press button so thatsettings on the driver's side apply to the pas-senger side. Use the temperature regulator

for the passenger side to set a different tem-perature.

Blower The power of the fan is automatically adjus-ted.

Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

Air distribution / / The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.It can also be manually distributed to the de-sired zone by pressing the correspondingbutton:

The airflow is directed towards the chestThe airflow is directed towards the foot-well.The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

Defrost/demist function The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-rected at the windscreen and air recirculationis automatically switched off. To defrost thewindscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-fied at temperatures over approximately+3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximumoutput.

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is runningand switches off automatically after a maxi-mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glassis demisted. By saving electrical power youcan also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on when

138

Air conditioning

normal operating conditions are re-establish-ed.

Air recirculation ››› page 141

Seat heating ››› page 141

Switching offPress button or manually set the fan to .

Manual air conditioning* controls / Heating and fresh air system

Fig. 138 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.

Cooling mode Manual air conditioning: Press the button toswitch on or off the cooling system.

Temperature 1

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Heating and fresh air system: The tempera-ture cannot be lower than that of the exteriorair temperature, as this system cannot cool ordehumidify the air.

Blower Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power.

At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioningare disconnected. Level 4 is the maximum.

Air distribution / / / / Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to thedesired zone:

The airflow is directed towards the chest

The airflow is directed towards the foot-well.The airflow is directed towards the wind-screen and the footwell area.

Defrost/demist function Manual air conditioning: When control 3 is inposition the air flow is directed at the wind-screen and air recirculation is disconnectedautomatically or not activated. Increase thefan power to clear the windscreen of con-densation as soon as possible. To dehumidify »

139

Operation

the air, the cooling system will automaticallyswitch on.

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is runningand switches off automatically after a maxi-mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glassis demisted. By saving electrical power youcan also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on whennormal operating conditions are re-establish-ed.

Air recirculation ››› page 141

Seat heating ››› page 141

Climate control usage instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

Economic use of the air conditioningWhen the air conditioning is switched on, thecompressor consumes engine power and hasinfluence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows and the panoramic slidingsunroof closed. However, if the vehicle hasheated up after standing in the sun for sometime, the air inside can be cooled more quick-ly by opening the windows and the panoram-ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Change the temperature unit (Climatron-ic)The temperature display can be changedfrom Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen ofthe Infotainment system using the Infotain-ment button > Settings/System> Units.

The cooling system cannot be activatedIf the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.● The fan is switched off.● The air conditioner fuse has blown.● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).

● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special characteristicsIf the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

NoteAfter starting the engine, any residual hu-midity in the air conditioner could mist overthe windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-screen of condensation.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents mustremain open.

● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in therequired direction to open and close the airvents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi-tion, the corresponding air vent is closed.

140

Air conditioning

● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the dash panel, in the footwells and inthe rear area of the passenger compartment.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode isswitched off when the button is pressedor the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculationmode on and off● Press the button to connect or discon-nect manual air recirculation.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 137.● If the cooling system is switched off andair recirculation mode switched on, thewindows can mist over very quickly, con-siderably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

CAUTIONDo not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condi-tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on thecooling system vaporiser and on the acti-vated charcoal cartridge of the dust andpollen filter, leading to a permanently un-pleasant smell.

NoteClimatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasantodours from entering the vehicle interiorwhen it is in reverse and while the automat-ic windscreen wiper is working.

NoteIf the temperature regulator is turned to thecoldest setting (blue point), the air recircu-lation function and the button are auto-matically activated.

● If the function is not deactivated bypressing the button, it will deactivate afterapproximately 20 minutes.

Seat heating*

The seat cushions can be heated electricallywhen the ignition is switched on. The backrestis also heated in some versions.

Control seat heating● Press buttons or on the control panelto turn on the seat heating as high as possi-ble.● Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust itto the required level.● To turn off the seat heating, press button or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

Cases in which the heat seating shouldnot be switched onDo not switch the seat heating on if any of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The seat is not occupied.● The seat has a cover.● A child seat has been installed on the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.● The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-er than +25°C (77°F). »

141

Operation

WARNINGPeople who cannot perceive pain or tem-perature because of medications, paralysisor chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or havea limited perception of these, may sufferburns to the back, buttocks or legs whenusing seat heating.● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's temper-ature control is detected, have it checkedby a specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel onthe seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.

● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspectedby a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe seat heating should remain on onlywhen needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-sary fuel waste.

142

Introduction

Infotainment System

Introduction

Safety warnings

Safety warnings regarding the Info-tainment system

Only operate the infotainment system and itsvarious functions when the traffic situationreally permits this.

WARNING● Before starting the trip, you should famili-arise yourself with the different infotain-ment system functions.● High audio volume may represent a dan-ger to you and to others. Hearing may beimpaired if the volume is too high, even forshort periods of time.● Changes to the Infotainment system set-tings should be made when the car is stop-ped, or by a passenger.

WARNINGCurrent traffic requires maximum attentionfrom public road users. Distracting the driv-er in any way can lead to an accident andcause injuries. Operating the Infotainment

system can distract your attention from thetraffic.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.● Select volume settings that allow you tohear sounds from outside the vehicle at alltimes (e.g. emergency services sirens andhorns).

WARNINGThe volume level may suddenly changewhen you switch audio source or connect anew audio source.● Lower the base volume before connect-ing or switching audio sources.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situation.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the navigation system.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing a datamedium while driving can distract your at-tention from the traffic and cause an acci-dent.

WARNINGPlace the connecting cables of externalequipment so that they do not interferewith the driver’s mobility.

WARNINGExternal devices that are loose or not prop-erly secured could move around the pas-senger compartment during a sharp ma-noeuvre or accident.● Avoid placing external devices on thedoors, windscreen, steering wheel, dashpanel, the backs of the seats, on top of ornear the area marked “AIRBAG” or betweenthese areas and the occupants. They couldcause serious injury in an accident, espe-cially when the airbags inflate.

WARNINGThe armrest* must always remain closedduring the journey as it could restrict thedriver’s movements.

WARNINGOpening the CD player can lead to injuriesfrom invisible laser radiation.● Have CD repaired only by a specialistworkshop. »

143

Infotainment System

CAUTIONThe Infotainment system can be damagedby the incorrect insertion of a data storagedevice or the insertion of an incompatibledata storage device.● When inserting a data storage device,make sure it is correctly positioned.● Applying force may irreparably damagethe memory card slot locking mechanism.● Only use compatible memory cards.● When inserting and removing CDs , al-ways hold them at right angles to the frontof the CD drive without tilting so as not toscratch them.● If a CD is inserted while another is al-ready in the unit or being ejected, the CDdrive may be damaged. Always wait untilthe data medium is completely ejected.

CAUTIONForeign objects stuck to a CD , or if it is notround, the player may be damaged.● Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs shouldbe used.– Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel offand damage the drive.

– Do not use printable data media. Prin-ted labels and coverings may peel offand damage the CD drive.

– Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-larly shaped CDs .

– Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, DualDiscs or Flip Discs, as these are thickerthan normal CDs.

CAUTIONThe vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-aged if the volume is too high or the soundis distorted.

NoteFor the proper functioning of the Infotain-ment system it is important that the dateand time set in the vehicle are correct.

144

Introduction

Overview of the unit

Media System Colour

Fig. 139 Overview of the controls (this configura-tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency››› page 169Touchscreen ››› page 150Vehicle settings ››› page 85,››› page 201Media mode (audio sources)››› page 177

1

2

3

4

Phone Mode ››› page 204Full Link ››› page 159Main menu ››› page 149Volume. Off/on ››› page 149Slot for memory cards ››› page 185Settings button (search and selection)››› page 149

5

6

7

8

9

10

145

Infotainment System

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 140 Overview of the controls (this configura-tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency››› page 169Touchscreen ››› page 150Navigation Mode ››› page 190Media mode (audio sources)››› page 177Full Link ››› page 159Volume. Off/on ››› page 149

1

2

3

4

5

6

Settings button (search and selection)››› page 149Phone Mode ››› page 204Vehicle settings ››› page 85,››› page 201Voice control ››› page 155Proximity sensor ››› page 152Main menu ››› page 149

7

8

9

10

11

12

146

Introduction

Main menus

Fig. 141 Menu summary (these menus depend on the equipment in question). »

147

Infotainment System

Radio ››› page 169

RADIO main menu ››› page 169RDS radio data services ››› page 170Digital radio mode ››› page 171Memory buttons ››› page 172Save station logos ››› page 173Select, tune and save stations ››› page 173SCAN automatic playback ››› page 174TP traffic information ››› page 174Setup ››› page 175

Media ››› page 177

Data and file formats ››› page 177Playback order ››› page 179 ››› page 179Change the media source ››› page 182Change track ››› page 182Selecting an album by cover ››› page 183Selecting a track from a track list ››› page 183Data bank view ››› page 184Insert or remove a CD or DVD ››› page 184Memory card ››› page 185External data storage device connected to the USBport ››› page 185External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-media socket ››› page 186External audio source with Bluetooth® ››› page 187Images ››› page 189Setup ››› page 190

Navigation ››› page 190

New destination ››› page 192Route options ››› page 193 ››› page 193My destinations ››› page 194Special destinations (POI) ››› page 195View ››› page 196Split screen ››› page 196Map display ››› page 197Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 197Predictive navigation ››› page 198Import vCards ››› page 199Navigation with images ››› page 199Road signs ››› page 199Route guidance in Demo mode ››› page 199Setup ››› page 200

Vehicle

Instrument panel ››› page 201 Consumers ››› page 202Driving data ››› page 202Ecotrainer ››› page 203Vehicle status ››› page 204

Traffic ››› page 197

Traffic information (TP) ››› page 174Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 197

Telephone ››› page 204

Bluetooth® ››› page 206Tethering ››› page 206Function buttons ››› page 208Enter number ››› page 210Agenda ››› page 210Short messages (SMS) ››› page 212Call list ››› page 212Quick dial keys ››› page 213Setup ››› page 214

Sound ››› page 154

Full Link ››› page 159

Requirements ››› page 160Activation of Full Link ››› page 161Tethering of portable devices ››› page 162MirrorLink® ››› page 163Apple CarPlay™ ››› page 163Android Auto™ ››› page 164Frequently Asked Questions ››› page 165

SEAT Md. Climate ››› page 165

WLAN access point ››› page 166

Images ››› page 189

Setup ››› page 153

148

Introduction

General instructions for use

Introduction


If the setup is changed, this may change thedisplay on the screen and the Infotainmentsystem may behave in a manner different tothat described in this manual.

Note● Just press a button or the screen to usethe infotainment system's functions.● The equipment’s software depends onthe market in question, so it is possible thatnot all of the function buttons or describedfunctions are available. The equipment isnot faulty if a function button is missing.● Due to country-specific legislation, cer-tain functions may not be available on thescreen when the vehicle is travelling abovea certain speed.● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-cle may provoke noise in the speakers.● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● On vehicles with ParkPilot, the audio vol-ume is automatically lowered when reversegear is selected. The volume can be low-ered in the menu Sound > Volume.

Diagram of the menus

The Infotainment system touchscreen can beused to select the different main menus.

Press the Infotainment button toopen the menus summary .

The display of the touchscreen's main menucan be switched between “grid” and “carou-sel” and vice-versa using the menu Set-tings/System > Screen ››› page 153.

Rotary push buttons and infotain-ment buttons

Rotary/push buttonsThe left rotary push button is the on/offbutton if pressed and the volume knob ifturned.

The right rotary pushbutton is the search but-ton if turned and the selection button if press-ed.

Infotainment buttonsThe buttons on the unit are shown in thismanual with the word “infotainment button”and their function within a rectangle, for ex-ample, the infotainment button .

The Infotainment buttons are used by press-ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

When the system is turned on, it starts up withthe volume at which it was turned off, as longas it does not exceed the preset maximumstart-up volume. Select Sound > Volume.

The unit will switch off automatically whenthe key is removed from the ignition or whenthe on/off button is pressed (depending onthe equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-fotainment system is switched on again, it willswitch off automatically after approximately30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note● The Infotainment system is a part of thevehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-cle.● If the battery has been disconnected, theignition must be activated before switchingon the Infotainment system.

149

Infotainment System

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume ormuting the soundRaise the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel upward .

Lower the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel downward.

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-ume bar on the screen. The volume can becontrolled using the steering wheel controls.In this case, the changes in volume are dis-played on the instrument panel by a volumebar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settingsand adjustments. Select > Sound >Volume.

Muting the Infotainment system sound● Turn the volume control anti-clockwiseuntil it displays .● OR: press the left wheel of the multifunctionsteering wheel.

Playback is paused while in Media mode (ex-cept AUX). The screen displays .

Operation of the function buttonsand the instructions on the screen

Fig. 143 View of some of the function buttonson the screen.

Fig. 144 Sound setup menu

Active areas of the touchscreen that call up acertain function are called “function buttons”.These buttons are operated by pressing themon the screen or holding them down.

The function buttons appear in this manual asa “function button” and a button symbolinside a rectangle .

These activate functions or open submenus.The currently selected menu is displayed inthe title bar ››› Fig. 143 A of the submenus.

Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se-lected.

Increase or decrease the size of the im-ages displayed on the screenThe size of the navigation map image and im-age views can be enlarged or reduced. To dothis, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa-rate them or bring them together.

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operationand effect

AThe title bar shows the selected menuand other function buttons.

B Press it to open another menu.

C

The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scrollthe bar by sliding your finger vertically onit ››› page 151, Open list entries andsearch in lists.

150

Introduction

Display and function buttons: operationand effect

D

Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid-ing your finger across the screen.

OR: Press a point on the screen whereyou want the sound to be directed.

Fixed crosshair: Press on the arrows tomove the sound around according to yourpreferences.

OR: Press the central button to centre thestereo sound in the centre of the passen-ger compartment

Press it on some lists to move up a level,one by one.

BACK

Button to return to the previous menu ormove up through the folder structure.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens(options window) which displays othersetup options.

/ Some functions are activated or deac-tivated by pressing this box.

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

× Press to close a pop-up window or an in-put window.

/ Press them to change the setup adjust-ments one at a time.

Move the scroll button across the screenby sliding your finger.

Open list entries and search in lists

Fig. 145 Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated bypressing them on the screen or by using thesettings button.

Mark list entries using the setup buttonand open them● Turn the adjustment knob to search and se-lect from the list.● Press the setup button to activate themarked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)The scroll bar is shown on the right and itssize depends on the entries in the list››› Fig. 145 1 .

● On the bar: Press above or below the markor slide your finger vertically over the markuntil you reach the desired position.

Input window with on-screen key-pad

Fig. 146 Input window with on-screen keypad.

The on-screen keypad is used for functionssuch as entering an memory name, selectinga destination address or entering a searchterm for searching long lists.

The input line with cursor is located in the topbar of the screen. All inputs are displayedhere.

Input windows for “free text input”In the input masks for open text, you may en-ter letters, numbers and characters in anycombination. »

151

Infotainment System

Input windows for selecting a saved entry(e.g. selection of a destination address)It is only possible to enter a sequence of let-ters, numbers and characters that matches astored entry.

Matches are suggested on the input line››› Fig. 146 4 . In the case of compoundnames, it is necessary to enter a space.

Overview of the function buttons*

Function icon and text: operation and ef-fect

Letters anddigits

Press them to copy them into the inputline.

1

Press to change the keypad to anoth-er language. Keypad languages canbe selected from the menu Systemsettings > Speech.

2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

3

If there are fewer than 99, it shows thenumber of entries that can be selec-ted. Pressing opens the list accordingto the entry.

4 Scroll bar, the size of which dependson the number of matching entries.

5

If the button is held down, specialcharacters based on that letter aredisplayed. Press the desired charac-ter to enter it. Some special charac-ters can be written out instead (e.g.“AE” for “Ä”).

Function icon and text: operation and ef-fect

Space bar

Deletes characters on the input linefrom right to left.

Press and hold to delete several char-acters.

BACK Close the input window.

Proximity sensor3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

The Infotainment system is equipped with anintegrated proximity sensor ››› Fig. 140 11 .

The screen switches from display mode toautomatic operation when your hand movestoward it. In operation mode, the function but-tons are automatically highlighted to facili-tate their use.

Additional information and displayoptions

The displays appearing on the screen mayvary depending on the settings, and may dif-fer from those described here.

The status bar on the screen can display, forexample, the current time and outside tem-perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 147 Initial configuration wizard

It will help you to set up your Infotainmentsystem the first time you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainmentsystem, the initial setup screen will appear››› Fig. 147 if any parameters have not beenset or if the NEVER function button has notbeen pressed.

152

Introduction

Function button: function

CLOSECloses the Configuration Wizard, andthe main menu or last mode in whichyou used the Infotainment system willappear.

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changingthe settings of the Infotainment sys-tem. To configure the system go to:System settings and select Con-figuration wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

AIf the system includes navigation, thedate and time are set automaticallyby the GPS.

BSearch and save the radio stationswith the best reception at that time inall available bands.

C Link your mobile phone to the Infotain-ment system.

D a)Add your home address using yourcurrent position or by manually enter-ing an address.

PREVIOUS NEXT

Previous or next parameter to config-ure.When a parameter has been config-ured, the only way to reconfigure it isby clicking on it on the main menu, notby using the Previous/Next buttons.When you configure a parameter, will be displayed over it.


FINISH

Once one or more settings have beenapplied, finalise the configuration inthe main menu of the wizzard.If you have not set all the parameters,the Initial Configuration Wizard willstart the next time you turn the Info-tainment system on.

a) Only valid for Navi System.

Menu and system settings

The settings that can be selected varies de-pending on the country and the equipment inquestion, and on the vehicle's equipment.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen press the SETTINGS function button.

Press the function button of the main menu orthe functions for which you want to changethe settings. All settings are automaticallyapplied when the menus are closed.


Screen : To change the screen settings.

Menu : To select the main menu display mode(Mosaic or Carousel).


Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function isactive and the infotainment system is not used,the screen will automatically switch off after ap-prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressingone of the infotainment buttons will turn thescreen on again.

Brightness : To select the brightness level of thescreen.

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when afunction button is pressed is active.

Menu buttons tone : Activates/deactivates thesound of the Infotainment buttons.

Proximity sensor : The proximity sensors are active.Also see ››› page 152, Proximity sensor.

Show clock in standby mode : In standby mode, thetime is displayed on the infotainment systemscreen.

Date and time : Change the time and date settings.

Clock time source : To select the time source (GPSor manual).

GPS : The time and date can be selected usingthe Time zone function button. In this case, theTime and Date function buttons for manual

entry will not be active.

Manual : The time and date can be set manual-ly using the Time and Date function buttons.

Time : To set the time manually.

Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone. »

153

Infotainment System


Time format : To select the time display format (12or 24 hours).

Date : To set the current date.

Date format : To select the date display format(DD.MM.YYYY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY).

Language : To select the desired language for textsand phrases in the voice control system.

Additional keypad languages : To select additional key-board languages.

Units : To set the units of measurement of the vehi-cle's displays: distance, speed, temperature, volume,consumption and pressure.

Data transfer for SEAT apps

Data transfer for SEAT apps : This allows data to beexchanged between the vehicle and SEAT apps.They are not personal data.

Operation via apps : Change the level of interactionwith apps.

Deactivate : This limits specific functions thatrequire a higher level of security.Confirm : Allows 100% of functions of the app,

and certain specific actions on the Infotain-ment system have to be confirmed.Allow : Allows all available functions to be exe-

cuted from the app.

Voice control : To change the voice control settings››› page 155.


Remove safely : To eject the data medium (SD/USBcard) from the system. After correctly ejecting thedata storage device from the system, the functionbutton becomes inactive (grey colour).

Factory settings : When the original factory settingsare restored, all inputs and settings that are madeare deleted, depending on the selected settings.

Bluetooth : To change the Bluetooth® ››› page 214settings.

WLAN a): To change the WLAN access point settings››› page 188.

System information : Display of the system information(device number, hardware and software versions).

Update : To update the navigation data, do››› page 190 No remove the memory card whilethe navigation data are being installed.

Copyright : Information about copyright.

Configuration wizard : Opens the Infotainment system’sinitial configuration wizard.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System withWLAN connection.

NoteFor the proper functioning of the Infotain-ment system it is important that the dateand time set in the vehicle are correct.

Volume and sound settings

The settings that can be selected varies de-pending on the country and the equipment inquestion, and on the vehicle's equipment.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen press the Sound function button.● Press the main menu function button for thesettings that have to be changed. All settingsare applied instantly.

Overview of screen and function buttons


Volume : To change the volume settings.

Warnings : To set the playback volume of warn-ings, such as traffic announcements.

Navigation announcements : To set the playbackvolume of audio driving recommendations.

Voice control : To set the playback volume ofvoice control.

Maximum switch-on volume : To set the equipment'smaximum switch-on volume.

Speed-dependent volume adjustment (GALA): To setthe extent to which the volume is adjusted de-pending on the speed. The volume of the audiowill increase automatically as the speed of thevehicle increases.

Entertainment fading when parking : To adjust thedesired reduction in audio volume when ParkPi-lot is active.

154

Introduction


Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Adjuststhe playback volume when the navigator isspeaking.

Volume : To set the playback volume of audiosources connected via the AUX-IN multimediajack (Low, Medium or High). Also see››› page 154, Overview of screen and functionbuttons.

Bluetooth audio : To set the playback volume ofthe audio sources connected by Bluetooth®

(Low, Medium or High). Also see ››› page 154,Overview of screen and function buttons.

Equaliser : To adjust the sound properties.

Balance - Fader : To adjust the sound distribution. Thecursor indicates the current sound distribution in thepassenger compartment. To modify the sound distri-bution, briefly press on the desired position in thepassenger compartment view or use the arrow keysfor a step-by-step modification. To centre sound dis-tribution in the passenger compartment view, pressthe central function button located between the ar-rows.

Sound focus : Optimizes the sound in the passengercompartment.

Subwoofer *: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer.

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func-tion button is pressed is active.

Disabling voice navigation during calls : During a tele-phone conversation, audio driving recommendationswill not be given.

Adjust the playback volume of externalaudio sourcesIf you need to increase the playback volumefor the external audio source, first lower thebase volume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audio sourceis very low, increase the output volume onthe external audio source. If this is notenough, change the input volume to mediumor high.

If the sound from the connected external au-dio source is too loud or distorted, lower theoutput volume on the external audio source.If this is not enough, change the input vol-ume to medium or low.

Voice control

How it works3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 148 Voice control: main screen

Many of the radio, media, telephone and nav-igation functions can be changed by voicecommands.

The voice control of the infotainment systemwill only be available for the language selec-ted in System settings ››› page 153.

● Voice control settings ››› page 158.

Start and stop voice control● To activate voice control, briefly press thebutton on the multifunction steering wheel or the infotainment system. »

155

Infotainment System

● When activating voice control, a dialoguestart tone will sound and the main voice con-trol screen will be displayed, ››› Fig. 148, (themain screen will appear in the format selec-ted in Voice control settings ››› page 158).The spoken indications guide you through thefollowing “dialogue”.● Speak the desired command and follow theinstructions in the “dialogue”. Often a func-tion can be activated by different spokencommands. If in doubt, try speaking a com-mand or say Help.● When an action is taken (e.g., call a con-tact), the voice control ends automaticallyand you must activate it again if you want tocontinue with it. There are certain commandsafter which the voice control does not end,and it waits by saying Next command?.● To manually end voice control, press andhold the button until the correspondingconfirmation signal sounds, or briefly pressthe button twice, or press the function but-ton in the upper right corner of the screen.● You can also end the voice control byspeaking the following commands: Stop orCancel.

Voice control helpIt is recommended to listen to the Help thefirst time you use the voice control.

● Activate voice control .

● Say the command Help to start it in the lan-guage indicated System Settings, and fol-low the instructions in the dialogue. The Helpcommand can also be spoken followed by afunction of the infotainment system, such as“Help with navigation”.

Interacting with the dialogue modeIcons in upper left corner:

The system waits for a user's command.

The system has recognised a commandand will act shortly.The system transmits a spoken com-mand and confirms the command thathas been given.The system is in paused mode. (max. 3minutes).

Hide or show the voice control menu››› Fig. 148.

Operation during the dialogueWhile the infotainment system transmits aspoken instruction, the symbol will be dis-played on the screen.

● You can stop the speech by pressing theupper left icon on the screen or button andvoice recognition will resume for the user.

IMPORTANT: The system will ONLY recog-nize a command when the symbol is

/

displayed as “active” on the panel or onthe touchscreen.

If you make a mistake when speaking a com-mand, or pronounce it incompletely and ithas no effect, you may repeat the command.The symbol remains activated.

● Briefly press button to repeat the com-mand.

Voice control instructionsFollow the instructions shown below for opti-mal operation of the voice control.

● Speak slowly and clearly if possible. Thesystem will not recognise words that are un-clearly pronounced, or words and numbersthat are missing syllables.● Telephone numbers should be spoken digitby digit, or by blocks units, tens or hundreds.● Speak at a normal volume, without exag-gerated pronunciation or long pauses.● Avoid outside and nearby noise (for exam-ple, conversations inside the vehicle). Closeall doors, windows and the sliding sunroof.● Do not direct the air from the outlets to-wards the roof of the passenger compart-ment.● If you are driving at high speed, talk a littlelouder.

By activating voice control the system takesyou to the main screen ››› Fig. 148, which will

156

Introduction

display the contexts in which the system op-erates and the main commands.

From here you can command the systembased on the context that you want to oper-ate, or give a voice command directly.

When selecting each of the contexts (Naviga-tion, Telephone, Radio, Media, Voice control)a menu will displayed listing the main com-mands, and providing brief explanations ofhow to give each of them, as a help mode.

Voice control (RADIO)

Effect Voice command

LISTEN TO THE RADIO Listen to the radio

SELECT STATIONStation STATION NAME 1

Set station

SELECT FREQUENCYFrequency 87.9

Set frequency

CHANGE BANDBand FM

Change band

Voice control (MEDIA)


SOURCE SELECTION Play CD

Listen to CD


MUSIC SELECTION Select track / album / ar-tist / genre

Voice control (TELEPHONE)


CALL CONTACTS

Call Name SurnameHome

Call Name Surname Mo-bile

CALL NUMBERSCall 01234

Call number

CALL LISTShow all calls

Missed calls

REDIAL Redial

CALL MAILBOX Call mailbox

SMS Read out text message

SERVICE Breakdown call

INFORMATION Information call

Voice control (NAVIGATION)*


ENTER THE ADDRESS Enter address

HOME ADDRESS Home address


LAST DESTINATIONS Last destinations

NAVIGATION TO CON-TACTS

Navigate to Name Sur-name

ROUTE GUIDANCEStart route guidance

Route information

Voice control


VOICE CONTROL

Pardon?

Back

Main menu

Cancel voice control

Pause voice control

HELPHelp

What can I say?

VOICE BUTTON

NoteVoice control is not available when parking

157

Infotainment System

Voice control settings

● Press the infotainment button > Set-tings > Voice control.

When closing a menu, the changes will bemade automatically.


Example commands (infotainment system) : Display voicecontrol examples on the infotainment system screen.

Example commands (instrument cluster) a): Display voicecontrol examples on the instrument panel.

Voice control session start tone : a signal will soundwhen activating voice control. Press to deactivatethe signal.

Voice control session end tone : a signal will sound whendeactivating voice control. Press to deactivate thesignal.

Input tone in voice dialogue : the input tone to confirman order is activated.

End tone in voice dialogue : the end tone to confirm anorder is deactivated.

a) Available depending on equipment

158

Connectivity

Connectivity

Data transfer

Introduction

This communication can allow data to beread and/or written.

From the menu SETTINGS > Data trans-fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox toactivate/deactivate the function and a drop-down menu called Operation via appswhich controls the level of interaction be-tween the apps and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description


The Full Link connection is made through aUSB cable.

The Full Link system brings together technol-ogies that allow communication between theInfotainment System and mobile devices:

● MirrorLink®

● Android Auto™● Apple CarPlay™

InterfacesTo access the Full Link system, press the info-tainment button or press the infotain-ment button and then select theFull Link context.

WARNINGAny applications that are not suitable orexecute incorrectly may cause damage tothe vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.● SEAT recommends the use of the Appsthat SEAT provides for this vehicle.● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you mustactivate the option Settings/System >Data transfer for SEAT apps.● The interaction level of the Apps on thesystem must be: Allow.● Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-cations from improper use.● Never make modifications to the applica-tions.● Consult the instruction manual for themobile terminal.

WARNINGThe use of applications while driving candistract your attention from the traffic. Dis-tracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION● In areas where special regulations applyor the use of mobiles forbidden, it must beswitched off at all times. The radiation pro-duced by the mobile when switched onmay interfere with sensitive technical andmedical equipment, possibly resulting inmalfunction or damage to the equipment.● SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-age caused to the vehicle as a result of theuse of applications that are of poor qualityor are defective, the inadequate program-ming of the applications, the insufficientcoverage of the network, the loss of dataduring transmission or the improper use ofmobiles.

Note● The use of Full Link technology could in-crease the amount you pay for data.● SEAT recommends having a high batterycharge on the device when connected toFull Link.● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,the “Date and time” should be correctly »

159

Infotainment System

configured. Select Settings/System >Time and date.● SEAT apps are designed to communicatewith the vehicle and interact with it throughthe Full Link connection.● You can find further information on thetechnical requirements, compatible devi-ces, suitable applications and availabilityat www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 150 Message on Infotainment systemscreen.

If your vehicle does not have Full Link, youcan purchase it as an accessory at yourSEAT dealer ››› Fig. 150.

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 151 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not haveFull Link in your vehicle you can acquire itas an accessory at your Authorised Serv-ice.Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

1

2

websites to confirm whether your phoneis compatible with the system.Mirror Link– Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones– MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher– Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-vice.

Android Auto– Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/– Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher– Install Android Auto™ appApple CarPlay– Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay– iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher– Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:Use the approved USB cable suppliedwith the phone.

3

160

Connectivity

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 152 Full Link Setup

Fig. 153 Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is notnecessary to establish the connection be-tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-sary to enable all of the app features1).

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

● Switch on the Infotainment system● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle'sUSB port using a USB cable ››› page 216.● In the main menu for the Full Link settings,select Activate data transfer forSEAT apps ››› Fig. 152.

Finally, a message will appear stating thatdata transfer will commence when the deviceis connected. Please note that data is trans-ferred over connections between your vehi-cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-ted, the technology compatible with your de-vice can be used.

NoteDepending on your smartphone, it mayhave to be unlocked for the connection tooccur.

What should I do if it does not con-nect?

Restart the mobile device.

Check the USB cable. Check whether theUSB cable is damaged. Check that neitherconnection (USB/micro USB) is damaged orworn.

Check that the USB ports are correctlyconnected. Check that the USB port of thevehicle and the device are not damagedand/or deteriorated.● Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle).● Try with another compatible mobile device.● Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au-thorised service.● Have the mobile device repaired or replaceit.

1) Using the data connection to transfer thesmartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-tional charges. Please check the charges withyour operator.

161

Infotainment System

Tethering of portable devices thatsupport MirrorLink®, Android Auto™and/or Apple CarPlay™ technolo-gies

Fig. 154 Full Link menu

When you enter Full Link for the first time, thetechnologies available for pairing the porta-ble device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys-tem will offer you the technologies availablefor establishing a connection.

In the event of simultaneous connections be-tween two devices with different operatingsystems, a choice will be presented for whichone to make the connection with ››› Fig. 154.

View of the device listiPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-Play™.

There are some Android devices that supportMirrorLink® and Android Auto™.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec-ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link Settings


Activate data transfer for SEAT apps : allows the ex-change of information between the vehicle and ap-plications authorised by SEAT.

Last ModeIf the telephone connection is terminated on-ly by unplugging the cable, the next time thedevice is connected, the session will startwithout the user having to take any action1).

InformationConsult the mobile device manual.

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a countryThird party applications

1.2.

For further information:

MirrorLink®:www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Android Auto™:www.android.com/auto

Note● In order to use Android Auto™ technologyit is necessary to download the AndroidAuto™ application, located on GooglePlay™.● Only compatible applications can beused, in accordance with the technologyconnected.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be un-locked in order to establish the connection.

162

Connectivity

MirrorLink®

Fig. 155 Function buttons in the general viewof compatible applications.

Fig. 156 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables com-munication between a device and the Info-tainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operatecontent and functions on the device from thescreen of the infotainment system.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,only specially adapted applications can beused ››› in Full Link technology descrip-tion on page 159.

RequirementsIn order to use MirrorLink®, the following re-quirements must be met:

● The device must be compatible with Mirror-Link®.● Depending on the device that is used, asuitable application must be installed for theuse of MirrorLink®.

Initiating the connection● In order to initiate the connection with thedevice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-tem via the USB cable.● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages


Full Link To return to the Full Link mainmenu.

CLOSE APPS

Press to close the open apps.Then press the apps to beclosed or the Close all functionbutton to close all the open ap-plications.


1 : 1 Press to change to the mobiledevice screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

››› Fig. 156 1 Press to return to the MirrorLink®

main menu.

››› Fig. 156 2Press to display all the functionbuttons in the lower or upperright-hand margin of the screen.

››› Fig. 156 / OR: Right adjust-ment button

Allows buttons 1 and 2 to behidden or shown.

MirrorLink® setup


Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows MirrorLink®

pop-up windows in applications that support it.

Apple CarPlay™*3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones onlysupport Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a device and the in-fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operatecontent and functions on the device from thescreen of the infotainment system. »

163

Infotainment System

RequirementsIn order to use Apple CarPlay™, the followingrequirements must be met:

● Make sure that you do not have AppleCarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set-tings > General > Restrictions >CarPlay > ON.● The mobile device must be compatible withApple CarPlay™.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with the de-vice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-tem via the USB cable.

● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.● If you start the session using AppleCarPlay™ technology, it will not be possibleto pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol-lowing message will appear in the mainPhone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlayfirst to connect a different mo-bile phone.

Holding down the steering wheel multifunc-tion button or the button of the Info-tainment system will start the Apple™ “voiceengine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto™*3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a device and the in-fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operatecontent and functions on the device from thescreen of the infotainment system.

RequirementsIn order to use Android Auto™, the followingrequirements must be met:

● The mobile device must be compatible withAndroid Auto™.● The Android Auto™ application should al-ready be downloaded and installed on themobile device.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with the de-vice, just use the USB cable to connect it tothe infotainment system and follow the in-structions on the device to be paired.

● The first connection to Android Auto™ mustbe done while the vehicle is stationary.● Once the first pop-up window about ac-cepting data transfer between the car andthe device has been accepted, a messagewill appear requesting that you check your

mobile device for the confirmations neededto pair it with the Infotainment system.● If you are starting the session using AndroidAuto™ technology, the device also automati-cally connects to the Infotainment system viaBluetooth® and it will not be possible to pairanother device via Bluetooth®.

Holding down the steering wheel multifunc-tion button or the button of the Info-tainment system will start the Android™“voice engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the button.

NoteSome devices require a change in the USBconnection mode in order to use AndroidAuto™.● Make sure that your device is in “MediaTransfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it isconnected to the Infotainment system.

NoteAndroid Auto™ requires the use of Google™services, as well as certain basic applica-tions of the Android system.● Make sure that you always have Google™services updated in order to use this tech-nology.

164

Connectivity

Frequently asked questions aboutFull Link

What connection method is used? USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? No. The USB cable supplied with the device shouldbe used.

Is it possible to navigate? Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Linktechnologies if the technology is available in yourcountry and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Linksystem navigator (via a device) instead of anoth-er navigator? Advantages: Daily updates.Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages? With certified applications, you can reply, not send.

What applications will be visible while driving? Depending on the technology:– for MirrorLink®: Apps certified by SEAT and theCCC,– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible Apps? Compatible apps are listed at the following links:www.mirrorlink.com/www.android.com/auto/www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download the apps? On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® andon Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repairit? If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal-er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you shouldsee your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified? The WhatsApp situation depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink® available in my country? Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all countries and re-gions where SEAT is located.

What are the differences between MirrorLink®,Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ andApple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ isdesigned for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEATmodel? No, it is not possible.

Where can I find more information about FullLink? If you have any questions, please see our Innova-tion/Connectivity sections on our website:www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail [email protected]

SEAT Media Control*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Colour


The SEAT Media Control1) app can be usedto remotely operate some partial functions inRadio, Media and Navigation mode. Informa-tion can be exchanged between a deviceand the Infotainment System. »

1) Availability depends on the country.165

Infotainment System

The functions are operated by means of aTablet or partially by a mobile phone.

Operating requirements:● A tablet or mobile phone.● The app must be available on the corre-sponding device.● There must be a WLAN connection betweenthe Infotainment System and the device. Se-lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >Share connection over WLAN > Config-uration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti-vated:

● From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox toactivate/deactivate the function and a drop-down menu called Operation via appswhich controls the level of interaction be-tween the apps and the system . Select Menu> Settings/System > Data transferfrom mobile devices.

You can obtain information about technicalrequirements on the SEAT website or at SEATdealerships.

Telephone functions do not form part of thisapp.

Data transmission and controlfunctions

Fig. 158 SEAT Media Control Main menu

With SEAT Media Control you can operatethe Infotainment System from other places inthe vehicle in Radio and Media modes and,depending on the country and the equip-ment, you can exchange the following infor-mation between a device and the Infotain-ment System:

● Navigation destinations.● Traffic information.● Social media contents.● Audio transmission.● Vehicle data.● Location-specific information, for example,POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

The Infotainment System can be used toshare a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-ces ››› page 167, Configuration for sharinga connection over WLAN.

The Infotainment System can also use theWLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-vide Internet to the devices connected to thehotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 167, Config-ure Internet access.

Note● Data transmission may incur charges.Due to the high volume of data exchanged,SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar-iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op-erators can provide the relevant informa-tion.● The exchange of data packages maygenerate additional costs, depending onyour mobile phone rate, particularly if youare abroad (for example, roaming rates).

166

Connectivity

Configuration for sharing a con-nection over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Press the Infotainment button and thenpress the Settings menu.● Activate the wireless network. To do so,press the WLAN function button.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on thedevice that is to be connected. If necessary,refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man-ual.● Activate the mobile device assignment onthe Infotainment System. To do so, press theEnable WLAN connection button and acti-vate the checkbox.● Enter and confirm the network key dis-played on the device.

The following settings can also be made onthe menu Share connection:

● Security level: WPA2 encryption auto-matically generates a network key.● Network key: Network key automaticallygenerated. Press the function button to man-ually change the network key. The network

key must have a minimum of 8 charactersand a maximum of 63.● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of32 characters).● Do not send network name (SSID):Activate the checkbox to deactivate the visi-bility of the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the device.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to createa ciphered local wireless network quickly andsimply.

● Establish the connection with the wirelessnetwork (WLAN) ››› page 187.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN routeruntil the warning light on the router startsflashing. If the WLAN router does not supportWPS the network must be configured man-ually.

● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on theWLAN router until the WLAN light on the routerstarts flashing.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLANhotspot of an external device to establish aninternet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Activate and check the wireless hotspot onthe external device. If necessary, refer to themanufacturer’s instruction manual.● Press the Infotainment button and thenpress the Settings menu; OR access Mediaor SEAT Md. Ctrl. and press the SETTINGSmenu.● Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLANconnection and check the verification box.● Press the Find function button and selectthe device you want from the list. »

1) This function depends on the equipment andthe country in question.

167

Infotainment System

● If necessary, enter the network key of thedevice in the Infotainment System and con-firm with OK.

Manual settings:● To manually enter the network settings ofan external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the device.

NoteDue to the large number of devices on themarket, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions.

168

Operating modes

Operating modes

Radio

Related video

Fig. 159 Radio mode

RADIO main menu

Fig. 160 RADIO main menu.

Fig. 161 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button toopen the Radio main menu ››› Fig. 160.

RADIO main menu function buttons


1Memory keys (1 to 18a) memories, 3banks (screens) ››› page 172)

BAND Select the band.

STATIONLIST List of radio station that can be tuned.

MANUAL Selecting the frequency manually.

VIEW Selecting the information shown on thescreen. Only available in DAB mode.

SETTINGS Settings menu for the current frequen-cy band.

/ Previous or next station that is stored oron the station list. See Settings››› page 175.


Scan Stops the station search (visible only ifit is running ››› page 175).

a) The Media System Colour model has 15 memories.

Indications and possible icons

Display: Meaning

A

Frequency or name of the station orradio text. The name of the radio sta-tion and the radio text will only be dis-played if RDS is active.

RDS off The RDS radio data service is deacti-vated.

TPTraffic information can be retrieved:select Radio > Settings >Traffic programme (TP).

No stations with traffic news are avail-able.

The radio station is stored on a memo-ry button.

Note● The AM and DAB bands will be availableaccording to countries and/or equipment.In this case, the BAND function button willnot be displayed.● Being underground, in tunnels, in areaswith tall buildings or mountains can inter-fere with the radio reception. »

169

Infotainment System

● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.● Radio stations are responsible for thecontent of the information they transmit.

Radio data services RDS (FM band)

Fig. 162 Standard representation: FM stationlisting menu

The RDS (Radio Data System) or radio dataservice offers additional FM information suchas the display of the station name, automaticstation tracking (AF), texts broadcast by radio(Radio text), traffic announcements (TP) andthe type of station (PTY).

Depending on the country and the equip-ment in question, RDS can be deactivated inthe FM Settings menu ››› page 175.

In general, no radio data services are avail-able without RDS.

Station name and automatic station track-ingIf the RDS function is available, the names ofthe stations can be displayed on the RADIOmain menu and on the Station list .

FM stations temporarily transmit other con-tent on different regional frequencies underthe same name (for example, Station 3).

In general, automatic station tracking takescharge of switching to the frequency with thebest reception of the station that is tuned atany given time, while driving. However, thismay cause a regional broadcast to be inter-rupted.

Automatic frequency switching and automat-ic station tracking can be deactivated in FMSettings ››› page 175.

Set a station nameIn certain cases the station name is exces-sively long. This text can be locked / unlockedby pressing on the name of the station forabout 3 seconds until an audible warning is

heard (a point will flash to the right and left ofthe station name).

Radio textSome stations that have RDS transmit addi-tional information in text, the so-called radiotext.

The radio text is displayed in the upper half ofthe screen above the memory buttons››› Fig. 160 A .

The radio text display can be deactivated inthe Settings ››› page 175.

Order of the station listThe stations available at any given time aredisplayed on the station list screen (STA-TIONS function button). This list can be sortedby broadcast group, genre or alphabetically››› Fig. 162.

NoteThe RDS functionality will be limited insome countries for infrastructure reasons,and traffic announcements (TP), automaticstation tracking (AF) and station type (PTY)may not be available.1)

1) Depends on the market and unit in question.170

Operating modes

Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + andDMB audio)*

Fig. 163 Display of memory buttons in DABmode.

Fig. 164 Station information display in DABmode.

The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB +and DMB audio transmission standards.

In Europe, digital radio is transmitted overband III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240MHz).

The frequencies are called “channels” andhave an abbreviation (eg 12 A).

In a channel, several available DAB stationsare grouped together in an “ensemble”.

Starting the Digital radio mode● In the RADIO main menu, press the BANDfunction button and select DAB .

The last DAB station that was selected will beplayed, if it can still be tuned in that location.

The selected DAB station is shown in the topbar of the screen. The selected station en-semble is shown below ››› Fig. 163.

Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv-ice Components)Some DAB stations temporarily or perma-nently offer additional stations (for example,for the transmission of sporting events).

DAB stations containing additional stationsare identified on the station list by the symbol.

Select additional stationsPress the name of the main station on theDAB main menu to select an additional sta-

tion. Or, select the additional station from thestation list.

On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad-ditional tuned station is displayed next to theabbreviated name of the main DAB station.

Additional stations can not be saved.

Automatic station trackingDAB radio is not currently available every-where. DAB radio mode displays the areaswithout DAB coverage .

If the DAB station that is being listened to canno longer be tuned (e.g. there is no DAB cov-erage), the infotainment system tries to findand tune the same station in the differentavailable frequency bands. If the station cannot be found again, the radio sound is muted.Automatic station tracking can be activatedin the DAB Settings in the following modes››› page 176:

● DAB - DAB station tracking: The radio triesto tune to the same station on an alternativeDAB frequency. To allow station tracking,both DAB stations need to broadcast thesame station identification, or to signal theother corresponding DAB station throughDAB.● DAB - FM Automatic switching: The radiotries to tune to the same station in the FM fre-quency band. To allow station tracking, theDAB station and the FM station need to »

171

Infotainment System

broadcast the same station identification, orto signal the other corresponding FM stationthrough DAB. When the corresponding FMstation has been found, “FM” is displayed be-hind the name of the station. If the corre-sponding DAB station becomes availableagain, it returns to DAB mode after a whileand the “FM” identification is concealed.● Switch to a similar station: This allowsservice providers to indicate alternative sta-tions with similar content. In this way, if the ra-dio loses coverage of a DAB station and doesnot find an alternative FM or DAB frequency, itis possible to tune to a station with similarcontent.

Radio textSome stations transmit additional text infor-mation, the so-called radio text.

Radio text is displayed in the upper half of thescreen above the memory buttons ››› Fig. 163or on the Station Information or Radio textscreens of the Display menu ››› page 172.

The radio text display can be deactivated inthe DAB Settings ››› page 176.

SlideshowSome stations transmit additional visual infor-mation in the form of images.

These images are displayed as a slideshowon the Stations or Slideshow screens of theScreen menu ››› page 172.

The slideshow can be displayed in full screenby pressing on the current image.

Screen MenuThe function buttons refer to the menu that isdisplayed when the View button is pressed››› Fig. 163.


Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons ››› Fig. 163.

Station List : Simultaneous display of radio text andslideshows instead of memory keys ››› Fig. 164.

Radio text : The radio text is displayed instead of thememory buttons.

Slideshow : Slideshows are shown in full screen mode.

NoteNot all DAB stations broadcast radio textand slideshows.

Memory buttons

Fig. 165 RADIO main menu.

In the Radio main menu, you can store sta-tions from all available frequency wave-lengths on the numbered function buttons.These function buttons are called “memorybuttons”.

Storing the station on the memory buttonsSee: Preset stations ››› page 174.

Change the memory bank (screens)● Move your finger over the screen from leftto right or vice-versa.● OR: Press one of the function buttons››› Fig. 165 A

172

Operating modes

Selecting the station from the memorybuttons● Press the memory button corresponding tothe desired station.

The stored stations can only be played bypressing the corresponding memory buttonprovided it can be received at your currentlocation.

Storing the station logo on the memorybuttonsSaved stations can be assigned logos››› page 173.

Save station logos

Save automatically (only in FM and DABmode)1)

When a station is saved, the station logo isautomatically assigned.

If there are 2 or more logos in the database,there is the option to choose the appropriateone.

Saving manuallyStation logos can be imported from a com-patible data medium (for example, memorycard or memories with a USB port).

● Press the function button Settings and thenStation logos .● Press the stored station button that youwant to use to store a station logo.● Select the source in which the logo hasbeen memorized (for example, SD Card 1 ). It isrecommended that the logos should be put inthe root directory of the memory unit.● Select the station logo.● Repeat the process to assign other logos;press the infotainment key to returnto the Radio main menu.● If you want to change the logo of a memorybutton where a button has already beensaved, it must first be deleted from the buttonin question.

NoteNot all stations are in the database, so it isnot always possible to assign logos auto-matically.

Select, tune and save stations

Selecting stations

Select the sta-tion using thearrow keys

Press the function button or ››› Fig. 160.This switches between stationsavailable for tuning ››› page 175.

Selecting sta-tions from thestation list

Press the Stations ››› Fig. 160function button to open the stationlist.

Browse the list and tune to the sta-tion you want by pressing it.

Press the BACK ››› Fig. 161function button to close the list. If itis not used, the list will close auto-matically after a while.

Manually tuning a station frequency

Display thefrequencyband

Press the Manual function button››› Fig. 160.

Changing thefrequency stepby step

Turn the adjustment knob.

OR: Press the + or – keys on thedial displayed on the screen. »

1) Not available for the Media System Colourmodel.

173

Infotainment System

Manually tuning a station frequency

Quickly trackthe frequencyband

Press and hold one of the arrowbuttons on the left of the multifunc-tion steering wheel. Releasing thebutton switches to the next radiostation that can be tuned.

OR: Keep your finger on the scrollbutton in the frequency band andmove your finger to move the but-ton.

Hide the fre-quency band

Briefly press the settings button.

Selecting a station using the mem-ory button also ends the manualselection of frequencies. If no oper-ations are performed, the frequen-cy band is hidden after a while.

Presetting stations

Saving the sta-tion that is be-ing listened to.

Press and hold the desired presetbutton ››› Fig. 160 until an audiblesignal is heard.

The tuned station is stored on apreset button.

Presetting stations

Saving a sta-tion from thestations list

Press the Stations ››› Fig. 160function button to open the stationlist.

The stations that are already stor-ed on a memory key are marked onthe station list with the symbol ››› Fig. 161.

Select the desired station bypressing and holding it down onthe screen. A screen opens for sav-ing the station on the memory but-tons.

Press the memory key where thestation will be saved.

A sound is heard and the station issaved on the memory button. Re-peat the process to continue sav-ing other station on the list.

Delete presetstations

The Settings menu can be usedto delete all of the saved stationstogether, or separately››› page 175.

Automatic playback (SCAN)

When automatic playback is active, all tune-able stations in the selected frequency bandare played for approximately 5 secondseach.

Start and end automatic playback

Start automaticplayback

Press the Settings function buttonand then select Scan .

End automaticplayback

Press the function button tostop automatic playback on thestation that is being played.

Automatic playback also endswhen a station is selected man-ually using the memory buttons,or when the screen is changed.

Traffic information (TP)

It is only possible for traffic information to betracked with the TP function if the station inquestion can be tuned. Stations with the traf-fic information function are shown on the RA-DIO main menu and on the station list withthe symbol TP ››› Fig. 160 and ››› Fig. 161.

Some stations without their own traffic infor-mation support the TP function by broad-casting traffic announcement from other sta-tions (EON).

Activating and deactivating the TP func-tion● In the Settings (FM, AM, DAB) menu,activate or deactivate theTraffic programme (TP) function button by

pressing it ››› page 175.

174

Operating modes

Active TP function and station selectionTraffic announcements are played in Audiomode.

If a station without the TP function in FM modeis selected, the radio tries to find stations withthis function in the background. If none arefound, it will be displayed half way up the lefthand side of the screen .

In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta-tion is automatically tuned in the backgroundas long as there is one available. Dependingon the situation this operation may take sometime.

Incoming traffic announcementIn Audio mode, traffic announcements areplayed automatically when they are re-ceived.

While the traffic announcement is playing, apop-up window is displayed and the radioswitches, if necessary, to the traffic informa-tion station.

Media mode is interrupted and the volume isset as adjusted ››› page 154.

The volume of the traffic announcement canbe changed with the volume control . Themodified volume remains as set for subse-quent warnings.

● Press the Cancel function button to end thecurrent travel warning. The TP function re-mains active.● OR: Press the Deactivate function button toend the current traffic announcement anddeactivate the TP function permanently. Thefunction can be reactivated in the Settingsmenu.

Settings (FM, AM, DAB)

FM settingsSelect the FM frequency band by pressingthe infotainment key .

OR: Press the BAND function button and se-lect the FM frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe FM settings menu.


Sound : Sound settings ››› page 154.

Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). Whenautomatic playback is active, each of the tuneablestations in the selected frequency band are playedfor approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 174.

Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons and . The setting applies to all frequency bands(FM, AM and DAB).


Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-tween all of the saved stations in the selectedfrequency band.

Station List : The arrow keys are used to switchbetween all of the tuneable stations in the selec-ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking oftraffic information stations) is active ››› page 174.

Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta-tions.

Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta-tion logos saved in the memory keys ››› page 173.

Radio text : The radio text is active ››› page 170, Ra-dio text.

Advanced settings a): Radio data services (RDS) set-tings.

Autostore station logos a): The stations saved on thememory buttons are automatically assigned ra-dio station logos if they are available in the info-tainment system. Also see ››› page 173.

Station logo region a): This allows the vehicle's re-gion (country) to be selected. This optimizes theautomatic assignment of station logos. The op-tion also allows the system to select the regionautomatically.

Automatic frequency control (AF) a): Automatic sta-tion tracking is active. When there is no check incheck box , the function button RDS regionalwill be inactive (grey). »

175

Infotainment System


Radio data system (RDS) a): The Radio Data System(RDS) is deactivated ››› page 170. If there is nocheck in check box , the traffic informationstation (TP), radio text, station name and pro-gram type functions will not be available.

RDS regional a): Set the RDS automatic stationtracking ››› page 170.

Fixed : Only alternative frequencies of theset station with an identical region programare set.

Automatic : It always changes to the frequen-cy of the set station that has the best signalat the time, even if a regional broadcast thatis in progress is interrupted.

a) This depends on the country and unit in question.

AM settingsSelect the AM frequency band by pressingthe infotainment key .

OR: Press the BAND function button and se-lect the AM frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe AM settings menu.










Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored onmemory buttons ››› page 173.

DAB settingsSelect the DAB frequency band by pressingthe infotainment button .

OR: Press the BAND function button and se-lect the DAB frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe DAB settings menu.










Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored onmemory buttons ››› page 173.

Radio text : The radio text is active ››› page 170, Ra-dio text.

Advanced settings : DAB services settings.

Autostore station logos a): Station logos are as-signed automatically when the radio stations arestored on the memory buttons ››› page 173.

DAB traffic announcements : DAB traffic announce-ments are played in the same way as TP trafficannouncements in any equipment mode.

176

Operating modes


Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements(news, sports information, weather, warnings,etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac-tive.

DAB - DAB station tracking : Automatic station track-ing within the DAB frequency range is active.

Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FMfrequency band is permitted for automatic sta-tion tracking.

a) This depends on the country and unit in question.

Media

Introduction


Audio or image sources containing files in dif-ferent media are known as “media sources”.These audio files can be played through thecorresponding players or the infotainmentsystem's audio inputs.

Only supported files are displayed andplayed. Other files are ignored.

CopyrightConsider the legislation on the intellectualproperty of audio and video files.

Note● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technolo-gy and patents are licensed by FraunhoferIIS.● This product is protected by certain Mi-crosoft Corporation copyright and proper-ty rights. The use or commercialization oftechnology of this type outside the config-uration of this product, without a licencefrom Microsoft or an authorised Microsoftbranch is prohibited.

● The infotainment system only plays com-patible undamaged audio files; other filesare ignored.● Check the list of compatible devices onthe SEAT website.

Requirements for data media and files

The factory-fitted CD and DVD players areclass 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE0837.

Only standard 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards canbe inserted in the infotainment system.

Any playable file formats on the list will here-inafter be known as “audio files”. A CD con-taining these types of audio files is called an“audio data CD”. »

177

Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System

Data media Requirements for playing audio files

Optical discs:– Audio CD (up to 80 min).– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) withthe ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.

Memory cards:– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB).– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems.

USB data media:– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications.– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system.– Different generations of iPods™a), iPads™a) and iPhones™a).– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “ReadyForVista”..

– Digital Audio Specification.– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia-ble transfer rate.– WAV files (.wav).– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer ratesof up to 384kbit/s.– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy protection.– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s.– FLAC files (.flac).

– Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.– Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.– File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per di-rectory.

Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 186.

Playing audio files via Bluetooth®b). – The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth® profile››› page 187.

Play audio files through WLAN. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 187

a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.b) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

178

Operating modes

Valid for the model: Media System Colour

Media sources Playback requirements

SD and MMC memory cards according to file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, XFAT orVFAT (max 2GB), as well as SDHC and SDXC memory cards.

– MP3 files (.mp3) with a rate of 8 to 320 kbit/s or variable rate.– WMA (.wma) files up to 9.2 mono / stereo without copy protection.– Playlists in PLS, M3U, WPL and ASX formats.– Playlists not exceeding 1000 items or 20 kB.– File names and addresses no longer than 256 characters.– On memory cards: a maximum of 1000 folders and a maximum of 2048 files.

USB data support with specification 2.0 according to file system FAT12, FAT16,FAT32 or VFAT (max 2GB).

Playing audio files via Bluetooth®a). – The external media player must support the Bluetooth A2DP.

a) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

Read and bear in mind the instruction manualfor the external data storage device.

Limitations and indicationsDirt, high temperatures and mechanicaldamage can cause data media to fail. Con-sider the indications provided by the manu-facturer of the data media.

Quality differences between data media pro-duced by different manufacturers can causeplayback interference.

Consider copyright legislation!

The configuration of data media or of theequipment or programs used for recordingmay cause some tracks or data media to beunreadable. On the Internet, for example, canbe found information about the best way torecord audio files or data media (compres-sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.).

The reading speed can vary considerablydepending on the size, the usage status(copying and deleting processes), the struc-ture of the folders and the type of files of thedata media used.

Playlists only establish a certain playbackorder. The files are not saved in them. Play-lists cannot be played if the files on the datamedia are not saved to the path to which theplaylist refers.

A cover can only be displayed when thename starts with “Cover”, “Folder” or “Al-bum”.

Note● Do not use memory card adaptors, USBextension cords or USB hubs!● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-ration or loss of files on data storage devi-ces.

Playback order of files and folders

Fig. 167 Example of the structure of an audiodata CD. »

179

Infotainment System

The audio files stored on data media areoften arranged by file folders and playlists to establish a certain playback order.

Depending on their name on the data media,tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu-merically and alphabetically.

The illustration shows an example of a con-ventional audio data CD, containing tracks, folders and subfolders ››› Fig. 167.

In this case the tracks will be played as fol-lows1):

Tracks 1 and 2 in the root directory(Root) of the CDTracks 3 and 4 in the first F1 folder ofthe CD root directoryTrack 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of fold-er F1.Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 ofsubfolder F1.1Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 offolder F1Track 8 and 9 in the second folder F2

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Note● The playback sequence can be modifiedby selecting the different playback modes››› page 181.● Playlists do not play automatically, theyhave to be selected directly from the trackselection menu ››› page 183.

MEDIA main menu

Fig. 168 MEDIA main menu.

Using the Media main menu, different mediasources can be selected and played.

● Press the infotainment button toopen the Media ››› Fig. 168main menu.

It will continue playing the last media sourceselected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicatedon the dropdown list when pressing theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 168.

If there is no available media source, the Me-dia main menu is displayed.

1) The Mix/repeat including subfolders function mustbe active in the Media settings menu››› page 190.

180

Operating modes

MEDIA main menu function buttons


SOURCE MEDIAa)

The media source that is beingplayed. Press to select another me-dia source.

CD b): Internal CD drive››› page 184.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo-ry card ››› page 185.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data stor-age device connected to the USBport ››› page 185.

AUX : External audio source con-nected to the AUX-IN multimediasocket ››› page 186.

BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio››› page 187.

WLAN *b): External audio sourceconnected by WLAN ››› page 187

SELECTION Depending on the level, track list,folders or source.

/ Changes track in Media mode orfast forward/rewind.

Playback stops. The functionbutton changes to .

Playback is resumed. The func-tion button changes to .


SETTINGS Opens the menu Media Set-tings.

REPEAT

Repeats all the tracks that are onthe same memory level as the trackbeing played at that moment. If inthe Media Settings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the sub-folders.

REPEAT

Repeat the current track.

MIX

Random playback of tracks that areat the same memory level as thecurrent track. If in the Media Set-tings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the sub-folders.

a) Depends on the equipment in questionb) Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Indications and symbols of the MEDIAmain menu

Display: Meaning

A

Information about the artist name, al-bum name and song title.

Audio CD: track information. If no da-ta is available, it only displays Trackand the corresponding order number.

Display: Meaning

B

Album cover.The system prioritizes the display asfollows:1st Cover embedded in the file(s).2nd Image in the file folder.3rd Icon of the connected device.

CThe playing time so far and time re-maining in minutes and seconds.

TPa) The TP function is active and can betuned in.

a) There is no traffic news station availa-ble.

a) Depends on the market and unit in question.

NoteWhen the media source is inserted, playingwill not start automatically; it is necessaryfor the user to select the source. Nor willthe media source change when it is ejec-ted.

181

Infotainment System

Switching the Media source

Fig. 169 MEDIA mode: switching media source.

● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● From the Media main menu, press theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 169 and se-

lect the desired media source.● OR: from the Media main menu, press the Infotainment button repeatedly tocycle through the available media sources.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources notselected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

When a Media source that has already beenplayed is selected again, playback is re-sumed from the point at which it was stop-ped.

NoteThe Media source can be changed in theTrack list view: select Media > View.

Changing track in the MEDIA mainmenu

Fig. 170 MEDIA main menu.

The tracks of the Media source that is beinglistened to can be changed successively us-ing the arrow buttons.

The arrow buttons cannot be used to exit aplaylist or start the playback of a playlist.Both actions have to be performed manuallyfrom the track selection menu ››› page 183.

Control through the MEDIA main menu

Action Function

Briefly press the func-tion button once.

At the start of the currenttrack. If the track hasbeen played for less than3 seconds, it returns tothe start of the previoustrack.

Action Function

Press the function but-ton twice in a row.

If the track has beenplayed for more than 3seconds, it returns to thestart of the previous track.If the first track is beingplayed, pressing the but-ton goes back to the lasttrack on the data mediathat is being played.

Briefly press the func-tion button once.

To the next track. Itchanges the last track tothe first track on the datamedia that is beingplayed.

Press and hold functionbutton .

Rewind.

Press and hold functionbutton .

Fast forward.

Slide your finger hori-zontally over the screen.

Change to the previ-ous/next track, with thesame playback times aschanging tracks with thekeys or .

182

Operating modes

Selecting an album by cover3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 171 Selection by cover.

Clicking on the current cover ››› Fig. 170 1will display all of the album covers availablein the active Media source ››› Fig. 171.

It is possible to browse through all the albumsby sliding the covers right or left, by using thebottom horizontal scroll bar, or by using thesettings button.

The cover selection view closes after approx-imately 5 seconds of inactivity and the Mediamain menu is displayed again.

Selecting a track from a track list

Fig. 172 Media Mode: list of folders of a Mediasource.

Fig. 173 Media Mode: list of tracks of a Mediasource.

Open a list of tracks● Press the SELECT function button on theMEDIA main menu ››› Fig. 170 to open thetrack list. The track that is playing is highligh-ted ››› Fig. 173.

● Search the track list and press the trackyou want.

If there is track information available, thetrack (on audio CDs) or the file name (MP3) isdisplayed instead of Track + num.

Overview of the function buttons in thetrack list


AOpen the Sources menu. Select anoth-er Media source by pressing.

B

Indicates the media source being ex-plored. If pressed, it goes to the root ofthe device shown on the icon.

CD a): Internal CD drive ››› page 184.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memorycard ››› page 185.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data storage de-vice connected to the USB port ››› page 185.

BT AUDIO : External Media Player con-nected via Bluetooth® ››› page 187.

AUX : Audio source connected to theAUX-IN socket ››› page 186.

WLAN *a): External audio source connec-ted by WLAN ››› page 187.

CPress the function button to open the topfolder of the Media source. »

183

Infotainment System


Start playback of the first track.

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on thesame memory level as the track beingplayed at that moment. If in the MediaSettings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders››› page 190.

Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on thesame memory level as the track beingplayed at that moment. If in the MediaSettings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders››› page 190.

CLOSE× To close the tracks list.

a) Not available for the Media System Colour model.

NoteTracks, folders and playlists can also beselected by turning the setting button, andthey can be played or opened by pressingit.

Data bank view3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 174 Media Mode: data bank view

On the track list, click the Show database viewoption. The content of the current Mediasource will be listed by Playlists , Artists ,Albums , Genres , Tracks and Videos

››› Fig. 172.

To return to the folder view, press theShow folder view option on the SELECTION

menu.

Insert or eject a CD3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 175 Slots for data storage devices in theglove compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating theunit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert orchange the data storage device before mov-ing off!

The CD drives can play audio CDs and audiodata CDs .

Insert a CD● Insert a CD into the slot ››› Fig. 175 3 withthe printed side facing upwards, until theequipment inserts it automatically.

Ejecting a CD● Press button 1 .

184

Operating modes

● The CD in the drive will be ejected andmust be removed within approximately 10seconds.

If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, itis automatically retracted for security rea-sons without activating the CD mode.

Unreadable or defective CDIf the data on an inserted CD cannot be reador a defective CD is inserted, the correspond-ing warning appears on screen.

Depending on the equipment, unreadableCDs are automatically ejected 3 times andreinserted to start another three read at-tempts before this indication is displayed.

Note● Uneven road surfaces and strong vibra-tions can cause playback to jump.● When the temperature inside the equip-ment is too high, loading and playback ofCDs is disabled.● If after inserting a number of differentand receiving the CD , every time, contact aspecialised workshop.

Inserting or ejecting a memorycard

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two slots for SDcards.

Inserting a memory cardInsert the compatible memory card, with thecut corner first and the contacts facing down,into slot ››› Fig. 175 2 or ››› Fig. 139 9 , until itclicks into place.

Removing a memory cardThe inserted memory cards must be pre-pared for removal.

● From the main Media menu, press theSETTINGS button to open the Media Set-tings menu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings/System,to open the System settings menu.● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 andUSB2*. Pressing the corresponding functionbutton disables it.● Press the inserted memory card. The mem-ory card “jumps” to the eject position.● Remove the memory card.

External data storage device con-nected to the USB port

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two USB con-nections ››› page 216.

Where this manual refers to external datastorage devices, this means USB mass stor-age devices containing supported audio files,such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed andplayed. Other files are ignored.

Further operation of the external data medi-um (changing track, selecting tracks andplayback modes) is described in the appro-priate chapters of this manual ››› page 177.

Instructions and restrictionsCompatibility with Apple™ devices and othermedia players depends on the unit.

The USB port supplies the usual USB volt-age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks larger than 32 GB must bereformatted for the FAT32 file system in somecircumstances. You will find the necessarysoftware and information on the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions andlimitations regarding requirements for mediasources. »

185

Infotainment System

iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™Depending on the country and equipment,iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ can be connec-ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve-hicle’s USB port and used as audio sour-ces.

After connecting an iPod™, iPad™ or iPhone™,the list views specific to the iPod™ are dis-played at the top selection level ( Play-lists, Artists, Albums, Tracks, Podcasts, etc.).

Possible error messages after connectingexternal data media

Error message Cause and actions totake

Source is notsupported.

It is not possible to play theexternal data media or es-tablish communication withthe adapter cable that isused.

Check that the external datamedia is connected and op-erates correctly.If possible, update the exter-nal data media software.

Device not re-sponding.

Communication interrupted.

Check that the external datamedia is connected and op-erates correctly.

Error message Cause and actions totake

Due to the large number of different data storage de-vices and various iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ genera-tions available, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions described here.

DisconnectingData media be prepared for disconnection.

● From the main Media menu, press the SET-TINGS button to open the Media Settingsmenu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings/System,to open the System settings menu.● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 andUSB2*. Pressing the corresponding functionbutton disables it.● Now the data storage device can be dis-connected.

Note● Do not connect an external media playerat the same time to play music via Blue-tooth® and via the USB port with the In-fotainment system, as this could causeplayback limitations.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.

● If a connected source is not recognized,disconnect and reconnect it. If the datacannot be played, the corresponding indi-cation will be displayed.

External audio source connected tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the equipment and countrythere may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket››› page 216.

The connected external audio source cannotbe operated with the infotainment system'scontrols.

Connecting an external audio source tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket● Connect the external audio source to theAUX-IN multimedia socket.● Start playback on the external audiosource.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select AUX .

The playback volume of the connected ex-ternal audio source should be adjusted to thevolume of the other audio sources››› page 154.

186

Operating modes

Information on operating an external au-dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-media socket

Operation Effect

Selection of another au-dio source from the Info-tainment system.

The external audiosource continues to run inthe background.

Stopping playback onthe external audiosource.

The infotainment systemremains in the AUX menu.

Remove the connectorfrom the AUX-IN multi-media jack.

The infotainment systemremains in the AUX menu.

Note● Please read and observe the manufac-turer's instruction manual for the externalaudio source.● Interference noise may be heard if the ex-ternal audio source is powered from the 12-volt power socket of the vehicle.

Connect an external audio sourcevia Bluetooth®

In the Bluetooth® Audio mode, audio files thatare playing on a device connected by Blue-tooth can be listened to on the infotainmentsystem.

Conditions● The Bluetooth® audio source must supportthe A2DP Bluetooth® profile.● In the Bluetooth® Settings menu theBluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be

on. Select Telephone > Settings >Bluetooth

Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the externalBluetooth® audio source.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select BT audio .● Press Search for new device in order to con-nect an external Bluetooth® audio source forthe first time ››› page 206.● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audiosource from the list.● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theBluetooth® audio source regarding the rest ofthe procedure.

You may need to manually start playback onthe Bluetooth® source.

When the Bluetooth® device is disconnected,the infotainment system remains in Blue-tooth® audio mode.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the Bluetooth® audio sys-tem can be operated through the infotain-ment system depends on the connectedBluetooth® device.

Note● Due to the large number of possible Blue-tooth® audio sources, it is not possible toguarantee fault-free operation of all de-scribed functions.● Always switch off the warning and serv-ice tones on a connected Bluetooth® audiosource, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele-phone, to prevent possible interferencenoise and malfunctions.● The system response time may vary, de-pending on the connected external play-back device.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.

Connect an external audio sourcevia WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

WLAN allows wireless connection between anexternal audio source and the Infotainmentsystem. »

187

Infotainment System

To use this connection, the device being con-nected must have an app compatible withthe UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-cation protocol.

Conditions● Having a compatible (UPnP) app installedon the device.● Having the Enable WLAN connection op-tion active, which can be found in the wirelessconnection configuration.● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-ment system using a password generated bythe system. Pairing must be done from thedevice to be connected.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer● Start the UPnP app or the app for the play-back of the WLAN audio source.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select WLAN .● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theWLAN audio source regarding the rest of theprocedure.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the WLAN audio can becontrolled via the Infotainment system de-pends on the connected WLAN device andthe app that is used.

Note● The Infotainment system does not pro-vide an internet connection, it only estab-lishes a wireless connection between themobile device and said system.● Via the WLAN, only the connection be-tween the device and the Infotainment sys-tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-pends on the application itself.

WLAN settings3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

To access the WLAN settings the ignition mustbe switched on.

● Select the Media main menu by pressingthe infotainment key .● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Media settings menu.● Press the WLAN function button, then theShare connection over WLAN button willappear along with information about the useof WLAN.● Press the function button Share connec-tion over WLAN, then you can EnableWLAN connection and access the WLANnetwork Configuration.● Press the Configuration function buttonto configure the WLAN network.


Enable WLAN connection : To turn on/off the WLAN net-work.

Security level: WPA2 encryption automaticallygenerates an 8 character network key.

Network key : Network key automatically gener-ated. Press the function button to manuallychange the network key. The network key musthave a minimum of 8 characters and a maximumof 63.

SSID : Name of the WLAN network of the infotain-ment system.

Do not send network name (SSID) : Activate thecheckbox to deactivate the visibility of the WLANnetwork.

To save the changes made to the configura-tion of the mobile access point, press theSAVE button.

188

Operating modes

Images3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 176 Images main menu.

Using the Images menu, image files can beviewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-show.

The image files must be stored on a compati-ble data storage device.

● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect the Images context.● Press the SOURCE function button to selectthe source where the pictures in question arelocated.


SOURCE Selection of the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files.


The image viewed was obtained viaGPS localisation and upon pressingthis function button, the navigatormenu opens to start a route to thisdestination.

/

Rotate the image view 90° left orright, or by swiping your fingersacross the screen in a circular direc-tion.

Reset the view of the image.

To stop the playback of a slideshow.The function button changes to .

To continue the playback of a slide-show. The function buttonchanges to .

/ Change image PREVIOUS or NEXT,or by sliding your finger horizontallyacross the screen.

SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu.

Enlarging or reducing the view● Slide 2 fingers across the screen, movingthem further apart or closer together.● OR: turn the settings button.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu-tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Image settings

Open the Image settings menu● Press the SETTINGS function button in themain Images menu.


Image view : To adjust the image view format.

Automatic: Images scale to the size of thescreen (the image may not be displayed com-pletely).

Complete: The images are displayed fully onthe screen.

Display time : To adjust the display time of imagesduring a slideshow.

Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeatedinfinitely.

189

Infotainment System

Media settings

● Select the MEDIA main menu by pressingthe infotainment key .● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Media settings menu.



Mix/repeat including subfolders : Subfolders are inclu-ded in the selected playback mode ››› page 177.

Bluetooth® : Bluetooth® settings ››› page 214

WLAN a): WLAN settings ››› page 188.

Remove safely : To prepare external data media for ex-traction or disconnection. See also ››› page 185, In-serting or ejecting a memory card and››› page 185, External data storage device con-nected to the USB port .


a) Only available for the model: Navi System withWLAN connection.

Navigation1)

Introduction


General informationA GPS (Global Positioning System) satellitesystem locates the current position of the ve-hicle. The vehicle’s sensors measure the dis-tance travelled. The measurements are com-pared with the stored detailed map resour-ces, according to road indications stored inthem. Traffic reports, if any, will also be takeninto account in the route calculation (dynam-ic route guidance ››› page 197). Using all thedata available, the Infotainment system cal-culates the optimum route to the destination.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-tion or hotel.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep-resentations will guide you to your destina-tion.

Depending on the country, some functions ofthe infotainment system will not be availableon the screen when travelling higher than acertain speed. It is not a malfunction, but isdue to compliance with legislation.

CAUTIONThe navigation announcements may be in-accurate (e.g. due to out-of-date data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-ceive any data from GPS satellites (tunnels,garages), navigation can still continue usingthe vehicle sensors.

Possible limitations in navigationIn areas that are not or are only partially digi-tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-waystreets and road categories), the Infotain-ment system will still attempt to provide routeguidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-tion data, it may not be possible to determinethe exact position of the vehicle. This maymean that navigation is not as precise as usu-al.

1) Only available for the model: Navi System190

Operating modes

Navigation area and update of navigationdataRoad layouts change continuously. There-fore, if the navigation data are not updated,then errors or inaccuracies may occur.

SEAT recommends updating navigation dataon a regular basis.

Updating and using navigation da-ta from an SD card

The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SDcards.

Navigation data that is currently valid for thisunit in order to allow all functions to be usedin full.

Updating navigation dataThe current navigation data can be downloa-ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEATdealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet atwww.seat.com.

Using navigation data● Insert the memory card ››› page 185.● Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains naviga-tion data, the following message appears:“The source contains a valid naviga-tion database”. Navigation can be started.

Note● The inserted memory card must be pre-pared before it is ejected ››› page 185.● Navigation is not possible without the SDcard.● Do not remove the memory card whilethe navigation data is in use. This coulddamage the memory card!● The navigation memory card cannot beused as a memory for other files.● SEAT recommends using only the originalSEAT cards. The use of other memory cardscould limit its operation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 178 Navigation main menu

Navigation functions can only be used if thenavigation data for the area where the vehi-cle is driving is available in the infotainmentsystem.

The Navigation main menu allows you to se-lect a new destination, call up a previouslyused or stored destination and search forpoints of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu● Press the Infotainment button to open thelast menu that was open in navigation.● If the Navigation main menu is not dis-played, press the infotainment button again until the main navigation menu is dis-played.● OR: Press the function button to returnmenu by menu to the Navigation menu. »

191

Infotainment System

Navigation main menu function buttonsand indicators


A The split screen is displayed ››› page 196.

B Messages and function buttons on the mapdisplay ››› page 197.

NEW DEST : To enter a new destination ››› page 192.

ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 193.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina-tions ››› page 194.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-tions and restaurants) within a particular search area››› page 195.

VIEW : To modify or activate or deactivate the splitscreen and show POI ››› Fig. 178 A ››› page 196.

SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settingsmenu.

New destination (entering the des-tination)

Fig. 179 Search screen.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theNew destination function button.● Press the OPTIONS function button and se-lect the desired destination entry type(Search, Address, POI or On the map).● Using voice control*, if you say Town, streetand number, without pauses, and then the in-struction “Start Route Guidance” a route tothe given destination will start.

SearchSearch for addresses and Points of Interestusing the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 179.

For cities, post codes and points of interest,the full details must be entered. You can alsosearch for points of interest by names or cat-

egories. When necessary, enter the name ofthe city to refine the search.

››› Fig. 179

A Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),which allow you to move within the text.

SteeringWhen narrowing down the destination ad-dress, please note that every entry restrictsthe available range of subsequent selections.

To enter an address press the function but-tons in the following order:

● Country, City (or postcode), Centre(starts the route to the centre of the indicatedcity), Street, Number, Junction, LAST DES-TINATIONS, START (starts route guidance tothe selected destination).

On the map● Select the destination on the map or enterit using GPS coordinates and confirm withOK .


Store : Store the point of interest in the destinationmemory ››› page 194.

Edit : Edit the destination or enter another one.

Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga-tion Settings > Route options.

192

Operating modes


Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected pointof interest.

After starting route guidance

Fig. 180 Route calculation.

When starting route guidance, the route iscalculated based on the data that have beenselected in the Route options menu.

Three alternative routes are proposed››› Fig. 180. These 3 routes correspond to theselectable route options: Economical, Fastand Short.

Blue route: Economic route.Red route: Fastest route.Orange route: Shortest route to thedestination, even if it results in longertravelling time.

–––

● Select the desired route by pressing it.

The route criteria settings in the Route op-tions menu are modified accordingly.

If a route is not selected, the route guidancestarts automatically after approx. one minuteaccording to the setting selected in Routeoptions.

Once the route has been calculated, the sys-tem gives the first navigation announcement.Up to 3 navigation announcements are givenbefore a turn.

● Press the adjustment knob to listen to thelast audible navigation instruction.

The indicated distances depend to a greatextent on the type of road and the trafficspeed. On motorways, for example, naviga-tion announcements are received much earli-er than in urban traffic.

The corresponding navigation announce-ments are also given on roads with severallanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex-ample: “Leave the roundabout at the secondexit.”

A navigation announcement informs youwhen you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing youthat you have reached the “destination area”is given if the exact destination cannot bereached.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-ceive information about reported traffic con-gestion on the route. An additional navigationannouncement is given if the route is recalcu-lated.

During a navigation announcement, you canchange its volume using the button .

For other announcement settings, selectNavigation > Settings > Navigationannouncements.

Note● If you miss a turning during route guid-ance and are currently unable to turn back,keep on driving until the navigation systemoffers a new route.● The quality of the announcements andrecommendations depends on the naviga-tion data available and any reported trafficproblems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, press the Routefunction button.

The Route function button is only displayedwith route guidance activated.


STOP GUIDANCE : Aborts current route guidance. »193

Infotainment System


ENTER DESTINATION : To enter a new destination or anew stopover ››› page 192.

CONGESTION AHEAD : To exclude a section of theroute. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route func-tion button and then CANCEL CONGESTION .

ROUTE DETAILS : View route information.

My destinations (destination mem-ory)

Fig. 181 List of saved routes.

The stored destinations can be selected fromthe My destinations menu.

● Press the My destinations function button inthe main Navigation menu.● Select the desired function button.STORE POSITION , ROUTES , DESTINATIONS ,LAST DESTINATIONS OR HOME ADDRESS .

Store position● By pressing the STORE POSITION functionbutton, the current position is stored as aFlagged destination in the Destinationmemory.

To save the stored position permanently as aflagged destination, change the name ofthe position in the destination memory. Oth-erwise, the saved position is overwritten whenanother flagged destination is saved.

● Mark the Flagged destination in thedestination memory.● Press the Store function button.

The name can be changed in the followinginput window. Press the function button tostore the destination.

RoutesIn the Route mode, you can define variousdestinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always thevehicle’s current position. The destination isthe end point of a route. Stopover destina-tions are driven to before the destination.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theMy Destinations function button.● Press the ROUTES function button.

If you have not stored any routes or want tocreate a new route, press the New route func-

tion button and then follow the instructions asfor a new destination, before pressing Store .

Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol-lowing function buttons:


Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the Newroute or Edit menu

Function button or message: function ormeaning

Stopover.

Destination.

... Estimated time of arrival.

... Calculated distance to destination.

... Estimated travelling time.

... Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display thefunction buttons

Delete destination.

194

Operating modes

Press on the destination to display thefunction buttons

Starting route guidance direct to the se-lected destination. The stages are omit-ted.

Opening the detailed view of the desti-nation in question.

Available function buttons

New desti-nation Add a new destination.

Destina-tions

Adding a new destination from Mydestinations.

Storing To store the created route in the routememory.

Start Start route guidance.

Calculate To update the calculated distance andestimated arrival time.a)

Stop To stop active route guidance.b)

Moving a stopover or a destination toanother position on the list. Press anddrag to move the destination.

a) Only displayed with route guidance activated andwhen a destination has been added to the tour.b) Only displayed with route guidance activated.

Last destinationsList of last destinations.

My destinations● Press the Options function button and se-lect the desired function button.


Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-ually and from imported vCards ››› page 199, Im-porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites : List of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : List of phone book contacts that have astored address (postal address).

Home addressOnly one address or position can be storedas the home address at any one time.

Pressing will start guidance to the storedhome address.

If a home address has not yet been stored,an address can be assigned.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current positionas the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manually.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Special destinations (POI)

Fig. 182 Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the memoryare divided into different categories. Eachcategory of special destinations has a sym-bol assigned to it.

In the Map settings menu, you can indicatethe special destinations that you want to dis-play on the map. Up to 10 categories can beselected.

Selecting a point of interest on the map


1There are several points of interest in the area.Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-terest.

2The only point of interest in this zone. Press thesymbol to open the detailed view of the point ofinterest. »

195

Infotainment System

Quick POI searchIn the Navigation main menu, press the POIsfunction button and the three main catego-ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the nameof the point of interest to be searched usingthe new destination keypad, or pressSearch nearby on the map ››› table on

page 196.

View

In the Navigation main menu, press the Viewfunction button.


Map display in two dimensions (con-ventional).

Map display in three dimensions (bird'seye view).

The places of interest and well-knownbuildings are also shown in detail andin colour.

a) To display the destination on the map.

a) To display the route on the map.

Auto /Day / Night

To switch between day and night for-mat.

SPLITSCREEN Show the split screen ››› page 196.


POI Show special destinations.

a) Only displayed with route guidance activated.

Split screen

Fig. 183 Split screen displayed.

The split screen ››› Fig. 183 A shows the in-formation detailed below:

● Pressing the name displays a menu with thefollowing options:


Audio : Current audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current di-rection and position of the vehicle (street name).


Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them bringsup additional information

FREQUENT ROUTES a): Information on the user's mostfrequent routes.

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates andGPS status (satellite reception).

a) Only shown when route guidance is not active orwhen predictive route guidance is active.

Press the function button to close the splitscreen.

At any moment during navigation, pressinginside the map will make a pop-up menu ap-pear with the following functions:


Clicking on the map : Shows the details of the selectedpoint, street name or coordinates

Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI : name of the point of interest (when only oneappears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when youpress on the map on various POIs grouped to-gether).

FAVOURITE : name of the favourite.

HOME ADDRESS : Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

196

Operating modes


Add stopover : only when you have an active route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but onlyfor the area around the point selected on the map.

Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 184 Messages and function buttons onthe map display.

Function buttons and messages on themap display.To activate function buttons and , pressfunction button .


Current altitude indicator.

To centre the vehicle position on the map.


To centre the destination on the map. On-ly displayed if either Display destinationon map or Display route on the map is se-lected ››› page 196.

To change the orientation of the map(north-facing or direction of travel). Onlyavailable in 2D mode.

Map scale. To change the scale, turn theadjustment knob or move two fingers to-gether or apart on the screen.

Selecting automatic scaling. If the func-tion is active, the symbol is displayed inblue.

Briefly increases the scale of the map(zoom) The selected scale is displayedagain after a few seconds.

Mute or repeat the last announcement,change the announcement volume.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data aredisplayed. Select Navigation > Settings >Map > Show road signs.

Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti-nation guidance (TRAFFIC)

Fig. 185 Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receivestraffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-ground, if a traffic information station istuned.

Traffic bulletins are displayed on the mapwith symbols ››› page 198, Traffic reportson map (selection) and they are requireddynamic destination guidance ››› page 198,Dynamic route guidance.

List of available traffic reports● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect the Traffic context. »

197

Infotainment System

Dynamic route guidanceIn order for dynamic route guidance to func-tion, Dynamic route must be activated in theroute options.

If a traffic report is received that affects theroute being travelled, an alternative route willbe searched for if the system calculates thattime can be saved.

If, on the other hand, the alternative routedoes not save time, the route will continuewith the traffic jam. In both cases, an an-nouncement will be made.

Shortly before reaching the announced traf-fic jam, it is indicated again.

Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc-tions of a traffic bulletin does not always savetime, for example, if alternative routes arecongested. The effectiveness of dynamicnavigation depends on the traffic bulletinsthat are received.

The rest of the route that has to be travelledcan be manually excluded to force its recal-culation ››› page 193.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning

: Slow traffic

: Traffic jam

Symbol: Meaning

: Accident

: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)

: Slippery road surface

: Danger

: Road works

: Strong wind

: Road closed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic incidents thatdo not affect the calculated route calculatedare displayed in grey.

The length of a traffic jam on the calculatedroute is shown by a red line.

Incidents that affect the calculated route andthat have led to the recalculation of the routeare shown in orange.

The position of a symbol indicates the start ofthe traffic jam if it is precisely specified in thetraffic bulletin.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 186 Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, thesystem detects and stores in the backgroundroutes that are frequently followed, withoutthem being active destination routes.

This function has no navigation announce-ments unless the user requires them, gettingthem by pressing the settings button.

● On the main screen of the Navigation menu,in the pop-up window, press theFREQUENT ROUTES button. To display fre-

quently followed routes press theShow on map button ››› Fig. 186.

198

Operating modes

Importing vCards (electronic busi-ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-ory● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainmentsystem ››› page 177.● In the Navigation main menu, press theSETTINGS function button.● In the Navigation settings menu, pressthe Import destinations function button.● Select the data carrier with the vCardssaved in the list.● Press Import all vCards from this folder .● Confirm the import notice with the OKfunction button.

Saved vCards will now be in the destinationsmemory ››› page 194.

NoteOnly one address per vCard can be impor-ted. In the event any vCards have multipleaddresses, only the main address will beimported.

Navigation with images

Fig. 187 Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting routeguidance● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect the Images context.● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 187 function but-ton and select the data storage device wherethe images are stored.● If the image displayed was taken using GPSlocalisation, the function button will appear.Press to start guidance to a destination.

Road signs indication

The road sign indication must be active in theNavigation settings menu ››› page 200.

If there are road signs stored in the navigationdata for the route you are driving on, the sys-

tem can display them on the map (e.g. aspeed limit).

Take into account the age of the navigationdata and the limitations of the navigation sys-tem ››› page 190!

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigationsettings menu, an additional pop-up win-dow opens when you start route guidance.

● Pressing the Demo mode function buttonstarts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti-nation you have entered.● If you press the Normal function button, a“real route guidance” starts.

The development and operation of virtualroute guidance is compatible with the devel-opment and operation of real route guidance.

Virtual route guidance is repeated afterreaching the fictitious destination and re-starts from the starting point, if it is not inter-rupted beforehand.

When the starting point of the Demo mode ismanually set Navigation settings menu,the virtual route guidance starts from that po-sition. »

199

Infotainment System

A manually entered starting point is overwrit-ten with the current location of the vehicle, ifthe vehicle starts moving.

NoteDeactivate the Demo mode after use, oth-erwise you will always have to selectwhether to start a virtual route or normalroute before starting route guidance.

Navigation settings

● In the Navigation main menu, press theSETTINGS function button.


Route options : To make the route calculation adjust-ments.

Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting routeguidance, 3 alternative routes are proposed››› page 193.

Route : Route type selection.

Economical : Route calculation, taking econom-ic aspects into account.

Fast : The fastest route to the destination.

Short : The shortest route to the destination,even if it results in longer travelling time.

Most frequent routes : Information on the user's mostfrequent routes.


Dynamic route : Dynamic route guidance activateswhen a TMC is received ››› page 197.

Avoid motorways and highways : Motorways will beexcluded from the route calculation whereverpossible.

Avoid ferries and motorail trains : Ferries and motorailtrains will not be taken into account for the routecalculation, wherever possible.

Avoid toll roads : Toll roads will be excluded fromthe route calculation, whenever possible.

Avoid tunnels : Tunnels will be excluded from theroute calculation, whenever possible.

Avoid routes requiring toll stickers : Mandatory tollstickers (stickers certifying that the toll has beenpaid) will be excluded from the route calculationwhenever possible.

Show available toll stickers a): To mark the availabletoll stickers on the list( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers must be active).Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac-count in the route calculation if it is marked thatthe toll sticker is available.

Include trailer : Calculate the route and arrivaltime, depending on whether a trailer is being tow-ed.

Map : To adjust the map display settings.

Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi-gation data for the road you are driving on are dis-played during route guidance ››› page 199.


Lane guidance : During route guidance, an addi-tional indication is displayed to recommend alane when driving, and when turning on roads withseveral lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor-mation about the area that is being driventhrough.

Show favourites : The destinations saved as favour-ites on the map are displayed ().

Show POIs

Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate-gories shown on the map ››› page 195.

Show brand logos for POIs : Displays logos of theselected special destinations categories (e.g.displays logos of service stations).

Manage memory : To make adjustments to the storeddestinations.

Sort contacts : To select the sequential order ofagenda entries recorded with postal addresses,see also ››› page 194.

Define home address : To assign or edit a home ad-dress, see also ››› page 195.

Import destinations (SD/USB) : To import digital busi-ness cards (vCards) into the destination memory››› page 199.

Delete user data : To delete stored destinations (e.g.Last destinations or the Destinationmemory).

Navigation announcements : To change the navigationannouncements settings.

200

Operating modes


Volume : To adjust the volume of audible drivingrecommendations.

Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Set thevolume of the active audio source during naviga-tion announcements.

No navigation announcements during calls : During atelephone conversation, audio driving recommen-dations will not be given.

Note: My POIs : Audible warning when approachinga special destination.

Speed limits : Shows the speed limits, depending onthe road, of the country that is being driven through.

Fuel options : To change fuel related settings.

Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se-lected service station is given priority in specialdestination search results.

Fuel warning : The fuel warning is active.

If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri-ate warning is generated that enables the servicestation search.

Version information : Information about stored naviga-tion data.

Advanced settings : For making advanced changes tothe navigation settings.

Time display : Indication during route guidance.

Time of arrival : The estimated time of arrival atthe destination is displayed.


Running time : The envisaged travelling time tothe destination is displayed.

Status line : View during route guidance.

Destination : The calculated distance to thedestination is shown.

Next stopover : The calculated distance to thenext stopover is shown.

Note: National border crossed : Indication of thespeed limits of the country in question whencrossing a border.

Demo mode : When the Demo mode is active androute guidance is started, a virtual guide to the en-tered destination may be started ››› page 199.

Define demo mode starting point : If the Demomode is active and the vehicle is stopped, a fic-titious starting point can be set for the virtualroute guidance.

a) This functionality will depend on the country.

Vehicle Menu

Introduction to using the Vehiclemenu

Pressing button of the infotainmentsystem accesses its main menu with the fol-lowing options:

● VIEW

● RADIO or MEDIA (to control playback in ra-dio or media mode)● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)● SETTINGS ››› page 85

With the function button VIEW you can ac-cess the following information:

● INSTRUMENT PANEL ››› page 201● CONSUMERS ››› page 202● DRIVING DATA ››› page 202● ECOTRAINER ››› page 203● VEHICLE STATUS ››› page 204

Instrument panel*3 Valid for vehicles equipped with the SEAT Digi-tal Cockpit

Fig. 188 Instrument panel »

201

Infotainment System

Press the Instrument panel button to choosefrom the various display options and custom-ise the information that appears in the SEATDigital Cockpit ››› page 68.

Automatic ViewPre-set information depending on the Drivingmode.

Classic ViewThe needles are displayed at full length.

Views 1, 2, 3Customise the information that appears inthe digital cockpit. The user chooses which todisplay, and in what order, by moving a fingervertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can bememorised by existing the menu or keepingthe View button pressed.

Consumers

Fig. 189 Convenience consumers.

Access information about the vehicle’s mainconvenience consumers. It is shown via aconsumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)1).

Driving data

Fig. 190 Driving data.

The on-board computer has 3 memories.They can be used to display: distance, time,average speed, average consumption andrange.

1. Since startIndication and storage of distance travelledand consumption values between the ignitionbeing turned on and it being turned off.

2. Since refuellingDisplay and storage of the values for the jour-ney and the consumption. By refuelling, thememory will be erased automatically.

1) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units arein kg/h.

202

Operating modes

3. Long-termThe memory records the values for a specificnumber of partial trips, up to a total of 19hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi-nutes, or 1999.9 km (mi) or 9999 km (mi), de-pending on the model of instrument panel.

When one of these values is reached (de-pending on the version of the instrument pan-el), the memory is automatically deleted andstarts counting again from 0.

Ecotrainer

Fig. 191 CAR Ecotrainer menu.

Fig. 192 Driving style symbols.

Open the ECOTRAINER Menu● While the vehicle is stopped, press the Info-tainment button .● Press the VIEW function button and selectECOTRAINER.

Provides information about your driving style.The information on driving style is only evalu-ated and displayed when moving forward.

∅ ECO points: indication on driving styleIndicates driving style efficiency since starton a scale of 0 to 100. The higher the valuedisplayed, the more efficient the driving style.Press on the display for more information.Statistics are shown for the last 30 minutes ofdriving from the start. If 30 minutes have notelapsed, the values of the last trip are shownin grey.

∅ l/100 km: Average fuel consumptionShows the average fuel consumption. Thevalue is calculated using the kilometres trav-elled since start as a reference. Press on thedisplay for more information. Statistics areshown for the last 30 minutes of driving fromthe start. If 30 minutes have not elapsed, thevalues of the last trip are shown in grey.

Eco tips: Tips on how to save fuelPress the ECO tips button to get advice onhow to save fuel. These tips can only be con-sulted while the vehicle is stopped.

Efficient driving style assessmentThe representation uses different elements toshow driving style efficiency.

Indication ››› Fig. 191: Meaning

1To the left of the columns are different symbolsthat provide information about the current driv-ing style ››› table on page 204.

2

The white column is an indication of where theefficiency graph starts (from left to right).It shows the position of the evaluation that iscurrently being performed.

3

Bars to illustrate acceleration.The position of the car represents acceleration.If the speed is constant, the car remains in thecentral zone. If it accelerates or brakes, the carmoves backwards or forwards respectively. »

203

Infotainment System

Indication ››› Fig. 191: Meaning

4

Columns representing driving style efficiency.Horizontally, the columns represent retrospec-tive driving efficiency, and move from left toright approximately every 5 seconds. The high-er the columns, the more efficient the drivingstyle.The colour of the sky represents the average ofthe last 3 minutes. The colour changes fromgrey (less efficient) to blue (more efficient).

Symbols ››› Fig. 192: Meaning

A Thinking ahead. Sudden changes in accelera-tion lower the efficiency of the driving style.

B Gear recommendation.

C Current speed has a negative impact on fuelconsumption.

D Ecological driving style.

Vehicle status

Fig. 193 Standard representation: vehicle sta-tus.

Fig. 194 Standard representation: vehicle sta-tus.

Press the Vehicle status button to access infor-mation on the Vehicle status messagesand Start-Stop system.

The Vehicle status messages are dis-played ››› Fig. 193, in addition to being speci-fied on the corresponding button.

According to the parties affected by thesemessages, they will be shown in different col-ours (depending on their importance) on thevehicle's screen.

To access the Tyre Pressure Loss Indi-cator, press the FORWARD or BACK keys.

From this same menu, use the SET buttonto store the tyre pressures.

NoteThe values shown on the figures ››› Fig. 189,››› Fig. 190, ››› Fig. 193 and ››› Fig. 194 are in-dicative and may vary depending on theequipment.

Telephone

General information


204

Operating modes

Telephone functions can only be used if thereis a mobile phone connected by Bluetooth tothe infotainment system ››› page 206.

To do this, the phone must have the Blue-tooth® function activated.

The instructions shown on the screen for thetelephone menus will depend on the mobiletelephone used.

Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. Forfurther information on compatible Bluetooth®

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer orcheck on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues betweenyour mobile telephone and the Infotainmentsystem, restart your mobile by switching it offand on again.

Some functions and setup can only be per-formed when the vehicle is stopped and arenot available on all mobile telephones.

You may experience poor reception or maybe cut off in areas where the signal is weak.

Most electronic devices are shielded againstHF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, theelectronic equipment may not be protectedfrom the HF signals of the telephone man-agement system. This may cause interfer-ence.

WARNINGGeneral, mandatory, legal and country-specific instructions and laws for the use ofmobile phones inside the vehicle must al-ways be considered.

WARNINGSpeaking by telephone and using the mo-bile telephone management system whilstdriving can distract you from the road andcause an accident.● In areas of little coverage your call maybe cut off and you may not be able to makeeven emergency calls.

WARNINGMobile telephones may interfere with andalter the correct operation of pacemakersif they are carried directly over them.● Maintain a minimum distance of at least20 centimetres between the aerials of themobile telephone and the pacemaker.● Do not carry your switched-on mobiletelephone in your breast pocket directlyover the pacemaker.● If you suspect interference, switch off themobile telephone immediately.

CAUTIONHigh speeds, poor weather or road condi-tions and the quality of reception can all

affect the audio quality of a telephone con-versation in the vehicle.

Note● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● If you wish to connect a device via Blue-tooth®, consult the safety warnings in its in-struction manual. Only use compatibleBluetooth® devices.● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-cle may provoke noise in the speakers.● Some networks may not recognise all ofthe language characters or offer all of theservices.

Places with special regulations

In the majority of cases, these places aresignposted, but not always clearly. They in-clude, for example:

● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks● The lower decks of boats and ferries.● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquidgas (such as propane or butane).● places where the air is laden with chemi-cals or particles such as flour, dust or metalpowder. »

205

Infotainment System

● all other places where the vehicle enginemust be switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off the mobile phone in areas with arisk of explosion! The mobile telephone canautomatically connect to the mobile tele-phone network again if it loses the Blue-tooth® connection to the telephone man-agement system.

CAUTIONIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile telephones is prohibited,both the telephone and the telephonemanagement system must always beswitched off. Interference may be causedwith sensitive technical and medical equip-ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction ordamage to the equipment.

Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele-phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-phone management system. Prior pairing be-tween the two is required for this purpose.

Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones connectautomatically when turning on the ignition if aconnection has been previously established.Its Bluetooth® function must be activated forthis purpose, and there must be no Bluetooth®

connection with other devices.

Bluetooth® connections are free.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth® SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles®

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-ephone management system, a data ex-change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®

profiles.

● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): theHFP can be used to manage calls through theinfotainment system.● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allowsaudio to be transmitted with stereo quality. Itmay require connecting other profiles formanaging and controlling playback.● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allowsphone book contents to be downloaded fromthe mobile telephone.● Message profile (MAP):1) It allows shortmessages (SMS) to be downloaded andsynchronised.

NoteThe mobile telephone's button and warningtones should be off. Where necessary, dis-connect the headset from the mobile tele-phone you wish to connect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobiletelephone to the Infotainment sys-tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone viathe Infotainment system, it is necessary topair both devices once.

For your safety, pairing should be done whenthe vehicle is stationary. In some countries it isnot possible to perform the pairing with thevehicle running.

Conditions● The ignition must be switched on.● The Bluetooth® function of the mobilephone and the Infotainment system must beactive and visible.● The keypad lock on the mobile telephonemust be deactivated.


206

Operating modes

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary toenter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone● Press the infotainment button >Find telephone > Search results.

OR:● Press the infotainment button >Settings > Select mobile phone >Search results.

OR:● Press the infotainment button >Settings > Bluetooth > Find devices>Search results.

OR:● Make the connection from the settingsmenu of the mobile phone itself.

The name of your Infotainment system will bedisplayed on the main Telephone screen andyou can edit this name via the Bluetoothsettings menu.

The search process can take up to 1 minute.

As soon as the search is completed, thenames of the Bluetooth® devices found aredisplayed on-screen.

● Select the Bluetooth® device you want toconnect. Additional data may need to be en-tered.● Use your mobile telephone to enter andconfirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-play of the infotainment system.● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requestsare received on the mobile telephone, makesure to reply to them.

OR:● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-play of the Infotainment system with the oneshown on the mobile phone. If they match,confirm on both devices.

Now, the infotainment system and the mobilephone will be connected to each other.

When the pairing has been finalized correct-ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. Thephone book, call list and SMS messages stor-ed in the mobile phone will be loaded oncethe requests have been accepted in the mo-bile phone. After downloading, the data willbe available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-phonesYou can pair up to 20 mobile telephones tothe Infotainment system, but the number of si-multaneous connections varies:

● Media System Colour: a phone connectedto the hands-free profile and the same or adifferent one as Bluetooth® audio.● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-bile phones simultaneously connected to thehands-free profile, and one of them as Blue-tooth® audio.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,it connects to the last connected mobile tele-phone. If it is not possible to connect to thismobile telephone, the system will try to con-nect to the next mobile telephone on the listof paired devices.

The maximum range of the connection is ap-prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter-rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con-nection is automatically re-established assoon as the device is once again within Blue-tooth® range.

If the maximum number of paired devices isreached and you want to pair another one,the system will automatically replace theleast recent one with it. If it is to replace an-other one, the user must delete that one first.Do do this:

● Press the SETTINGS function button in thetelephone context.● Press the function button Bluetooth set-tings > Paired devices.● In the list of linked devices, press the func-tion button after the mobile phone to be »

207

Infotainment System

deleted, and then press Delete to confirmthe process.

WARNINGDo not perform the pairing and connectionprocess while driving. This may cause anaccident!

NoteCheck that there are no requests pendingacceptance in your mobile phone. If thereare, this could block some of the functionsin the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 196 Phone main menu.

Assign a user profileThe phonebook, the call lists and the speeddial buttons are assigned to a user profile and

remain stored on the telephone managementsystem. This information will be available ev-ery time the mobile telephone is connected.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi-nutes for the data from the linked mobilephone to be available in the system. The nexttime that the mobile telephone is connectedthe phonebook is updated automatically.

If the mobile phonebook has been modifiedwhile connected, a manual update of thephonebook data can be started from theUser profile settings menu.

Telephone management can store a maxi-mum of 4 profiles for mobile phones. If youwish to pair another mobile phone, the oldestuser profile will be replaced.

Telephone management system functionbuttons● Press the infotainment button toaccess the Telephone main menu.


1Name of connected mobile tele-phone. Press the icon to the left toconnect another mobile phone.

2 Speed-dial buttons, connected tel-ephone contacts favourites.


3 a)

To change to another telephoneconnected to the hands-free profile.Only visible when there are two tele-phones connected as hands-free.

DIAL NO. Open the numeric keypad››› page 210.

CONTACTS To open the phonebook of the con-nected telephone.

Text mes-sagea) To open the SMS menu.

ACTIVATEb)Activate the voice control of theconnected mobile phone (compati-ble with Android and Apple devices).

CALLS To open call lists of the connectedmobile telephone ››› page 212.

SETTINGS To open the Phone settingsmenu.

a) Not available for the Media System Colour model.b) Only valid for the Media System Colour model.

208

Operating modes

Instructions and symbols of thephone management system

Fig. 197 Active call.

Fig. 198 Conference call.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 197

AName of the mobile operator of the connec-ted device.

B

Stored telephone number or name. If thename stored in the phonebook has an as-signed photo, it can be displayed: selectTelephone > Settings > Userprofile > Show pictures forcontacts*.

To accept a call.

To end a call.

OR: To reject an incoming call.

To mute or to reactivate the ring tone duringan incoming call.

To mute the microphone during an activecall and to reactivate it.

The active call is put on hold. While on holdthe listener will not hear the conversation. Toreactivate it, press the call accept button .To reject it, press the reject button .

a)

Press to add a participant to the active call.

Connected mobile telephone charge status.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 197

Strength of the signal received by the mo-bile telephone.

a) Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Multiple callsThe telephony management system allowsthe user to interact with up to three calls onthe screen.

Only one of the calls can be active.

Conference callThe user can merge several calls into a singleone by making a conference call by pressingbutton 1). There must be a minimum of twocalls for this to work. Once the conferencecall has started, the user can add up to 5 par-ticipants.

Once the conference call is established, theuser can consult the list of participants bypressing on the conference call image››› Fig. 198 C .

Depending on the mobile device, the callfrom a conference call participant can behung up or excluded from the conference callbut kept on a separate call. »


209

Infotainment System

WARNINGRemember that the driver should not oper-ate the mobile phone while driving.

NoteMulti-call and conference call functionali-ties are subject to the services associatedwith the user's SIM card.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 199 Enter telephone number menu.

● Press the DIAL NUMBER function button fromthe Telephone main menu.

Enter telephone number● Enter a phone number with the keypad.Press the function button to make a call.

Select a contact from the list● Enter the first few letters of the contact. Theavailable entries appear in the phonebook.● Select the desired contact to make the call.

Enter the country code● Press the function button 0 for approx. 2seconds to add the +.

Assistance call● Press the function button to obtain help inthe event of breakdown.

Information call● Press the function button to obtain informa-tion on the SEAT brand and the additionalcontracted services.

Call mailbox● Press the function button to make the call.● OR: Press the function button for about 2seconds to make a call.

Note● Breakdown service and information callscan incur an additional cost on your tele-phone bill.● The Roadside Assistance and Informationservices might not work properly, for exam-ple, if the vehicle and the operator of theconnected mobile telephone are in differ-

ent countries. If you are not able to usethese services contact an authorised SEATworkshop.

Phonebook Menu (contacts)

Fig. 200 Contacts Menu.

Fig. 201 Search window.

210

Operating modes

Once the first pairing is made, it may takesome time until the phonebook data1) of thepaired mobile are available in the infotain-ment system. Depending on the volume ofdata that has to be transferred, the processmay take several minutes. It may be necessa-ry to confirm the data transmission on themobile phone.

The phonebook can also be viewed during atelephone conversation.

If the name saved in the phonebook has anassigned photo, it can be displayed on the listnext to the name. To do this, the optionShow pictures for contacts in the Phone set-

tings context must be enabled and your mo-bile phone must support this functionality(check the compatibility list) ››› page 214,Phone settings.

In the Telephone main menu, press theContacts function button to access the con-

tacts list.

Select a contact from the list● Search the list and press on the desiredcontact to make the call.

● OR: If the contact has several numbers, firstpress on the contact and then press on thedesired number for making the call.

Search for a contact in the search window● Press the Search function button››› Fig. 200 to open the search window.● Enter the name of the contact you are look-ing for in the window ››› Fig. 201. While thecharacters are being entered, a contact isdisplayed in the input field.● The number of matching results is dis-played to the right of the input field. Press thefunction button to go to the list.● Search the list and press on the desiredcontact to make the call.

Opening the detailed view of a contact● Press the function button ››› Fig. 200 lo-cated next to the entry on the contacts list.

All the telephone numbers are displayed inthe detailed view, and where applicable, theaddress recorded for the contact in question.

Read contact name● Press the function button on the detailedlist if you want the voice control system toread the name of the contact 2).

Call a contact● Press the desired telephone number on thedetailed list to make the call.● Press the icon to edit the number beforecalling.

Send SMS to a contact● Press the function button on the detailedlist2).

Start route guidance to a contact's ad-dress3)

If the contact’s address data has been saved,route guidance can be started to the con-tact's address.

● Press address data in the detailed view tostart route guidance. »

1) Depending on the device, only contacts in thephone's memory are loaded.2) Not available for the Media System Colourmodel.3) Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

211

Infotainment System

NoteIf you edit a number before calling, it willnot be saved in the phonebook but onlyused for the call.

Short messages (SMS) menu3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 202 Short messages (SMS) menu.

If the mobile phone connected to the HFPprofile also supports the SMS profile, a newfunction button will appear in the upper leftcorner of your Telephone menu, which will al-low you to receive, view and send SMS mes-sages through the infotainment system.

Whether or not the aforementioned functionswork correctly will depend on the compatibil-ity of the connected mobile phone.

SMS menu function buttons● Press the SMS function button from the Tel-ephone main menu.


New textmessage

To write and send an SMS (includesthe possibility of accessing presettext templates).

Inbox To open the received SMS folder.

Outbox To open the outbox folder. SMSmessages that have not been sentare stored here.

Sent To open the sent SMS folder.

Drafts To select a message that has beenstored but not sent.

Send contactdetails

To send the details of a contactfrom the contact list.

Possible submenu function buttons


READ OUT For the voice control system toread the text of the SMS.

Options Open the Options menu.

Reply withtemplate

To select a text template from alist.

Delete currenttext message

The SMS is deleted from theInbox folder.


Telephonenumber

The sender's telephone numberis displayed.

FORWARD To forward an SMS.

REPLY To reply to an incoming SMS.

Enter number

To enter a telephone number orto select a recipient from thecontact list.

Press the Recipients functionbutton to select multiple recipi-ents.

Recipients To select multiple recipientsfrom the contact list.

Delete To delete an SMS.

Calls Menu (call lists)

Fig. 203 Call lists menu.

212

Operating modes

● Press the Calls function button from theTelephone main menu.● Press the FILTER function button.● Select the desired call list: All calls ,Missed calls , Calls or Received calls .

If a telephone number is stored in the phonebook, the saved name is displayed on the calllist instead of the number.

If a photo is assigned to the name stored inthe phonebook, it can be displayed on thecall list next to the name ››› page 214.

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning

Missed calls : Missed and unanswered calls.

Calls : Dialled numbers.

Received calls : Received calls.

NoteThe availability of the call lists will dependon the mobile phone used.

Quick dial keys

Fig. 204 Quick access to the phone book.

The speed dial keys ››› Fig. 204 1 can beassigned a telephone number from thephone book.

If a photo is assigned to the name stored inthe phone book, it can be displayed on thespeed dial key ››› page 2141).

All speed dial keys have to be manually edi-ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Upto 12 contacts can be added to the speed di-al keys.

Assign the speed dial keys● In the main Telephone menu, press a freespeed dial key.

● Select the desired contact from the list. Ifthe selected contact has several phone num-bers, select the number you want.

Edit assigned speed dial keys● Press and hold an occupied speed dial keyin the Telephone main menu until the Con-tacts menu opens.● Select the desired contact from the list. Ifthe selected contact has several phone num-bers, select the number you want.● To close the Contacts menu without apply-ing the changes, press the BACK functionbutton.

Delete assigned speed dial keys● The phone numbers stored in the speed di-al buttons can be deleted in the menu Userprofile settings > Manage favourites››› page 214.

Make a call with a speed dial button● Briefly press an assigned speed dial key inthe Telephone main menu to call the tele-phone number stored in it. »


213

Infotainment System

NoteThe contacts stored in the speed dial keysare NOT updated automatically. If a con-tact stored on a speed dial key is modifiedon the mobile phone, the speed dial keymust be assigned again.

Phone settings

In the Telephone main menu, press theSETTINGS function button.


Private mode : Private mode can only be activatedduring an active call. When private mode is disabled(by default), the call’s audio is managed through thevehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio ismanaged through the mobile phone.

Select mobile phone : From the list, select the mobilephone to be connected to the hands-free profile withthe infotainment system.OR: Press Find telephone to connect a new mobilephone.

Bluetooth® : Opens the menu Bluetooth® set-tings ››› page 214.

User profile : Open the User profile settingsmenu ››› page 214.

NoteSome telephones require a restart to down-load the last added contacts again.

Bluetooth® settings

In the main Telephone menu, press theSETTINGS function button and then press theBluetooth® function button.


Bluetooth® : Press to deactivate Bluetooth®. All activeconnections are disconnected.

Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth® visi-bility.

Visible : Bluetooth® visibility is active.

Hidden : Bluetooth® visibility is deactivated.Bluetooth® visibility must be active for externalpairing of a Bluetooth® device with the infotain-ment system. When a Bluetooth® audio deviceis active and playing, visibility is automaticallyset to Hidden.

Forename : Display or change the Bluetooth® name ofthe infotainment system. This will be the name shownto other Bluetooth® devices.

Paired devices : Viewing paired devices. To disconnectand connect Bluetooth® devices and Bluetooth® pro-files.

Find devices : Search for visible Bluetooth® devicesthat are within range of the infotainment system. Themaximum range is approx. 10 meters.

Bluetooth® Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : If an external audiosource is to be connected to the infotainment systemvia Bluetooth®, this function must be active››› page 187.

User profile settings

In the main Telephone menu, press theSETTINGS function button and then press theUser profile function button.


Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.

Occupied speed dial key: Press to delete thestored number.

Free speed dial key: Press to save a phonebook number on the speed dial key.

Mailbox number : To enter or change the voice mailboxnumber.

Sort by : To set the order of appearance of the phonebook entries (Forname and Surname or vice versa).

Import contacts : Press to import the phone book of theconnected telephone or to update the importedphone book.

Reminder: remember your mobile phone : If a Bluetooth®

connection is active with a mobile phone, the mes-sage “Do not forget your mobile phone”appears when the ignition is switched off.

Show pictures for contacts a): If the contacts in thephone book have been saved with a photo, it can bedisplayed on the speed dial keys, call lists andphone book.

a) Depending on the mobile phone.

214

Operating modes

NoteSome telephones require a restart to down-load the last added contacts again.

215

Infotainment System

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input

Fig. 205 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics andthe country, the vehicle may have aUSB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in thestorage compartment area of the centreconsole ››› Fig. 205.

Connectivity Box* / WirelessCharger*


Fig. 207 In the centre console: pad for the mo-bile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes the “WirelessCharger” functionality.

“Wireless Charger”The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-ces with Qi1) technology to be charged with-out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 207››› .

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-matically. For further information aboutwhether your mobile device uses Qi technol-ogy, check your phone's user manual or visitthe SEAT website.

WARNING● The mobile phone may heat up due to thewireless charging. Think about this beforeyou pick it up, and take care when removingit.● There must be no metallic or other ob-jects between the mobile phone and thehousing, to prevent the functionality of theConnectivity Box from being affected.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-bile phone wirelessly.

216

Operating modes

Note● Your mobile device must support the Qiinductive charging interface standard forproper operation.● The charging time and the temperaturevary in accordance with the device used.● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.● Qi technology does not allow you tocharge more than one mobile device simul-taneously.● You are advised to keep the engine run-ning to guarantee proper wireless charg-ing.● When a telephone with Qi technology isconnected by USB, it will be charged by themeans specified by the manufacturer.

217

Driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping theengine

Ignition lock

Fig. 208 Ignition key positions.

Key positions ››› Fig. 208Ignition off. Key can be removed from thevehicle.Ignition is switched on. Preheating occursin diesel vehicles .Starting the engine.

1

2

3

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel● Lock the steering wheel: remove the keyfrom the ignition and turn the wheel until itlocks. Depending on the country, in vehicleswith automatic transmission, in order to re-move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-ing key and release it.● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key intothe ignition and turn it at the same time as thesteering wheel in the direction indicated bythe arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Start-Stop system*If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stopsystem* switches off the engine, the ignitionremains switched on.

Automatic transmission: before leaving thevehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-ed off and the selector lever is in position P.

WARNING● Always remove the key from the ignitionwhen leaving the vehicle, even if only for ashort period. This is especially important ifchildren or disabled people are left alonein the vehicle. They could accidentallystart the engine or operate electricalequipment, resulting in an accident.● The ignition key must NOT be removedfrom the lock until the vehicle comes to a

standstill. Otherwise, the steering could beimmediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Note● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key tothe position 2 , move the steering wheel toboth sides to release the steering lock.● If the vehicle battery is disconnected andreconnected, the key must remain in theposition 2 for around 5 seconds beforestarting up.● Vehicles with automatic transmission,de-pending on the country, after switching offthe ignition, you can only remove the igni-tion key if the selector lever is in position“P” (parking lock). Next, the selector leveris locked.

218

Start and driving

Ignition and start button*

Fig. 209 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: start button.

The engine can be started with a start button(Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a validkey inside the vehicle in the area of the frontor rear seats, or on the centre console.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access››› page 95 system, the engine can also bestarted with the key in the luggage compart-ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manuallyIf you only want to switch on the ignition(without starting the engine), briefly press thestart button once without pressing the brakepedal or the clutch pedal ››› .

The start button text START ENGINE STOP flash-es like a heartbeat when the system is readyfor the ignition to be turned on or off.

Automatic ignition disconnectionIf the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the keywith them but leaving the ignition on, the igni-tion does not switch off automatically. The ig-nition is switched off by pressing the lock but-ton on the remote control or by pressingthe sensor surface on the door lever››› Fig. 95.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition onvehicles with the Start-Stop systemThe ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,● the driver does not step on any pedal,● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there isenough charge in the battery). If the driverlocks the vehicle or manually turns off thelight, the side light goes out.

Engine restart featureIf no key is detected inside the vehicle afterthe engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-

onds to restart it. A warning will display on thedash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key inside thevehicle.

WARNINGWhen switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNINGIf vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-authorised person could lock the vehicle,start the engine or connect the ignition andoperate any of the electrical equipment.

Note● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis-connect the ignition and, if appropriate,take into account the instructions on thescreen of the dash panel.● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the engine off and the ignition on, thevehicle battery might be discharged and itmight not be possible to start the engine. »

219

Driving

● In vehicles with diesel engines, wait untilthe warning light ››› page 220 goes offbefore starting the engine.● If during the STOP phase you press theSTART ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.● If the indication is displayed on the in-strument panel display “Start-Stop systemdeactivated: Start the engine manually”,the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine● Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put thegear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedaland keep it it in this position until the enginestarts.● Vehicles with automatic transmission: putthe lever in position P or N.

Vehicles with ignition locks● Turn the key to position ››› Fig. 208 2 . Pre-heating occurs in diesel vehicles .● Keep turning the key to position››› Fig. 208 3 without stepping on the accel-erator.● Once the engine starts, release the key.When it is released, the key returns to position2 .

● If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor around 1 minute to try again.

Vehicles with start buttons● Press and hold the brake pedal until the en-gine starts.● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 209; do notpress the accelerator. There needs to be avalid key inside the vehicle for the engine tostart. After starting the engine, the lighting ofthe START ENGINE STOP button changes tosteady lighting, indicating that the engine hasstarted.● Once the engine starts, release the start-upbutton.● If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,perform an emergency start ››› page 222.

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longerthan usual to start on cold days. During pre-heating, the warning lamp remains lit. Toavoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-tery, do not use any other major electricalequipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.

The preheating time depends on the coolantand exterior temperatures. With the engine atoperating temperature, or at outside temper-atures above +8°C, the warning lamp willlight up for about one second. This meansthat the engine starts immediately.

Starting a diesel engine after having runout of fuelIf the fuel tank has been completely run dry, itmay take longer than normal (up to one mi-nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.This is because the fuel system must elimi-nate air first.

WARNINGDo not keep the engine running in confinedspaces, as there is a danger of poisoning.● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-ness and death.

WARNINGDo not get out of the vehicle with the en-gine running, especially if a gear is engag-ed. The vehicle could then suddenly moveor something strange could happen thatwould cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNINGNever use cold start sprays, they could ex-plode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to start the engine while

220

Start and driving

driving or if you restart it immediately afterswitching it off.● When the engine is cold, you shouldavoid high engine speeds, driving at fullthrottle and over-loading the engine. Riskof engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Start offimmediately, driving gently. This helps theengine reach operating temperature fasterand reduces emissions.

Note● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quitenormal, and no cause for concern.● When the outside temperature is below+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, somesmoke may appear under the vehicle whenthe fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.● In vehicles with a natural gas engine(CNG), by default, the engine starts withgas, with the exception of the following ca-ses:– Coolant temperature below -10°C.– After refuelling CNG.

Turning off the engine

● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .● With manual transmission, press the clutchall the way down. If the vehicle is automatic,set the selector lever to the P position.● Apply the handbrake.● Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key toposition ››› Fig. 208 1 .● Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press thestart-up button ››› Fig. 209.

Emergency disconnectionIf the engine does not switch off after brieflypressing the starter button, an emergencydisconnect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-ond ››› in Ignition and start button* onpage 219.

WARNINGNever switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-jury.● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.● The brake servo does not work with theengine off. Therefore, you need to press thebreak pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

● Power steering does not work when theengine is not running. You need morestrength to steer when the engine is switch-ed off.● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossi-ble to control the vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly lock, making it im-possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-dent!

WARNINGAlways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start theengine or use power-operated equipment(e.g. the electric windows), which couldcause injuries.

CAUTION● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, theignition remains switched on. Make surethat the ignition is switched off before leav-ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery coulddischarge.● If the engine has been driven at highspeed for a prolonged period of time, itmay overheat when turned off. To avoid en-gine damage, allow the engine to run for »

221

Driving

approximately two minutes in neutral be-fore switching it off.

NoteAfter the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possi-ble that the fan turns itself on once more ifthe coolant temperature increases due tothe heat accumulated in the engine com-partment or due to its prolonged exposureto solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivatesthe electronic immobiliser automaticallywhen the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activatedagain automatically as soon as you pull thekey out of the ignition lock. For vehicles withthe “Keyless Access” system, the key has tobe outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in-strument panel display: SAFE, the vehiclecannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu-ine SEAT key with its correct code.

NoteA perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 210 On the right of the steering column:emergency start.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

● Immediately after pushing the starter but-ton, keep the key next to the right trim of thesteering column ››› Fig. 210, as close as pos-sible to the Kessy logo.● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

“My Beat” function

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle ignitionsystem.

When entering the vehicle, the start button››› Fig. 209 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine startbutton flashes. With the ignition is switchedoff, the start button goes off after a few sec-onds.

With the engine running, the start button lightstays on, indicating that the engine is running.The time elapsed between the moment theuser starts the engine with the start buttonbutton and the lighting changes from flashingto fixed will depend on specific engine sizecharacteristics. When the start button is usedto stop the engine, the button starts flashingagain.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the start button buttonstays on, as the Start-Stop system remainsactive even though the engine is off.● When the engine cannot be started againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 223, and

222

Start and driving

needs to be started manually, the start but-ton flashes to indicate this situation.

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has beendisconnected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-ment panel displayStart-Stop system deactivated.Start the engine manually

This indication for the driver shows that theStart-Stop system cannot start the engineagain.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Functionnot available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Takethe vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-paired.

Description and operation


The Start-Stop system helps you to save fueland reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-cally switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping. The ignition remains switched on.The engine automatically switches back onwhen required.

In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activated.

In the Easy Connect system you can findmore information about the Start-Stop sys-tem: press the button > View > Ve-hicle status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox● When the vehicle or when it is stopped, putit into neutral and release the clutch pedal.The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will light up. The engine can be stoppedbefore stopping completely (approximately 7km/h).● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-gine will start up again. The warning lamp willswitch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox● Brake until the vehicle stops and keep yourfoot on the brake pedal. The engine willswitch off. The warning lamp will appear inthe display. The engine can be stopped be-fore stopping completely (approximately 7 or2 km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox).● When you take your foot off the brake ped-al the engine will start up again. The warninglamp will switch off.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stopmode● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The bonnet must be closed.● The engine has reached operating temper-ature. »

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.223

Driving

● The reverse gear must not be engaged.● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

The engine does not turn off for variousreasonsBefore stopping the vehicle, the system veri-fies whether certain conditions are met. Theengine does not switch off, in the followingsituations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the re-quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.● The temperature selected on the climatecontrol has not been reached.● The interior temperature is very high/low.● Defrost function button activated››› page 136.● The parking aid* is switched on.● The battery is very low.● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-ing turned.● If there is a danger of misting.● After engaging reverse gear.● In case of a very steep gradient.

is shown on the instrument panel display,as well as on the driver information system*.

The engine starts by itselfWhen stopped, the normal system mode maybe interrupted in the following situations. Theengine restarts by itself without involvementfrom the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thetemperature selected on the climate control.● Defrost function button activated››› page 136.● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.● The battery is too low.● High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto-matic gearboxThe engine stops when the selector lever is inthe positions P, D, N and S in addition to whenin Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P,the engine will also remain switched off whenyou take your foot off the brake pedal. In or-der to start the engine up again the accelera-tor must be pressed, or another gear engag-ed or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the enginefrom accidentally starting when passingthrough R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The operation of the brakeand steering will not be fully guaranteed.More force will be needed to turn the steer-ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer anaccident and even serious injuries.● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when workingin the engine compartment ››› page 225.

CAUTIONThe Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 237.

Note● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,you can control whether the engine shouldswitch off or not by reducing or increasingthe brake force applied. While the vehicleremains stopped, the engine will not stop ifthe brake pedal is slightly pressed, in trafficjams with frequent stopping and startingfor example. As soon as strong pressure is

224

Start and driving

applied to the brake pedal, the engine willstop.● When stopped, the brake pedal must bekept pressed to ensure that the vehicledoes not move.● If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-box, it can be directly started up again byimmediately pressing the clutch pedal.● With an automatic gearbox, if the lever isplaced in position D, N or S after engagingreverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwardsdirection must be reached for the system tobe in a status to stop the engine.

Manually connecting and discon-necting the Start-Stop system

Fig. 212 Centre console: Start-stop systembutton.

If you do not wish to use the system, you canswitch it off manually.

● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stopsystem, press the button ››› Fig. 212.

The button symbol remains lit up yellowwhen the system is switched off.

NoteThe system switches on every time the en-gine is turned off voluntarily.

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 213 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 213.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gearEngage reverse gear only when the vehicle isstopped.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itdownwards, move it to the left as far as it willgo and then forwards to select reverse››› Fig. 213 R .● Release the clutch.

Changing down gearsWhile driving, changing down a gear must al-ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-rectly below and when the engine speed isnot too high ››› . Changing down while by-passing one or various gears at high speedsor at high engine speeds can damage theclutch and the gearbox, even if the clutchpedal remains depressed ››› .

WARNINGWhen the engine is running, the vehicle willstart to move as soon as a gear is engagedand the clutch released. This also happensif the electronic parking brake is switchedon. »

225

Driving

● Never engage reverse gear when the ve-hicle is moving.

WARNINGIf the gear is changed down inappropriate-ly by selecting a gear that is too low, youmay lose control of the vehicle, causing anaccident and serious injuries.

CAUTIONWhen travelling at high speeds or at highengine speeds, selecting a gear that is toolow can cause considerable damage to theclutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and heldand it does not engage.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage and avoid prematurewear, please observe the following:● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure applied by yourhand is transmitted to the gearbox selectorforks.● Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-al; although the pressure may seem insig-nificant, it can cause the premature wear ofthe clutch plate. Use the foot rest when youdo not need to change gear.● Always ensure that the vehicle is com-pletely stopped before engaging the re-verse gear.

● Always press the clutch to the floor whenchanging gears.● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” onhills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. Theyreplace the torque converter found on con-ventional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-hicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually ››› page 228,Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed.To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged.The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-gage the selector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 214 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown when thecorresponding sign lights up. With the selec-tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, Dand S, the engaged gear is also shown on thedisplay.

– Parking lockWhen the lever is put in this position, the drivewheels are locked. The lever must only be putin P when the vehicle is stationary ››› .

226

Start and driving

To put the lever in P or take it out of P , thelocking button must be pressed and held andthe brake pedal pressed simultaneously.

– Reverse gearReverse gear must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary and the engine isidling ››› .

To move the lever to position R, the lock but-ton must be pressed and held while pressingthe brake pedal at the same time. The reverselights come on when the lever is in the R posi-tion with the ignition on.

– NeutralWith the lever in this position, the gear is inneutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever fromN to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or atspeeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› .

– Permanent forward drive positionThe lever in the D/S position enables thegears to be operated in normal mode (D) orsport mode (S). To select Sport mode S,move the lever backwards. Pushing the leveragain will select normal mode D. The selec-ted driving mode is shown on the instrumentpanel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects thebest gear ratio. This depends on the engine

load, the road speed and the dynamic gearcontrol programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for asporty driving style. This setting makes use ofthe engine's maximum power output. Whenaccelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-ble.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-tain roads) it can be advantageous to switchtiptronic mode ››› page 228, to adapt thegears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lockIn P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear rangefrom being engaged, and prevents the vehi-cle from moving off accidentally.

To release the gear lever lock, press and holdthe brake pedal with the ignition on. At thesame time, press the lever lock in the direc-tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 214.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever isin positions P or N the following indication willbe shown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quicklythrough position N (e.g. when shifting from Rto D). This makes it possible, for instance, to“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” ifit is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-gages automatically if the brake pedal is not

pressed and the lever is in position N for morethan about one second at a speed of lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph).

Safety interlock for ignition keyOnce the ignition has been turned off, the keymay be removed only if the gear selector is inposition P. While the key is not in the ignition,the selector lever is locked in position P.

WARNING● Take care not to press the acceleratorpedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-hicle could start moving immediately (insome cases even if the parking brake is en-gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.● Never move the lever to R or P when driv-ing. Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in an accident or failure.● With lever in any position (except P), thefoot brake must be pushed down wheneverthe engine is running. This is because anautomatic gearbox still transmits powereven at idling speed.● While you are selecting a gear and thevehicle is stopped with the engine running,do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● As a driver you should never leave yourvehicle if the engine is running and a gear isengaged. Apply the parking brake and se-lect the parking lock (P). »

227

Driving

Note● If the lever is moved accidentally to Nwhen driving, release the accelerator andlet the engine speed drop to idling beforeselecting gear range D or S again.● Should the power supply to the lever beinterrupted in position P, it will not be possi-ble to move the lever. If this should happenthe manual release can be used››› page 232.

Note● If the lever lock does not engage, there isa fault. The transmission is interrupted toprevent the vehicle from accidentally mov-ing. Follow the procedure below in order forthe lever lock to engage again:– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the lever to posi-tion P or N and subsequently engage agear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-ceed to the next mode:– When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engag-ed. Press the brake pedal and engagethe gear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a systemmalfunction. Seek specialist assistanceand have the system checked.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*

Fig. 215 Lever in the Tiptronic position

Fig. 216 Steering wheel: automatic transmis-sion levers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro-gramme, the vehicle remains in the currentlyselected gear. This is possible as long as thesystem is not changing gear automaticallydue to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector leverIt is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,both when the vehicle is stopped and whiledriving.

● Starting from the D/S position, move thelever to the right. The instrument panel willshow whether the lever is in manual or Tip-tronic mode (e.g. M4).● Push the lever forwards + or backwards –to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 215.● To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to theleft.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheelpaddles*The gearshift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic)positions.

● Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 216.● Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.

228

Start and driving

● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-proximately 1 second or move the lever to theleft.

If the paddles are not operated for some timeand the lever is not in the Tiptronic selectionposition, it will automatically exit from Tip-tronic mode.

CAUTION● When accelerating, if a higher gear is notselected, it will automatically changeshortly before reaching the maximum per-mitted RPM.● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-tem will not change until it detects that theengine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selectorlever in position P or N. At low temperatures,below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can onlystart with the selector lever in position P.

Driving down hillsUnder certain circumstances it may be ad-vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-

lect the gear manually according to drivingconditions ››› .

Stop/ParkOn level ground, just use the lever to engageposition P. On slopes you should first applythe parking brake and then set the lever to P.This makes it easier to remove the lever fromposition P when starting.

If the driver door is opened and the lever isnot in position P, the vehicle could move. Thefollowing warning is displayed on the instru-ment panel: Gear change: selectorlever in the drive position!. Addi-tionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhillAlways press the brake pedal firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,apply the handbrake ››› .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears isengaged to prevent the car from rollingdownhill ››› .

Hill starts● Apply the handbrake.● Once you have engaged a gear press theaccelerator carefully and disengage thehandbrake.

Back-up programmeIf all the positions of the lever are shown overa light background on the instrument paneldisplay, there is a system fault and the auto-matic gearbox will operate in with the backupprogramme. It is still possible to drive the ve-hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se-lected range of gears. Driving in reversegear may not be possible.

Kick-downThe kick-down system provides maximum ac-celeration when the gear selector lever is inthe positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown, the automatic gearbox will shift downto a lower gear, depending on road speedand engine speed. This takes advantage ofthe maximum acceleration of the vehicle››› .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayeduntil the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Selec-tor lever positions on page 227.● Never allow the brake to rub and do notuse the brake pedal too often or for longperiods, as the brakes can overheat. Thisreduces the braking power, increases thebraking distance or even causes a brakesystem fault. »

229

Driving

● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal orparking brake.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

CAUTION● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, donot attempt to stop it from rolling by de-pressing the accelerator when a gear hasbeen selected. This could cause overheat-ing and damage the automatic gearbox.● If you allow the vehicle to roll with thelever in position N and the engine off, theautomatic gearbox will be damaged bylack of lubrication.● In certain driving situations or traffic con-ditions, the gears could overheat and bedamaged! If the warning lamp lights up,stop the vehicle as soon as you can andwait for the gearbox to cool ››› page 231.● If the gearbox operates with the backupprogramme, take the vehicle to a special-ised workshop and have the fault repairedwithout delay.

Downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when thelever is in the D/S position and the brake isapplied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-ed.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speedat which the vehicle was travelling when thebrake was applied, within logical limits. It maybe necessary to correct the speed by press-ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as faras 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steepslopes you have to switch to tiptronic modeand change down to 2nd or 1st gear to takeadvantage of engine braking and take theload off the brake system.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or you pressthe accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 238, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNINGThe downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannotbe maintained constant in all situations. Al-ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certaindistances without using the accelerator,which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.

Activation of the inertia modeCondition: lever in position D, slopes of lessthan 12% and speeds between 20 and 130km / h (12 and 80 mph).

● Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru-ment cluster , the engaged gear and cur-rent consumption will disappear and theword Inertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage andthe vehicle will roll freely, without the effect ofthe engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, theengine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertiamode, simply remove your foot from the ac-celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolongedsection with less energy) and inertia discon-nection (= shorter section without the need

230

Start and driving

for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumptionand emission balance.

If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile››› page 234, the inertia mode can be activa-ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. InEco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-ating conditions are met, regardless of thesmoothness with which the foot is removedfrom the accelerator.

WARNING● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching anobstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!● If other users drive your vehicle, warnthem about inertia mode.

Note● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In in-ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-played (for example “D” or “E” will appearinstead of “D7” or “E7”).● The inertia mode will be automaticallydisconnected on gradients steeper than15%.

● In the case of the 1.6l TDI engine, the iner-tia mode will only work in the Eco drivingmode.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could bedamaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox tocool with the engine at idling speed and theselector lever in position P. When the warninglamp and the driver message switch off, havethe fault corrected by a specialised work-shop without delay. If they do not turn off, donot continue driving. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicleand place the lever in the posi-tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You maycontinue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving with restric-tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving in D untilswitching off the engine

Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special-ist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. Whenthe warning lamp switches off, you can con-tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en-gage a gear again.

If the warning was caused by the tempera-ture of the gearbox, this driver message willbe displayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

231

Driving

Manual release of the selector lev-er

Fig. 217 Gear selector lever: manual releasefrom the parking position.

In the event of a power failure when starting(e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remainlocked in position P. To move it to position N tomove the vehicle, there is an emergency re-lease device under the centre console, on theright side. Releasing the selector lever re-quires a certain degree of practical skill.

Removing the cover from the selector lev-er● Apply the handbrake firmly ››› .● Carefully pull the corners of the selectorlever boot and twist it upwards over the leverhandle.

Releasing the selector lever● Using the flat part of a screwdriver, pressthe yellow tab sideways and keep it presseddown ››› Fig. 217.● Press the lock button on the selector lev-er and move it to position N.● After completing the emergency release,reattach the selector lever boot to the gear-box console.

WARNINGDo not move the lever from position P if theparking brake is not firmly engaged. If youstill think the car could move, press thebrake pedal. Danger! The vehicle couldmove in an unforeseen way and cause anaccident or serious injury.

Gear-change recommenda-tion

Selecting the optimal gear

Fig. 218 Instrument panel: gear-change indi-cator (manual gearbox).

Depending on the equipment on the instru-ment panel screen, a recommendation isshown with the gear that should be engagedto optimise consumption.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, thelever must be in Tiptronic mode ››› page 228.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-mal gear is engaged. The current gear will bedisplayed.

232

Start and driving

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is rec-ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec-ommended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” ofthe particulate filterWhen the exhaust system detects that theparticulate filter is close to saturation, thissystem’s self-cleaning function recommendsthe optimal gear for that function››› page 307.

WARNINGThe gear change recommendation is anauxiliary function and in no case should bea substitute for careful driving.● Responsibility for selecting the correctgear, depending on the circumstances,rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environmentSelecting the correct gear can help to savefuel.

NoteThe recommended gear indication turns offwhen the clutch pedal is pressed or when

the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi-tion.

Steering

Information relating to different ve-hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand steering angle.

Even if the power steering fails or the engineis stopped, it is possible to continue to rotatethe steering wheel as long as the key remainsin the ignition lock, but more force must beapplied.

Steering assistThis help assists the driver in critical situa-tions. It recommends turning the steeringwheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre(counter-steering), turning slightly to avoidskidding ››› .

WARNINGSteering assist helps the driver in criticalsituations. The driver is the person who hasto control the vehicle's steering at all times.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering.Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and in a safe manner.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation.Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have thesteering checked.If the warning light does not come on again after re-starting the engine and driving a short distance, it isnot necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re-connected.Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed.When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.Remove the key from the ignition switch and recon-nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru-ment panel display.Do not continue driving if the steering column re-mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seekspecialist assistance. »

233

Driving

The control lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

WARNINGNever ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.● If the warning lamps and the correspond-ing messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic, causing serious damage oraccidents and injuries.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

SEAT Driving modes (SEATDrive Profile)*

Introduction

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between the Eco, Normal, Sport andIndividual profiles and modes, which modi-fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions,providing different driving experiences.

The Individual profile can be configuredaccording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

EngineDepending on the profile selected, the engineresponds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-celerator being pressed. When Eco mode isselected, the Start-stop function is activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, thegear change timing is changed to put thechanges at higher or lower revolutions. Ecomode activates the Inertia function, therebyreducing consumption. The rest of the drivingmodes will activate the inertia use functionwhen the selector lever is not in the S posi-tion, depending on how the accelerator ped-al is released ››› page 230. When the vehicleis turned on again, the function is activatedby default to reduce consumption.

With a manual gearbox, the Eco modechanges the gear changes recommenda-tions to facilitate more efficient driving.

“Dual Ride” suspensionThe “Dual Ride” suspension sets the suspen-sion to comfortable in the Eco and Normalprofiles, and to sport in the Sport profile. Inthe Individual profile the suspension can

be switched between Normal or Sport, de-pending on personal preference.

In the event of a fault in the “Dual Ride” sus-pension, the following message is displayedon the instrument panel screen Fault:shock absorber regulation.

SteeringPower steering becomes more robust inSport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

Air conditioningIn vehicles with Climatronic, this can operatein eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)The ACC’s acceleration and braking modevaries according to the driving profile››› page 248.

234

Start and driving

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 219 Next to the gear lever: MODE button.

You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco andIndividual.

You can select the required mode either byrepeatedly pressing selection button››› Fig. 219, or on the touch screen, in themenu that opens when the above button ispressed.

An icon on the touch screen provides infor-mation about the active mode.

Button lights up when the active mode isdifferent to Normal.

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Places the vehicle in a low stateof consumption, facilitating afuel-saving driving style that isrespectful to the environment.

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi-ence, suitable for everyday use.

Sport

Provides a complete dynamicperformance in the vehicle, ena-bling the user a more sporty driv-ing style.

Individual

It allows you to personalise theconfiguration. The functions thatcan be adjusted depend on theequipment fitted in the vehicle.

Kick-down*The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration ››› page 229.

If eco mode has been selected in SEAT DriveProfile*, and the accelerator is pressed be-yond a hard point, the engine power is auto-matically controlled to give your vehicle max-imum acceleration.

WARNINGWhen operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-tention to all traffic: doing otherwise couldcause an accident.

Note● When the engine is switched off it willstore the driving profile that was selectedwhen the ignition was turned off. When re-

started, the engine and the gearbox willstart in their Normal mode. To return the en-gine and gear to your desired mode, rese-lect the corresponding driving profile.● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-fic conditions.● The Eco profile is not recommended whentowing a vehicle.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-innew components.

Running-in the engineA new engine must be driven through a run-inperiod during its first 1500 kilometres (1000miles). During its first few hours of running, theinternal friction in the engine is greater thanlater on when all the moving parts have bed-ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, itshould be driven at a moderate speed (espe-cially when the engine is cold) this will reduceengine wear and increase its useful life. Neverdrive at extremely low engine speeds. Always »

235

Driving

engage a lower gear when the engine works“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or600 miles, please note:

● Do not use full throttle.● Do not force the engine above two thirds ofits maximum speed.● Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600to 1000 miles), gradually increase poweruntil reaching the maximum speed and highengine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres››› page 321.● Information about brakes ››› page 263.

For the sake of the environmentIf the engine is run in gently, the life of theengine will be increased and the engine oilconsumption reduced.

Off-roader?

If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: itdoes not have enough ground clearance tobe used as such. It is therefore best to avoidrough tracks and uneven terrain as much aspossible.

Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres alldepend largely on driving style. Consumptioncan be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-cient driving type. The following section givesyou some tips on lessening the impact on theenvironment and reducing your operatingcosts at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-ing situation does not require too much pow-er. The number of active cylinders can beseen on the instrument panel display.››› page 70.

Foresight when drivingIf you think ahead when driving, you will needto brake less and thus accelerate less. Takeadvantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-ever possible, with a gear engaged. Thistakes advantage of the engine braking effect,reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

Changing gear to save energyAn effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear.

Manual transmission: shift up from first tosecond gear as soon as possible. Choosingthe right gear enables fuel savings. Select thehighest possible gear appropriate for thedriving situation (the engine should continuefunctioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-ally and without reaching the “kick-down”position.

Avoid driving at high speedAvoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-sion of harmful gases and noise pollutionmultiply as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling timeIn vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling isautomatically reduced. In vehicles withoutthe Start-Stop system it is worth switching offthe engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine has reachedoperating temperature, and depending onthe cylinder capacity, keeping it switched offfor a minimum of about 5 seconds alreadysaves more than the amount of fuel necessa-ry for restarting.

236

Start and driving

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high duringthis initial warm-up phase. It is therefore bestto drive off immediately after starting the en-gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenanceRegular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improved fuelefficiency as well as maximum reliability andan enhanced resale value. A badly servicedengine can consume up to 10% more fuelthan necessary.

Avoid short journeysThe engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperaturein order to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will returnto a normal level.

Check tyre pressureAlways make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 322 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater

rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round asthey increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loadsGiven that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisablemake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero-dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-move it when not needed. At speeds of100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%of fuel.

Save electrical energyThe engine drives the alternator, therebygenerating electricity. This implies that anyincrease in power consumption also increa-ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switchoff any unneeded electrical devices. Devicesthat use a lot of electricity includes the blow-er at a high setting, the rear window heatingor the seat heating* ››› page 201.

Note● If you have the Start-Stop system, it isrecommended that it should not be discon-nected.

● It is recommended that you close thewindows when driving at more than60 km/h (37 mph).● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, as the pressure can make theplate slip. This causes wear and can dam-age the clutch plate.● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use thebrake. The fuel consumption will be lowerand you will prevent the clutch plate frombeing damaged.● Use the engine brake on downhills bychanging to the gear that is best suited forthe gradient. Fuel consumption will be“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving onflooded roads, take the following into ac-count:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through flooded zones, brak-ing effectiveness can decrease if the brakediscs or pads are damp ››› page 263. »

237

Driving

CAUTION● Driving through flooded areas may dam-age vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission or electrical system.● Whenever driving through water, theStart-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 223.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the engine.● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-tion cause waves that could exceed yourvehicle's critical height.● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion) ››› page 333.

Trips abroad

● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensuredthat lead-free petrol is available throughoutthe journey ››› page 301, Fuel types. Seekinformation about service station networksselling unleaded fuel.● In some countries, it is possible that yourvehicle is not sold and some spare parts maynot be available or the technical servicesmay only be able to make limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will provideinformation about the technical preparationthat your vehicle requires and also aboutnecessary maintenance and repair possibili-ties.

CAUTIONSEAT does not accept liability for any dam-age to the vehicle due to the use of a lowerquality fuel, an inadequate service or thenon-availability of genuine spare parts.

Driver assistance systems

Cruise control system(CCS)*

Related video

Fig. 220 Dash panel

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on andactive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) isswitched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after approxi-mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken forthe function check.

238



Introduction

Fig. 221 Instrument panel display: GRA statusindications.

The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed byceasing to accelerate, not by actively brakingthe vehicle ››› .

Depending on the equipment, the cruise con-trol can be operated using the lever of the

turn signals ››› page 240 or by the third lever››› page 240.

Status displayGRA status ››› Fig. 221

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small or darkenedfigures.System error. Contact a specialisedworkshop.CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS modeThe CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCSIf the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-cle speed downhill, brake and change downa gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarilydisabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic offThe GRA disconnects automatically or istemporarily interrupted:

A

B

C

D

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.● If the dynamic driving control systems inter-vene, ASR, ESC, etc.● If the brake pedal is pressed.● If the airbag is triggered.● If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.

WARNINGUse of GRA could cause accidents and se-vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at aconstant speed maintaining the safety dis-tance.● Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-cient, on steep roads, with several bends orin slippery circumstances or on floodedroads.● Never use the CCS when driving off-roador on unpaved roads.● Adapt your speed and the distance to thevehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-er, the condition of the road and the trafficsituation.● To avoid unexpected operation of thecruise control system, turn it off every timeyou finish using it.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for other conditions. »

239

Driving

● If driving down a steep gradient, the GRAcannot maintain a constant speed. Thespeed can increase. In this case, brake andchange down a gear.

Operating the cruise control withthe turn signal lever

Fig. 222 On the turn signal lever: controls foroperating the GRA.

Connecting● Move the control ››› Fig. 222 1 to .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys-tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 222 2 in area .

The current speed is stored and the cruisecontrol is activated.

Temporarily interrupting● Move the control ››› Fig. 222 1 to orstep on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched off tem-porarily. The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 222 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the storedspeed.

Adjusting the speedWhile the GRA is set, the stored speed can beadjusted with button ››› Fig. 222 2 :

● To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 222 2 in the area.● To increase the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 222 2 pressed down inthe area .● To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 222 2 in the area.● To reduce the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 222 2 pressed down inthe area .

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi-cle does not brake actively.

Switching off● Move control ››› Fig. 222 1 to .

The system is disconnected and the memo-rised speed is deleted.

Operating the cruise control withthe third lever

Fig. 223 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the GRA.

Connecting● Move the lever towards the steering wheelto position .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys-tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control● Push button ››› Fig. 223 1 .

240


The current speed is stored and the cruisecontrol is activated.

Temporarily interrupting● Move the lever to and release it, orstep on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched off tem-porarily. The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control● Move the lever to and release it.

Cruise control is activated at the storedspeed.

Adjusting the speedWhile the GRA is set, the stored speed can beadjusted:

● Move the lever to the pressure point to increase speed in small increments of 1km/h (1 mph).● Move the lever upwards + to in-crease in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).● Press the button ››› Fig. 223 1 to re-duce speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1mph).● Move the lever downwards – to re-duce in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).

To change the stored speed without interrup-tion, keep the lever pressed in the direction

+ or – . The vehicle adapts thecurrent speed by accelerating or stoppingaccelerating. The vehicle does not brake ac-tively.

Switching off● Move the lever to position .

The system is disconnected and the memo-rised speed is deleted.

Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit-er is active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after approxi-mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken forthe function check.


Introduction

Fig. 224 On the instrument panel display: indi-cations of the speed limited status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding aprogrammed speed, from 30 km/h (19 mph)approx. and faster. ››› Depending on the equipment, the speed limi-ted can be operated using the lever of theturn signals ››› page 243 or by the third lever››› page 243.

Display messages on the speed limiterStatus ››› Fig. 224:

The speed limiter is active. The last speedset is displayed in large figures. »

A

241

Driving

The speed limiter is not active. The lastspeed set is displayed in small or dark-ened figures.The speed limiter is switched off. The totalmileage is displayed.

Switching between the speed limiter andGRA or ACC (while the speed limiter isconnected)To change between the driving assistancesystems, press button ››› Fig. 225 2 or››› Fig. 226 2 , then select with the rightthumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel in the instrument cluster menu andpress the thumbwheel to confirm your selec-tion.

It switches between the speed limiter andcruise control (GRA) or the adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC).

Going down slopes with the speed limiterIf the programmed speed is exceeded whiledriving downhill, after a short time the controlwarning lamp ››› page 241 flashes and anaudible warning may sound. Brake andchange down a gear.

Temporarily deactivate by pressing theaccelerator downIf the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-down) and the set speed is exceeded be-

B

C

cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter istemporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acousticsignal sound once. While cruise control is off,the control lamp flashes .

When the accelerator is no longer presseddown and the speed is reduced below the setvalue, the limiter switches on again. The con-trol lamp lights up and remains lit.

Automatic offThe speed limiter is automatically switchedoff:

● If the system detects a fault that could neg-atively affect the working order of the limiter.● If the airbag is triggered.

WARNINGAfter use, switch off the speed limiter toprevent the speed being regulated withoutit being required.● The speed limiter does not relieve thedriver of their responsibility to drive at theappropriate speed. Do not drive at highspeed if not necessary.● Using the speed limiter in adverse weath-er conditions is dangerous and can causeserious accidents. Use the speed limiteronly when the condition of the road surfaceand the weather and traffic conditions al-low it.

● When driving on a steep gradient, thespeed limiter cannot limit the vehicle’sspeed. This can increase. In this case, brakeand change down a gear.

CAUTIONFor automatic switching off due to systemfailures, for security reasons, the limiter isonly completely switched off when thedriver stops pressing the accelerator orconsciously switches it off.

Note● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versionsand instructions on the display may vary.● If the cruise control (GRA), the adaptivecruise control (ACC) or the speed limiterare connected when the ignition is switch-ed off, the assistants will switch it when theignition is switched on, but only the speedlimiter will maintain the last programmedspeed.

242


Operating the speed limiter withthe turn signal lever

Fig. 225 On the turn signal lever: buttons tooperate the speed limiter.

Connecting● Move control ››› Fig. 225 1 to position and press button 2 .

The last programmed speed is stored. It doesnot take effect yet.

Activating the speed limiter● While driving, press button ››› Fig. 225 3 inthe area .

The current speed is stored as the maximumspeed.

Setting the programmed speedYou can set the speed using button››› Fig. 225 3 :

● Briefly press area to increase speed insmall increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).● Press and hold the area to continu-ously increase speed in increments of 10km/h (5 mph).● Briefly press area to decrease speedin small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).● Press and hold area to continuouslydecrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5mph).

The speed is limited to the set value.

Switching off the speed limiter● Move control ››› Fig. 225 1 to position .

The system switches off.

Switching off temporarilyIf you want to temporarily deactivate thespeed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move thecontrol ››› Fig. 225 1 to position orpress button 2 .

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac-tivated with the previously programmedspeed by pressing button ››› Fig. 225 3 inthe area .

Operating the speed limiter withthe third lever

Fig. 226 On the left of the steering column:buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting● Move the lever towards the steering wheelto position and press button ››› Fig. 226 2 .

The last programmed speed is stored. It doesnot take effect yet.

Activating the speed limiter● While driving, press button ››› Fig. 226

1 .

The current speed is stored as the maximumspeed.

Setting the programmed speedThe programmed speed can be set: »

243

Driving

● Move the lever to the pressure point to increase speed in small increments of 1km/h (1 mph).● Move the lever upwards to increase inincrements of 10 km/h (5 mph).● Press the button ››› Fig. 226 1 to re-duce speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1mph).● Move the lever downwards to reducein increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).

To change the programmed speed withoutinterruption, keep the lever pressed in the di-rection + or - . The speed islimited to the set value.

Switching off the speed limiter● Move the lever to position .

The system switches off.

Switching off temporarilyIf you want to temporarily deactivate thespeed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move thelever to the pressure point or press but-ton ››› Fig. 226 2 .

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac-tivated with the previously programmedspeed by moving the lever to the pressurepoint .

Emergency brake assistancesystem (Front Assist)*

Introduction

Fig. 227 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning indications.

The objective of the system is to preventhead-on collisions against objects that maybe in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-sequences of such impacts.

Depending on several factors and how criti-cal the situation is, the system operates in astaggered manner. First it warns the driver,and if the driver’s reaction does not occur oris insufficient, it activates independent emer-gency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisionswith parked vehicles or vehicles in the samelane travelling in the same direction, or withpedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path or cir-

culating on the same lane and in the same di-rection. It may not activate in other hazardsituations ››› .

Front Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Dependingon a range of conditions, some of the func-tions described below are omitted to optimizethe behaviour of the system.

Front Assist is a driving assistance functionthat can never replace the driver’s atten-tion.

Safety distance warningIf the system detects that you are driving tooclose to the vehicle in front, it will warn thedriver with this indication on the instrumentpanel display .

The timing of the warning varies dependingon driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warningIf the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it alerts the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 227.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

244


Critical warningIf the driver fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may actively intervenein the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warnthe driver of the imminent danger of a colli-sion.

Automatic brakingIf the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independ-ent emergency braking by progressively in-creasing the braking in accordance with howcritical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assistance sys-temThe system may detect that the driver is notbraking hard enough to avoid the collision. Inthis case, it will increase the braking intensity.

The system cannot prevent a collision, al-though it can significantly minimise the con-sequences by reducing the speed and theforce of the impact.


WARNINGFront Assist cannot change the laws ofphysics or replace the driver in terms of

keeping control of the vehicle and reactingto a possible emergency situation.

WARNINGFollowing a Front Assist emergency warn-ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-tion and try to avoid the collision as appli-cable.● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedlyintervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership.● Always adapt your speed and distanceaway from the vehicle in front of you at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.● In complex driving situations, Front Assistmay issue warnings and intervene in brak-ing unnecessarily.● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired by dirt or because the radar sensorhas lost its settings, the system may issueunnecessary warnings and intervene inop-portunely in the braking.● The Front Assist does not react to animalsor vehicles crossing your path or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.

● The Front Assist does not react to pedes-trians walking head-on in the same lane.● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.

Note● When Front Assist is connected, the indi-cations of other functions on the screenmay be hidden.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the clutch, accelerator or movingthe wheel.● The Front Assist may brake the vehicleuntil it stops completely. However, thebrake system does not halt the vehicle per-manently. Use the foot brake!● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenesseveral times unnecessarily), switch it off.

245

Driving

Radar sensors

Fig. 228 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper››› Fig. 228 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, or by environmental influences suchas rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assistdoes not work. The instrument panel displaysthe following message: Front Assist: Nosensor vision! Clean the radar sensor››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will be availa-ble again. The message will disappear fromthe screen.

Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or dueto the presence of metallic objects (e.g.guard rails or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, Front Assist operation may be affected.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

CAUTIONIf you have the feeling that the radar sensoris damaged or has lost its settings, discon-nect the Front Assist. This will avoid possi-ble dangerous situations caused by the in-adequate operation of the system. If thisoccurs have it adjusted.● The sensor may not be adjusted correct-ly if it receives an impact. This may com-promise the system's efficacy or discon-nect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront that is larger than the space for theregistration plate, or a registration platethat is curved or warped can cause the ra-dar to malfunction.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

Operation of the emergency brakeassistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 229 On the instrument panel display:Front Assist deactivated indication.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning and the distancewarning functions.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assistactivated. Exceptions ››› page 247, Deacti-vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol-lowing situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and offWith the ignition switched on, the Front Assistcan be deactivated or activated as follows:● using the Easy Connect system with thebutton > SETTINGS > Driver as-sistance ››› page 85.

246


When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-cation ››› Fig. 229 will be shown on the in-strument panel.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)The advance warning can be activated ordeactivated in the Easy Connect system us-ing button > SETTINGS > Driverassistance ››› page 85.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping advance warningactive.

Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys-tem the advance warning function may beadapted in the following modes:

● Advance● Medium● Delayed● Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in“Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and offThe distance warning can be activated ordeactivated in the Easy Connect system us-ing button > SETTINGS > Driverassistance ››› page 85.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distancewarning active.

Deactivating Front Assist tempora-rily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.● If the vehicle is on a test bed.● When the radar sensor is damaged.● If the radar sensor receives a violent im-pact.● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.● If the radar sensor is temporarily coveredby an accessory.● When the vehicle is going to be loaded ontotransportation.

System limitations

Fig. 230 On the instrument panel display: ini-tial system self-calibration indication.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent tothe system. Thus, in certain circumstances,some of the reactions may be inappropriatefrom the driver's standpoint. So pay attentionin order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause theFront Assist not to react or to do so toolate:● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’sinitial auto-calibration. During this period, astatus icon ››› Fig. 230is displayed.● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.● On taking tight bends or complex paths. »

247

Driving

● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.● If the ASR has been disconnected or theESC activated in Sport mode ››› page 267.● If the ESC is controlling.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails orsheets used in road works.● If the vehicle is reversing.● In case of snow or heavy rain.● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes.● Misaligned vehicles.● Vehicles crossing the other's path.● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-tion.● Loads and accessories of other vehiclesthat protrude over the sides, backwards orover the top.

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-trol*

Introduction


Fig. 232 Detection area.

The ACC is an extension of the vehicle’scruise control function (GRA) ››› .

It allows the driver to set a cruise speed be-tween 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130mph), and select the desired distance fromthe previous in front.

The ACC adapts the cruising speed of thevehicle, keeping a safe distance away fromthe vehicle in front, if there is one, dependingon speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, theACC reduces speed until it is the same asthat of the vehicle ahead and maintains theset distance between the vehicles. If the vehi-cle ahead accelerates, the ACC also accel-erates the vehicle, going no higher than theprogrammed target speed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automaticgearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle untilit stops completely if a vehicle in front of itstops.

The distance programmed should be in-creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention promptACC is subject to certain limitations inherentto the system. In other words, in certain cir-cumstances the driver will have to adjust thespeed and the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen willwarn you to intervene by applying the brakeand a warning tone will be heard››› page 249.

WARNINGThe ACC’s technology cannot overcomethe system's inherent limitations or change

248


the laws of physics. If used negligently orinvoluntarily, it may cause serious acci-dents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or onroads that are steep, with lots of curves orslippery.● Never use ACC when driving off-road oron unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-signed for use on paved roads only.● ACC does not react when approaching afixed obstacle, such as the end of a trafficjam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-ped at the traffic lights.● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-destrian monitoring system is available.The system does not react to animals orvehicles crossing your path or approachinghead-on down the same lane.● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-ciently, brake the vehicle immediately.● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-ted, the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off. Switch off the system whenstarting off.● If the vehicle continues to move involun-tarily after a driver intervention prompt,brake the vehicle.

● If the instrument panel screen displays adriver intervention prompt, adjust the dis-tance.● The driver should be ready to accelerateor brake at all times.

Note● If the ACC does not work as described inthis chapter, do not use it until it has beenchecked by a specialised workshop. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● Maximum speed with the ACC activatedis limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).● When the ACC is switched on, strangenoises may be heard during braking,caused by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument paneldisplay and control lamps

3 Applies to vehicles with analogue instrumentpanel

The speed reduction by the ACCto maintain the distance from thevehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver interventionprompt.

ACC is not currently availablea).

While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engineand start it again. Perform a visual check of the radarsensor ››› Fig. 234. If it is still unavailable, refer to aspecialised workshop to have the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colourdisplay is in colour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmedspeed remains constant.

If the symbol is white: the ACC isactive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

The lamp lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds. »

249

Driving


Status display

Fig. 233 On the instrument panel display: ACC inactive (Standby). ACC active.

Indications on the display ››› Fig. 233:Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-tive and is not regulating your speed.

1

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC isnot active and is not regulating your dis-tance.Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is activeand is regulating your speed.Distance level 2 set by the driver.ACC is active and is regulating your dis-tance based on speed.Speed programmed with the ACC

NoteWhen the ACC is connected, the indica-tions on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensors

Fig. 234 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

2

3

4

5

6

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper››› Fig. 234 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, or by environmental influences suchas rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC) does not work. The instrumentpanel displays the following message: ACC:No sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly, the ACC will become available. Themessage on the screen will switch off and theACC may be reactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection. This may occur, forexample, in a closed car park or due to thepresence of metallic objects (e.g. guard railsor sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, ACC operation may be affected. In thisscenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

250


disconnect the ACC. This way you canavoid possible damage. If this occurs haveit adjusted.● The sensor may not be adjusted correct-ly if it receives an impact. This may com-promise the system's efficacy or discon-nect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront that is larger than the space for theregistration plate, or a registration platethat is curved or warped can cause the ra-dar to malfunction.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

ACC operation

Fig. 235 On the left of the steering column:operating the ACC with the third lever.

Fig. 236 On the left of the steering column:operating the ACC with the third lever.

When the ACC is connected, the green con-trol lamp will light up on the instrumentpanel, and the programmed speed and ACCstatus will be displayed ››› Fig. 233.

What ACC settings are possible?● Connecting and activating the ACC››› page 251.● Setting your speed ››› page 252.● Setting your distance ››› page 252.● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC››› page 252.● Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journey ››› page 252.● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 252.● Conditions in which the ACC does not re-act ››› page 252.

Connecting and activating the ACCTo connect and activate the ACC, the posi-tion of the gearbox lever, the vehicle speedand the position of the third level of the ACCmust all be taken into account.

● With manual transmission, the gear levermust be in any gear except first. With auto-matic transmission, the gear lever must be inposition D or S. Speed must be higher than30 km/h (18 mph) approx.● To activate the ACC, move the third lever toposition ››› Fig. 235 1 . At this time, theACC is not active and there is no program-med speed.● Next, press button ››› Fig. 236 B ormove the lever to position »

251

Driving

››› Fig. 235 2 . At this moment the ACC is ac-tivated and the current speed and distanceare programmed. The picture in the box willchange to Active mode ››› Fig. 233 .

While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at aset speed and distance from the vehicleahead. Both speed and distance can bechanged at any time.

Setting speed● To set the speed, move the third lever up +or down – to the desired speed››› Fig. 233 6 . The speed adjustment ismade at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.● If you wish to increase speed by intervals of1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position ››› Fig. 235 2 , or to decrease it pressbutton ››› Fig. 236 B .

The set speed can be changed when the ve-hicle is stopped or during driving.

Setting your distance level● To increase or reduce the distance, pressbutton A to the right or left ››› Fig. 236.

The instrument panel display modifies the se-lected distance ››› Fig. 233 4 . There are 5distance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-mends level 3. The set distance can bechanged when the vehicle is stopped or whiledriving ››› .

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC● To disconnect the ACC move the lever toposition (fixed) ››› Fig. 235 0 . An ACC de-activated message appears and the func-tion is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, justto switch it temporarily to inactive mode(Standby), move the third lever to position 3 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door isopened.

Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journeyIn wet road conditions, you should always seta larger distance with regard to the vehicle infront than when driving in dry conditions››› .

In the Easy Connect system, you can pre-se-lect the distance level when connecting theACC to: Very short, Short, Medium, Long andVery long using button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 85.

Changing the driving profileIn vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the drivingprofile selected can have an influence on theACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour››› page 234.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-haviour of the ACC can also be affected ifany of the following drive profiles are selec-ted in the Easy Connect system:

● Normal● Sport● Eco● Convenience

In this case you must access the ACC set-tings using button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance > ACC ››› page 85.

The following conditions may lead theACC not to react:● If the accelerator is pressed.● If there is no gear engaged.● If the ESC is controlling.● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the vehicle is reversing.● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages ACC not available● The system cannot continue to guaranteesafe vehicle detection and is deactivated.The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged.

252


Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currentlynot available. No sensor vision● This message is displayed if the radar sen-sor's visibility is impaired by leaves, snow,dense fog or dirt. Clean the sensor››› Fig. 234.

ACC: currently not available.Gradient too steep● The maximum road slope has been excee-ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot beguaranteed. The ACC cannot be switchedon.

ACC: only available in D, S or M● Select the D/S or M position on the selectorlever.

ACC: parking brake applied● The ACC is deactivated if the parking brakeis applied. The ACC is available once againafter the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available. In-tervention of stability control● The indication is displayed when the elec-tronic stability control (ESC) intervenes. In thiscase, the ACC is automatically switched off.

ACC: Take action!● The indication is displayed if, when the ve-hicle starts up on a hill with a slight slope, thevehicle rolls back even although the ACC isactivated. Apply the brake to stop the vehiclefrom moving/colliding with another vehicle.

ACC: speed limit● The indication is displayed in vehicles withmanual gearboxes if the current speed is toolow for the ACC mode. The speed limiterswitches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h(12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2nd gear● The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear(manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speed● This indication is displayed if, when theACC accelerates or brakes, the driver doesnot shift up or down a gear in time, whichmeans exceeding or not reaching the permit-ted RPM. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzerwarning is heard.

ACC: clutch applied● Vehicles with manual transmission: pressingthe clutch pedal for longer exits cruise con-trol.

Door open● Vehicles with automatic transmission: theACC cannot be activated with the vehiclestationary and the door open.

WARNINGThere is a danger of rear collision when thedistance to the vehicle in front is reducedand the speed difference between both ve-hicles is so great that a speed reduction bythe ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brakeimmediately!● The ACC may not be able to detect allsituations properly.● Stepping on the accelerator may causethe ACC not to intervene in braking. Driverbraking will have priority over interventionby the speed control or adaptive cruisecontrol.● Always be ready to use the brakes!● Observe country-specific provisions gov-erning obligatory minimum distances be-tween vehicles.● It is dangerous to activate control and re-sume the programmed speed if the road,traffic or weather conditions do not permitthis. Risk of accident!

Note● The programmed speed is erased oncethe ignition or the ACC are switched off. »

253

Driving

● When the traction control system (ASR) isdeactivated during acceleration or else theESC is activated in Sport* Mode(››› page 85), the ACC switches off auto-matically.● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,the engine switches off during the ACCstopping phase and restarts for moving off.

Function to prevent overtaking onthe right

Fig. 237 On the instrument panel display: ACCactive, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The ACC has a function to prevent overtakingon the right.

If another vehicle is driving more slowly to theleft of the vehicle, it is shown on the display››› Fig. 237.

The system brakes the vehicle to avoid over-taking on the right, and will avoid overtakingbased on speed. The driver can interrupt theintervention of the ACC by pressing the ac-celerator. At low speeds the function is inac-tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or incity traffic.

Deactivating the ACC temporarilyin certain situations

In the following situations the ACC should bedeactivated due to the system's limitations››› :

● When overtaking, on closed curves ormountain roads, roundabouts, slip roads orroadwork sections, preventing the systemfrom accelerating to reach the programmedspeed.● When going through a tunnel, as operationcould be affected.● When other vehicles are going slower in theleft lane. In this case, slower vehicles will beovertaken on the right.● In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi-cle in front may not be detected.

WARNINGIf the ACC does not switch off in the situa-tions described, serious accidents and inju-ries may occur.

● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit-uations.

NoteIf you do not switch off the ACC in theaforementioned situations, you may com-mit a legal offence.

254


Special driving recommendations

Fig. 238 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclistahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 239 Vehicle changing lanes. Onevehicle turning and another stationary.

The ACC has certain limitations inherent tothe system. Certain reactions, under certaincircumstances, may be unexpected or comelate from the driver's point of view. So pay at-tention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following situations require maximum at-tention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase(only with automatic transmission)After a stopping phase, the ACC may begindriving when the vehicle in front moves off››› .

When the ACC halts the vehicle, the instru-ment panel display shows the ACC ready to

start warning. If the vehicle in front movesoff, the ACC will also make your vehicle moveoff.

If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again,the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the ACCready to start status by operating thethird lever repeatedly towards position 2››› Fig. 235 or by pressing the brake. If thePress the brake message is shown on theinstrument panel, you must do so. If you donot, an audible warning will be heard andACC switches to standby mode. It may startto move towards the stopped vehicle ››› .

OvertakingWhen the turn signal lights up before the ve-hicle starts to overtake, the ACC acceleratesthe vehicle automatically and thus reducesthe distance from the vehicle in front.

When the vehicle moves to the overtakinglane, if the ACC does not detect another ve-hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches theprogrammed speed.

System acceleration can be interrupted atany time by pressing the brake or moving thethird lever to position ››› Fig. 235 3 .

Driving through a bendWhen entering or leaving some curves, theradar sensor may cease to sense the vehicledriving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in theadjacent lane ››› Fig. 238 . The vehicle may »

255

Driving

brake unnecessarily or stop reacting to thevehicle in front. In this case, the driver has tointervene by accelerating or interruptingbraking by applying the brake or pushing thethird lever to position ››› Fig. 235 3 .

Driving in tunnelsWhen driving through tunnels the radar sen-sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehiclesThe radar sensor can only detect narrow ve-hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align-ment when they enter its range››› Fig. 238 . In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-riesSpecial loads and accessories of other vehi-cles that jut out over the sides, backwards orover the top may be out of the ACC's range.SEAT recommends disconnecting it.

Other vehicles changing lanesVehicles changing lanes a short distanceaway from your own can only be detectedwhen they are within range of the sensors. Asa consequence, the ACC will take longer toreact ››› Fig. 239 . Brake yourself as neces-sary.

Stationary vehiclesThe ACC does not detect stationary objectswhile driving, such as traffic tails or damagedvehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns ormoves over and there is a stationary vehiclein front of it, the ACC will not react to it››› Fig. 239 . Brake yourself as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite directionand vehicles crossing your pathThe ACC does not react to vehicles ap-proaching from the opposite direction or ve-hicles crossing your path.

Metal objectsMetal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets usedin road works, can confuse the radar sensorand cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radarsensor operatesIf laser sensor operation is impaired, due toheavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva-ted temporarily. A message will be displayedstating this. If necessary, clean the radar sen-sor ››› Fig. 234.

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly, the ACC will become available. Themessage will turn off and the ACC may bereactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection, for example in aclosed car park. SEAT recommends discon-necting it.

Trailer modeWhen driving with trailer the ACC controlsless dynamically.

Overheated brakesIf the brakes overheat, for example on longand steep descents, the ACC may be deacti-vated temporarily. A message will be dis-played stating this. In this case, adaptivecruise control cannot be activated.

Cruise control may be reactivated once thebrake temperature has dropped. The mes-sage will disappear. If the message ACC notavailable remains on for quite a long time itmeans that there is a fault. Contact a speci-alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership.

WARNINGIf you do not pay attention to the Pressthe brake message, the vehicle may moveand crash into the vehicle ahead. Beforedriving off again, check that the road isclear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-stacles on the road. This could cause anaccident and serious injuries. If necessary,apply the brake.

256


Using the blind spot detector(BSD) with parking assistant(RCTA)*

Introduction

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detectthe traffic situation behind the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helpsthe driver when backing out of a parallelparking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developedfor driving on paved roads.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe blind spot detector (BSD) with parkingassistance (RCTA) included cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if the blind spot detection system orthe rear cross traffic alert are used negli-gently or involuntarily. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● Pay attention to the control lamps thatmay come on in the external rear view mir-rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-low any instructions they may give.● The blind spot assistant could react toany special constructions that might bepresent on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. highor irregular dividers. This may cause erro-neous warnings.● Never use the blind spot detector withrear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-fic alert has been designed for use onpaved roads.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● Never use the blind spot detector or theparking assistant if the radar sensors aredirty.● The external rear view mirror controllamps may have limited functionality dueto solar radiation.

CAUTION● The radar sensors on the rear bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space. This may result inthe system disconnecting itself, or at leastpossibly having its functionality diminished.

● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper free ofsnow and ice and do not cover it.● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by SEAT. The blindspot detector's functions may be limited orwork incorrectly if other paints are used.

NoteIf the blind spot detector with parking as-sistant does not work as described in thischapter, stop using it and contact a speci-alised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

It lights up

It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-tivated and ready to operate.

It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-cle in the blind spot.

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in theblind spot and the turn signal has been turned on inthe direction of the detected vehicle ››› .

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after »

257

Driving

approximately 2 seconds. This is the time tak-en for the function check.

If there are no indications from the controllamp in the external rear view mirror, thismeans that the blind spot detector has notdetected any other vehicles in the area ››› .

If the dipped beam is on, then the controllamps in the external rear view mirrors will bedimmed (night mode).

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic and causeaccidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and cor-responding text messages when they lightup may result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 240 In the exterior mirrors: blind spot de-tector indication.

Fig. 241 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensorzones.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors tomonitor the areas behind the vehicle››› Fig. 241. The system does this by measur-ing the vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The blind spot de-tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-cal signals in the external rear view mirrors tonotify the driver.

Indication on the exterior mirrorThe control lamp (expanded view) providesan indication in the corresponding externalmirror ››› Fig. 240 regarding the traffic situa-tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to becritical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation tothe left of the vehicle, and the control lamp ofthe right-hand external mirror indicates thetraffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

258


In the case of retrofitted tinted windows orwindows with tinted film, the indications of theexternal mirrors may not be seen clearly orcorrectly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free ofsnow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors are located on the left andright of the bumper and are not visible from

the outside ››› Fig. 241. The sensors monitorboth the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-hicle ››› Fig. 242, ››› Fig. 243. The range tothe sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than thewidth of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detectvehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect station-ary objects such as dividers, and thus give anincorrect indication.

259

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 242 Schematic representation: Passingsituation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-cation from the blind spot detector in the left-hand external mirror.

Fig. 243 Schematic representation: Situa-tion of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane. Indication from the blind spot de-tector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 242 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 243 (arrow):

● When being overtaken by another vehicle››› Fig. 242 .● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 243 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-er an indication will be displayed in the exter-nal mirror, because the blind spot detectortakes into account the speed differential withother vehicles. Thus even though the distancefrom the other vehicle is identical, the indica-tion will appear sooner in some cases andlater in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the systemIn some situations the blind spot detectormay not interpret the traffic situation correct-ly. E.g. in the following situations:

● on tight bends;● in the case of lanes with different widths;● at the top of slopes;● in adverse weather conditions;

260


● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-ers.

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

Fig. 244 Schematic representation of the rearcross traffic alert assistant: zone monitoredaround the vehicle while leaving a parkingspace.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensorson the rear bumper ››› Fig. 241 to monitor thetraffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backsout of a parallel parking space or as it is be-ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else onthe road is approaching the rear of the vehi-cle ››› Fig. 244, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver isalso informed by means of a visual signal oninfotainment system display. This signal is dis-played in the form of a red strip at the back ofthe image of the vehicle on the infotainmentsystem screen. This strip displays the side ofthe vehicle towards which traffic is approach-ing.1)

Automatic braking to reduce damagesIf the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approaching therear of the vehicle and the driver does notstep on the brake, the system will engage thebrakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The automatic intervention on thebrakes takes place when driving in reverse atapprox. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detectingthat the vehicle is stationary, the systemkeeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping hard on the accelerator pedal orthe brake pedal in order to regain control ofthe vehicle.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe rear cross traffic alert cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. The parking assistant functionshould not tempt you into taking any risks.The system is not a replacement for driverawareness.● The system should never be used in limi-ted visibility conditions or complicatedtraffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or whencrossing multiple lanes.● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-cle's surroundings, since the system oftenfails to detect things such as bicycles orpedestrians.● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.● When the ESC is in Sport* mode or if theESC or ASR are disconnected, there will beno automatic braking.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equippedwith a parking system.

261

Driving

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)with parking assistant (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spotdetector (BSD) with parking assistant(RCTA)The blind spot detector with parking assistantcan be switched on and off by accessing theAssistance systems menu on the dashpanel display using the steering wheel con-trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-function camera, it can also be accessed bymeans of the driver assistance systems keylocated on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

● Blind spot● Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel ischecked , the functionality will be automat-ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-erate, the indications in the external mirrorswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automaticallydeactivated, it will only be possible to restartthe system after turning the vehicle off andrestarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spotdetector (BSD)The radar sensors of the blind spot detectorwith rear cross traffic alert will be automati-cally deactivated when, among other rea-sons, one of the sensors is detected to bepermanently covered. This may be the caseif, for example, there is a layer of snow or icein front of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display.

Trailer modeThe Blind spot detector and the rear crosstraffic alert will be automatically deactivatedand it will be impossible to activate them ifthe tow hitch is electrically connected to atrailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the blind spot detectorand the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched fromthe vehicle, if you want to use the blind spotdetector and the rear cross traffic alert, youwill have to reactivate them in the corre-sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,then the blind spot detector and the rearcross traffic alert will have to be deactivatedmanually when driving with a trailer.

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low ››› page 316 or fault in thebrake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Handbrake applied ››› page 264.The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-leased.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not goout or if it lights up when driving, the brakefluid level in the reservoir is too lo so thereis a risk of an accident ››› page 316, Brakefluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.Obtain technical assistance.● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. When this functionfails, the rear wheels can lock up. Undercertain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.

262

Braking and parking

Information about the brakes

New brake padsFor the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200miles), new brake pads have not yet reachedtheir maximum braking capacity, and need tobe “run in” first. However, you can compen-sate for the slightly reduced braking effect byapplying more pressure on the brake pedal.Avoid overloading the brakes while runningthem in.

WearThe rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is aparticular problem in urban traffic and shortstretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may beproduced when braking.

Wet roads or road saltIn certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipersactivated, the brake pads will briefly touchthe brake discs. This takes place, althoughunnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervalsto improve the response time of the brakeswhen they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven forsome distance without using the brakes whenthere is a lot of salt on the road in winter. Thelayer of salt that accumulates on the discsand pads can be removed by gently apply-ing the brakes a few times.

CorrosionThere may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rusthas formed on the disks, it is advisable toclean off the pads and disks by braking firmlya few times at a moderately high speed ››› .

Fault in the brake systemIf the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediately tothe nearest specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-member that you will have to apply more

pressure on the brake pedal and allow forlonger stopping distances.

Low brake fluid levelMalfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluidlevel is monitored electronically.

Brake servoThe brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

WARNINGAny anomaly in the brake system can in-crease the braking distance, with the re-sulting risk of an accident.● New brake pads and discs must be run inand do not have the correct friction duringthe first 200 km (124 miles). This reducedbraking capacity may be offset by pressingon the brake pedal a little harder.● If you are driving on roads which havebeen salted, braking effectiveness may bedecreased.● Brakes can overheat if used excessivelyon slopes. Before driving down a long steepslope, it is advisable to reduce speed andchange down into a lower gear or range.Therefore, using the engine brake relievesthe brakes.● Gentle continuous braking causes thebrakes to overheat and the braking »

263

Driving

distance will increase. Apply and then re-lease the brakes alternately.● Apply the brakes heavily to clean thebrake system only in a suitable traffic situa-tion. Do not put other road users in danger:there is risk of causing an accident.● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Thebraking distance is increased considerablywhen the brake servo is not active.● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency ofthe brakes.● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. Before purchasingaccessories please read the relevant in-structions.

CAUTION● Never let the brakes “drag” by leavingyour foot on the pedal when it is not neces-sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-sulting in longer stopping distances andgreater wear.● Before driving down a long, steep gradi-ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-lect a lower gear. This makes use of enginebraking and relieves the brakes. If you stillhave to use the brakes, it is better to brakefirmly at intervals than to apply the brakescontinuously.

Note● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex-ample when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lackof servo assistance.● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-cessories such as a front spoiler or wheelcovers, it is important that the flow of air tothe front wheels is not obstructed, other-wise the brakes can overheat.

Handbrake

Fig. 245 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly toprevent the vehicle from accidentally moving.Apply the handbrake when you leave yourvehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake– Pull the handbrake lever up ››› Fig. 245.

Releasing the handbrake– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

lease knob in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 245 and guide the handbrake leverdown fully ››› .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, toavoid driving off while the brake is on ››› .

WARNING● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-cle when it is in motion. The braking dis-tance is considerably longer, becausebraking is only applied to the rear wheels.Risk of accident!● Failure to fully lower the handbrake levercan affect the operation of the system, andcan also cause heating and wear of therear brakes.

CAUTIONAlways apply the handbrake before youleave the vehicle. In addition, engage firstor rear gear in the gradient function, or setthe selection lever to P.

264

Braking and parking

Hill driving assistant*3 Valid for vehicles: with ESC


The hill driving assistant helps the driver tomove off and upward on a hill, both forwardsand backwards, when the vehicle is station-ary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-proximately two seconds after the foot is tak-en off the brake pedal, to prevent the vehiclefrom moving when it is started. During these 2seconds, the driver has enough time to re-lease the clutch pedal and accelerate with-out the vehicle moving and without having touse the handbrake, making start-up easier,more comfortable and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

● being on a ramp or hill/slope,● driver door closed,● vehicle completely stationary,● engine running and foot on the brake,● having a gear engaged or being in neutralfor a manual gearbox, or with the selector

lever at positions D/S or R for an automaticgearbox.

WARNING● If you do not start the vehicle immediate-ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may roll back under certainconditions. Depress the brake pedal or usethe hand brake immediately.● If the engine stalls, depress the brakepedal or use the hand brake immediately.● When following a line of traffic uphill, ifyou want to prevent the vehicle from rollingback when starting off, hold the brake ped-al down for a few seconds before startingoff.

NoteThe Official Service or a specialist work-shop can tell you if your vehicle is equip-ped with this system.

Stabilisation and brake as-sistance systems

Control lamps*

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused bythe system.The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If theABS fails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

Fault in the ASR or disconnection caused by the sys-tem.

Flashes

ASR working.

It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 267.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work. »

265

Driving

The control lamps light up together when theignition is switched on and should turn off af-ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the timetaken for the function check.

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabili-ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspinon the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicleby braking individual wheels or by reducingthe engine torque. The warning lamp willflash on the instrument panel when the ESC isintervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), thetraction control system (ASR), electronic dif-ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control(XDS).

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle bychanging the torque.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spinis desirable ››› page 267.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached a

virtual standstill. You can continue to steer thevehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do notpump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedalpulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi-fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)In the event of wheelspin, the traction controlsystem reduces the engine torque to matchthe amount of grip available. This helps thecar to start moving, accelerate or climb agradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)*When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is activeup to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheelfrom overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-

hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch onagain automatically when the brake hascooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries ››› page 291.

Electronic engine torque management(XDS)*When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higherspeed than the inner wheel. In this way, thewheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.This may mean that in certain situations thetorque delivered to the inner wheel is toohigh, causing the wheels to spin. On the otherhand, the outer wheel is receiving a lowerdrive torque than it could transmit. This cancause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in thiscase the front axle, which results in under-steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effectvia the sensors and signals of the ESC.

266

Braking and parking

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the requestedtrajectory is much more precise.

XDS works in combination with the ESC and isalways active, even when ASR is disconnec-ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-connected.

Multi-collision brake*In an accident, the multi-collision brake canhelp the driver by braking to avoid the risk ofskidding during the accident and causingother collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, sideor rear accidents, when the airbag controlunit records its activation level and the acci-dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes thevehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-board network

The following actions control automatic brak-ing during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.

● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif ESC is malfunctioning.

WARNINGDriving at high speed on icy, slippery wetground can result in loss of vehicle controland serious injury to the driver and passen-gers.● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-ic torque control system cannot exceed thelimits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-ways bear this in mind, especially on wet orslippery roads. If you notice the systemscutting in, you should reduce your speedimmediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not be encouraged to takerisks by the presence of more safety sys-tems. If you do, an accident may occur.● Please remember that the accident riskalways increases if you drive fast, espe-cially in corners or on a slippery road, or ifyou follow too close behind the vehicle infront of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,EDS and the electronic torque control sys-tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-dents!● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).Despite the control systems, the drivenwheels could spin, affecting the stability ofthe vehicle: risk of accident!

Note● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor-rectly if the four wheels have identicaltyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises due to their operation.● If the warning lamp or lights up,there could be a fault ››› page 82.● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination ofwheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting theESC and ASR*

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched offin situations in which traction is insufficient.

Depending on the finishes and versions, thereis the possibility of disconnecting only theASR or activating the ESC in “Sport” mode. »

267

Driving

Disconnecting and connecting the ASR● The ASR can be disconnected and connec-ted using the Easy Connect system››› page 85. In vehicles with a driver informa-tion system* the corresponding indication willbe displayed.

When the ASR is disconnected, the controlwarning light lights up on the instrumentcluster.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in“Sport” mode● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon-nected and connected using the Easy Con-nect system ››› page 85. In vehicles with adriver information system* the correspondingindication will be displayed.

When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,and the anti-slip regulation (ASR) interven-tions are limited. In addition, the controllamp lights up on the instrument panel.

WARNINGThe ESC Sport mode should be activatedonly when traffic conditions and the abilityof the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sporti-er drive. The driving wheels could spin andthe vehicle could skid.

NoteIf the ASR is disconnected or the Sportmode is selected, cruise control* will beswitched off.

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› .● Apply the handbrake ››› page 264.● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-tor lever to position P.● Switch the engine off and remove the keyfrom the ignition. Turn the steering wheelslightly to engage the steering lock.● With a manual gearbox, engage first gearon flat ground and slopes, or even reversegear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys withyou.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclinesBefore switching off the engine, rotate thesteering wheel so that if the vehicle shouldmove, it will be held by the kerb.

● On slopes, turn the front wheels so thatthey are against the edge of the kerb.● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre ofthe road.

WARNING● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hotexhaust system could ignite inflammablematerials, such as dry grass, low bushes,spilt fuel or flammable materials.● Do not leave passengers inside a closedvehicle, they may not be able to opendoors or windows. Locked doors hinder thepossibility of a rescue.● Children should not be left alone in thevehicle. They could tamper with the hand-brake or the gears, which could cause thevehicle to move without control.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

NoteIn vehicles with automatic transmission, thekey can only be removed from the ignitionwhen the lever is in position P.

268

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Help with parking and ma-noeuvring

Assisted parking system(Park Assist)*

Introduction

The Park Assist system is an additionalParkPilot function ››› page 275 and helps thedriver to:

● find a suitable parking space,● select a parking mode,● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-dicular and parallel spaces,● park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-ular spaces,● exit a parking space driving forwards from aparallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-tory infotainment system, the front, rear andside areas are represented, and the positionof obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system and its userequires special attention by the driver ››› .

WARNINGThe technology used in the park assist sys-tem involves a series of limitations inherentin the actual system and in the use of ultra-sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Any accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detect, atleast correctly, these objects or peoplewearing such clothes.● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● The ultrasound sensors have blind spotsin which obstacles and people are not reg-istered.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the ultrasound sensors do notdetect small children, animals or certainobjects in all situations.

WARNINGQuick turns of the steering wheel whenparking or exiting a parking space withPark Assist can cause serious injury.● Do not hold the steering wheel duringmanoeuvres to park or exit a parking spaceuntil the system requests it. Doing so disa-bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonicsensors do not detect objects such as trail-er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,or an open (or opening) rear lid, whichcould damage the vehicle.● Retrofitting of certain accessories to thevehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-fere with the operation of the Park Assistsystem and cause damage.● The Park Assist system uses as a refer-ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheelsare not damaged while parking. If necessa-ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.● The ultrasound sensors on the bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do »

269

Driving

not apply it directly unless very briefly andalways from a distance of more than 10 cm.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– false detections,– loss of sensor visibility.– cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking.● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-aged, the area corresponding to that groupof sensors (front or rear) is deactivated andcannot be activated until the fault is cor-rected. However, you can still use the sen-sors of the other bumper as per usual. Ifthere is a fault in the system, consult a spe-cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Note● In order to guarantee good system oper-ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of thebumper clean, free of snow or ice, and donot cover them with adhesives or other ob-jects.● Certain sources of noise, such as roughasphalt or paving stones and the noise ofother vehicles can induce the Park Assistsystem or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-ings.

● In order to become familiar with the sys-tem and its functions, SEAT recommendsthat you practice operating the Park Assistsystem in an area where there is not toomuch traffic or in a car park.

Description of the parking assistsystem

Fig. 247 In the centre console: button to switchon the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist systemare the ultrasonic sensors located in the frontand rear bumpers, the button ››› Fig. 247to switch the system on and off and the mes-sages on the instrument panel display.

Prerequisites for parking● The traction control system (ASR) must beturned on ››› page 267.

● Speed when passing next to the parkingspace (parallel parking): do not exceed ap-prox. 40 km/h (25 mph).● Speed when passing next to the parkingspace (angle parking): do not exceed approx.20 km/h (12 mph).● Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me-tres when driving past the parking space.● Space length (parallel parking): vehiclelength + 0.8 meters.● Space width (angle parking): vehicle width+ 0.8 meters.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when parking.

Requirements for leaving the parkingspace (only for parallel parking)● The traction control system (ASR) must beturned on ››› page 267.● Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5metres.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-terrupting the manoeuvres for parking orexiting a parking spacePark Assist interrupts the manoeuvres forparking or exiting a parking space in any ofthe following cases:

270


● Press the button.● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h(4 mph).● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.● The parking manoeuvre does not end within6 minutes from the activation of automaticsteering.● There is a fault in the system (the system istemporarily unavailable).● ASR is switched off.● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.● The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary thatnone of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristicsThe Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. For exam-ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exita parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, abrief signal sounds to prompt the driver tochange between forward and reverse gears(depending on the case). In successive ma-noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver tochange gears, at the latest, when the contin-uous audible signal is given (object present ata distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-strument panel also displays the symbol .Keep the brake pedal depressed while thesymbol remains on the dash panel display toturn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. Thisway, the system will require fewer manoeu-vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer modeThe Park Assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket››› page 285 is electrically connected to atrailer.

After changing a wheelIf, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stopsentering and exiting parking spaces correct-ly, the circumference of the new wheel maybe different and the system may need toadapt to it. The adaptation is automatic andtakes place during driving. Making turns slow-ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])for a few minutes may contribute to thisadaptation process ››› in Introduction onpage 269.

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 248 On the instrument panel display: viewof the parking assist system with reduced view.

Fig. 249 On the instrument panel display: in-dication of parking modes.

Parking assist has the following 3 parkingmodes: »

271

Driving

Reverse parallel parking.Reverse angle parking.Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking mode after passing infront of the spaceAfter activating the Park Assist system and af-ter detecting a parking space, the display onthe instrument panel proposes a parkingmode. The Park Assist system selects theparking mode automatically. The selectedmode is shown on the instrument panel dis-play ››› Fig. 248. The reduced display of oth-er possible parking modes is also shown››› Fig. 249. If the mode selected by the sys-tem does not correspond to the desiredmode, you can select another mode bypressing the button ››› Fig. 247.

● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 270.● Press the button.

● A control lamp on the button lights upwhen the system is switched on. Additionally,the selected parking mode is shown on theinstrument panel display and the reduceddisplay shows another parking mode it canbe changed to.● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-wards the side of the road where you areparking. The instrument panel displays theside corresponding to the road. By default, ifthe turn signal is not on, it parks on the right inthe direction of traffic.● If necessary, press the button again tochange to the next parking mode.● Once you have switched to all possibleparking modes, if the button is pressedagain, the system switches off.● Press the button again to switch the sys-tem back on.● Follow the instructions displayed on the in-strument panel while paying attention to traf-

fic and drive the vehicle past the parkingspace.

Special case of perpendicular parkingspace to park forwards without drivingpast first● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 270.● Drive forward towards the parking spacewhile paying attention to traffic and stop thevehicle.● Press the button once.● A control lamp on the button lights upwhen the system is switched on. Additionally,the selected parking mode is shown on theinstrument panel display without reduceddisplay.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 269.

272


Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 250 On the instrument panel display: paral-lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park-ing position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 251 On the instrument panel display: angleparking. Finding a parking space. Parkingposition. Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwardsYour vehicleParked vehicleParking space detectedMessage to parkMessage to press the brake pedalProgress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The necessary conditions have to be met topark with Park Assist ››› page 270 and theparking mode must be selected ››› page 271.

Parking● Look at the display on the instrument panelto see if the space has been detected as “ap-propriate” and if the correct position for park-ing has been reached ››› Fig. 250 or ››› Fig. 251 . The space is considered

“appropriate” if the display on the instrumentpanel shows the message to park 5 .● Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause,engage the reverse gear.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 269.● Please note the following message: Auto-matic steering enabled. Pay atten-tion to your surroundings. While you »

273

Driving

keep watch around you, carefully start accel-erating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).During the parking manoeuvre, the systemonly takes charge of the steering. You, as thedriver, have to accelerate, engage theclutch if necessary, change gears andbrake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication tomove forward appears on the instrumentpanel display ››› Fig. 250 or ››› Fig. 251 ;OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish-ed message appears on the instrument paneldisplay. The progress bar 7 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 274.● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheelturns; OR: until the symbol goes out on theinstrument panel screen.● Select first gear.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPilotsignal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-verse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it centres itin the space ››› Fig. 250 or ››› Fig. 251 .● For best results, wait at the end of eachmanoeuvre until the Park Assist system hasfinished turning the steering wheel. The park-ing manoeuvre ends when a correspondingmessage is displayed on the instrument pan-el and, in some cases, an acoustic signalsounds.

Progress barsThe progress bar››› Fig. 250 7 and ››› Fig. 251 7 on thescreen of the instrument panel displays therelative distance to be covered. The greaterthe distance, the fuller the progress bar.When driving forward, the content of the pro-gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-versing, it decreases downwards.

NoteIf the manoeuvre is terminated prematurelyduring parking, the result may not be thebest.

Leaving a parking space with theparking assist system (only for par-allel parking)

Fig. 252 On the instrument panel display: exita parallel parking space.

Parked vehicleYour vehicle in reverse gearProgress bar to indicate the distance leftto coverMessage giving the proposed manoeuvreto exit the parking space

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)The necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist have to be met››› page 270.

● Press the button ››› Fig. 247. A controllamp on the button lights up when the sys-tem is switched on.● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-wards the road you will enter when exiting theparking space.● Select reverse gear.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 269. Please note the fol-lowing message: Automatic steering en-abled. Pay attention to your sur-roundings. While you keep watch aroundyou, carefully start accelerating up to nomore than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting theparking space, the system only takes chargeof the steering. You, as the driver, have toaccelerate, engage the clutch if necessa-ry, change gears and brake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument

1

2

3

4

274


panel display shows the forward indication.The progress bar ››› Fig. 252 3 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 274.● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheelturns; OR: press the brake pedal until thesymbol goes out on the instrument panelscreen.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPilotsignal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-verse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it can exitthe space.● The vehicle can exit the space when a cor-responding message is displayed on the in-strument panel and, in some cases, anacoustic signal sounds. Take charge of thesteering with the turning angle set by the ParkAssist system.● Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park-ing space.

Automatic operation of the brakesby the parking assist system

Park Assist helps the driver by automaticallybraking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking intime ››› .

Automatic braking intervention to avoidexceeding the speed limitTo avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leavinga parking space, the brakes may activate au-tomatically. After automatically activatingthe brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit aparking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activatedonce for each attempt to enter or exit a park-ing space. If the speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damagesDepending on certain conditions, the ParkAssist system can automatically brake thevehicle when faced with an obstacle, brieflyactioning and holding down the brake ped-al ››› . Following this the driver must pressthe brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reducedamage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-ishing.

WARNINGThe automatic braking intervention by ParkAssist should never tempt you to take anyrisk that may compromise safety. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.

● The Park Assist system is subject to cer-tain limitations inherent to the system. Incertain situations, the automatic brakingintervention may only work in a limited wayor not work at all.● Always be ready to use the brakes your-self!● The automatic braking intervention willend after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-noeuvring (ParkPilot)*

Introduction

These assist systems help you when parkingand manoeuvring:

– Park assist plus. It is an assistant that givesa visual and audio warning of obstacles de-tected in front and behind the vehicle››› page 277.

– Rear parking aid. An audio and visual as-sistant that warns of obstacles located be-hind the vehicle ››› page 280.

WARNING● Always pay attention, by looking directly,to traffic and the area around the vehicle.Assistance systems are not a replacement »

275

Driving

for driver awareness. Responsibility alwayslies with the driver.● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not detected. Payspecial attention to children and animals.● Always keep visual control of the sur-roundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTIONParking distance warning system functionscan be affected by different factors thatcan cause damage:● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:– Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees.– Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detectthese objects or people wearing suchclothes correctly.● Sensor signals may be affected by exter-nal sound sources. This may prevent themfrom detecting people or objects.● If the system warns you of the proximityof a low obstacle, please note that after

being detected by the system, the obstaclein question may disappear from the meas-urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos-er, and the system will no longer warn of itspresence. In certain circumstances, ob-jects such as high kerbs that could damagethe underside of the vehicle are not detec-ted.● If the parking distance warning system isignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-ble damage.● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,wheel arch and vehicle underbody canmodify the orientation of the sensors. Thiscan affect the parking aid function. Havethe function checked by a specialisedworkshop.● A number plate or number plate holderwith dimensions that exceed the space forthe number plate, or a cured or deformednumber plate can cause false detections ora loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.● In certain situations, the system can givea warning even though there is no obstaclein the detected area;– rough or cobbled surfaces or with long

grass,

– external ultrasound sources, such asother vehicles equipped with ultra-sound systems,

– downpours, heavy snow, hail or denseexhaust gases,

– if the number plate is not perfectly se-cured to the bumper surface,

– in gradient changes.● In order to guarantee good operation,keep the sensors clean, free of snow andice, and do not cover them with stickers orother objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,unless you do so very briefly, and alwayskeep a distance of more than 10 cm away.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.● We recommend that you practice park-ing in an area without traffic.● The volume and tone of the signals andindications can be changed ››› page 281.● In vehicles without an infotainment sys-tem, these parameters can be modified in aSEAT Official Service or in a specialisedworkshop.● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 281.

276


Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 253 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by givingvisual and audio warnings about obstaclesdetected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When anobstacle is detected, it is indicated by audiblesignals and in the Easy Connect system››› Fig. 253.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi-ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-hicle or behind it by choosing differentsounds.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 mA

1.60 m0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop!

If separation is maintained, the warning vol-ume reduces after about 4 seconds.

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missingareas are screened and obstacles at thesides of the vehicle are displayed C .

Special features of ParkPilot with AreaViewIn the following situations the screened areaon the side of the vehicle is automatically hid-den:

● When a vehicle door is opened.● When the ASR is switched off.● When there is ASR or ESC regulation.● If the vehicle remains stationary for morethan approximately 3 minutes.

B

CParking Aid operation

Fig. 254 Centre console: parking aid button(depending on the version).

Manually connecting and disconnectingthe parking aid● Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid● Select reverse gear.● OR: If you drive forward at a speed of lessthan 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter anobstacle, it is detected when it is approx. less »

277

Driving

than 95 cm. away. If the automatic connec-tion is activated, a reduced display is shown››› Fig. 255.● OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Move the selector lever to position P.● OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) orfaster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view● Select reverse gear.● OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.

Switch to the reverse assist image (RearView Camera “RVC”)*● Select reverse gear.● OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up when the sys-tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 255 Miniature indication of automatic ac-tivation.

When the parking aid plus connects auto-matically, a diagram of the vehicle and thesegments will appear on the left of the dis-play ››› Fig. 255.

It only operates every time the speed is re-duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the firsttime.

If it is switched off using the button, one ofthe following actions must be taken for it toreactivate automatically:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)approx.● OR: move the lever into position P and packagain.

● OR: switch the automatic activation on andoff in the Easy Connect system.

The automatic activation of the parking aidcan be switched on and off in the Easy Con-nect system ››› page 85:

● Switch the ignition on.● Select: infotainment button > SET-TINGS > Parking and manoeuvring.● Select Automatic activation. If the boxis checked , the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible soundwarning will only be given when obstacles infront are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-prox.

CAUTIONThe automatic connection of the ParkingAid only works when you are driving slowly.If driving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

278


Visual indication segments


The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

White segments: the obstacle is morethan approx. 30 cm away from the pathor in the direction opposite to travel.Yellow segments: the obstacles lie onthe vehicle’s path and are at a distanceof less than approx. 30 cm away.Red segments: obstacles are less thanapprox. 30 cm away.

The Media System Plus or Navi System willdisplay the expected path, depending onhow the steering wheel is turned.

If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,the corresponding audible warning willsound.

–

–

–

When the penultimate segment is displayed,the vehicle has reached the collision zone. Inthe collision zone, the obstacles are repre-sented in red, including those out of the path.Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introduction onpage 275, ››› in Introduction onpage 276 !

Setting the indications and audiosignals

The indications and audio signal settings arein Easy Connect* ››› page 85.

Automatic activation on – off.

Front volume*Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*Sound tone in the front area.

Rear volume*Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*Sound tone in the rear area.

Adjust volumeWhen the parking aid is switched on, the vol-ume of the audio source will be reduced, de-pending on the selected option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument panel in Parking assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles inarea A are displayed ››› Fig. 253. If a frontsensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area Bare displayed. Symbol is displayed.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

279

Driving

Trailer mode

Fig. 257 Parking assist display on the screenwith trailer attached.

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch,when the trailer is connected, the rear sen-sors will not activate when reverse gear is en-gaged or button is pressed. Therefore, anyobjects behind or to the side of the vehiclewill not be indicated on the screen and noaudio signals will sound.

The screen will only display objects detectedat the front, and the vehicle's trajectory willbe hidden.

Manoeuvre braking function*3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used tominimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the ParkingAid is active, the braking while manoeuvringfunction activates emergency braking when itdetects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path thatcould cause a collision, driving forwards or inreverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid isactivated automatically. For the system tooperate, manoeuvring speed must be be-tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking whilemanoeuvring function will be inactive in thesame direction of travel for 5 metres. Oncethe gear is changed, or the selector lever’sposition is changed, the function will be ac-tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The manoeuvre braking function is set in theEasy Connect system with button >SETTINGS > Parking and manoeuvring.

● on – permits the use of the braking whilemanoeuvring function.● off – does not permit the use of thebraking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergencybraking● When the function is deactivated with theManoeuvre braking button that appears on

the Parking assist screen of the Easy Con-nect system.● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible and visualassistant that warns of obstacles located be-hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible warnings and visuallyon the Easy Connect system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 334.

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

0.60 m1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 275,››› in Introduction on page 276!

Side area:Central area:

280


If the separation is maintained, the warningvolume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection● Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection● Place the selector level in position P, N or D(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintainthe system active for approximately 8 sec-onds before switching off. During that time,Parking assist will switch off if:

● The selector lever is moved to position P.● OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx.15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view● Select reverse gear.● OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist(Rear View Camera “RVC”) click on the caricon of the reduced display.

Switch to the reverse assist image (RearView Camera “RVC”)● Select reverse gear.● OR: press the RVC function button.

Setting the indications and audio signalsThe indications and audio signal settings arein Easy Connect* ››› page 85.

● Rear volume*: volume in the rear area.● Rear sound settings/treble*: soundtone in the rear area.● Lower volume: when the parking aid isswitched on, the volume of the audio sourcewill be reduced, depending on the selectedoption.

Error messagesIf a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument panel in Parking assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing deviceIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected, the parking aid will not be activa-ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Visual indication segments


The distance to the obstacles can be estima-ted with the help of the segments at the rearof the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows: »

281

Driving

White segments: the obstacle is morethan approx. 30 cm away from the pathor in the direction opposite to travel.They are also displayed when the elec-tronic parking brake is activated.Yellow segments: the obstacles lie onthe vehicle’s path and are at a distanceof less than approx. 30 cm away.Red segments: obstacles are less thanapprox. 30 cm away.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-cles are represented in red (including thoseout of the path). Do not continue to reverse››› in Introduction on page 275, ››› inIntroduction on page 276!

–

–

–

Reverse Assist (Rear ViewCamera)*

Operating and safety warnings


WARNING● The reverse assist does not make it possi-ble to precisely calculate the distance fromobstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-tem's own limits, hence its negligent usemay cause serious accidents and injuries ifused without due care. The driver should beaware of his/her surroundings at all timesto ensure safe driving.● The camera lens expands and distortsthe field of view and displays the objectson the screen in a way that is different fromreality. Distance perception is also distor-ted.● Due to the screen resolution or light con-ditions, some items may be blurry or notdisplayed at all. Take care with thin posts,fences, railings or trees that might not beseen on the screen and could damage thevehicle.

● The reverse assist has blind spots whereit cannot see people or objects. Monitor thevehicle's surrounding area at all times.● Keep the camera lens clean, free of iceand snow, and do not cover it.● The system is not a replacement for driv-er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding areaat all times.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● The images are only two-dimensional.Protruding objects or holes in the road, forexample, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.● Vehicle load modifies the representationof the guide lines ››› Fig. 261. The width rep-resented by the lines decreases with vehi-cle load. Pay special attention to the sur-roundings when the inside of the vehicle ofthe luggage compartment are loaded.● In the following situations, objects or oth-er vehicles appear to be further away orcloser than they actually are. Pay specialattention:– If moving from a flat surface to a slope

and vice-versa.– If the vehicle is heavily loaded.– When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface orthat protrude from it. These objectsmay be outside the camera angle whenreversing.

282


Note● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if the driver is not familiarwith the system.● Reverse assist will not be available if therear lid is open.

Usage instructions

Fig. 260 In the rear lid handle: location of thereverse assist camera.

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-sists the driver with reverse parking or ma-noeuvring ››› Fig. 260.

The camera image is viewed together withorientation lines projected on the Infotain-ment system screen. Part of the bumper canbe seen at the bottom, which can be used bythe driver as a reference point.

Rear assist settingsRear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place withoutswitching off the ignition or the infotainmentsystem.● Apply the parking brake.● Select reverse gear.● Press the function button displayed onthe screen.● Make the desired adjustments on the menuby pressing the –/+ function buttons or bymoving the scroll button.

Requirements for parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assistThe system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, or if the lens is dirty.● If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete.● If the vehicle is heavily loaded.● If the position of the camera has changedafter a rear-end collision. Have the systemchecked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the systemTo familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-ommends practising in a place without toomuch traffic or in a car park when there aregood weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lensKeep the camera lens clean and clear ofsnow and ice:

● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-based glass cleaning product and clean thelens with a dry cloth.● Remove snow using a small brush.● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION● Do not use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lens, as itcould be damaged.

283

Driving

Parking and manoeuvring with re-verse assist

Fig. 261 Display on the Easy Connect systemscreen: guide lines.

Meaning of the orientation lines ››› Fig. 261Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle(approximately in its total width) on theroad.End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behindthe vehicle on the road.Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind thevehicle on the road.Horizontal red line: a safe distance ofapprox. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicleon the road.

1

2

3

4

Switching the system on and off● Reverse assist is connected by a contactwhen engaging reverse gear.● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear and immediatelyafter removing the contact.● The camera will stop transmitting imagesabove the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys-tem ››› page 277, the camera image will nolonger be displayed when reverse gear is dis-engaged, and the system will display the op-tical information provided by the parking aidsystem.

It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im-age:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.● OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicleshown on the screen.

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Parking manoeuvre● Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-lect reverse gear.● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side lines lead towards the park-ing space.● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side lines run parallel to it.

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when re-verse gear is engaged.

284

Towing bracket device*


Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-tions about driving with a trailer and the useof a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily forcarrying people, although it can also be usedto tow a trailer if fitted with the correspondingtechnical equipment. This additional load hasan effect on the useful life, fuel consumptionand vehicle performance and in some casescan reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force fromthe vehicle, and thus more concentrationfrom the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on boththe vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit-ted on the coupling deviceThe maximum technically permitted verticalload of the trailer’s drawbar on the hitch ofthe towing device is 55 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop systemIf the vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the

Start-Stop system operates as normal. Nospecial characteristics need to be taken intoaccount.

If the system does not recognise the trailer orthe trailer bracket has not been retrofitted bySEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-nected by pressing the corresponding buttonin the lower part of the centre console beforedriving with the trailer, and it should remainoff for the rest of the journey ››› .

Vehicles with driving profile selectionIf you are going to be towing a trailer, the useof the Eco driving profile is not recommen-ded. You are advised to select another of theavailable driving profiles before beginning todrive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar loadNever exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maximumpermitted trailer weight, you can then climbcorrespondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-gine performance and the ability to climbslopes, the tow load decreases proportional-ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-bination must be reduced by 10% for every1000 m of altitude. When possible, operatethe trailer with the maximum authorised

drawbar load on the ball joint of the towingbracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-it.

WARNINGNever use the trailer to transport people,since it would put their life in danger and isalso prohibited.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket maycause injury and accidents.● Only use the towing bracket if it is in aperfect state of repair and is properly se-cured.● Never modify or repair the towing bracketin any way.● In order to reduce the danger of injury inthe event of rear-end collisions and toavoid injury to pedestrians and cyclistswhen parking the vehicle, cover or removethe tow hook when you are not using a trail-er.● Never fit a towing bracket “with weightdistribution” or “load compensation”. Thevehicle has not been designed for this typeof towing bracket. The towing bracketcould fail and the trailer could be releasedfrom the vehicle. »

285

Driving

WARNINGDriving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects can affect drivingproperties and even cause an accident.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity aremore likely to overturn than those with alow one.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Take great care when overtaking.● Reduce speed immediately if you noticethat the trailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never drive at more than 80 km/h(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at morethan 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-cumstances). This also applies in countrieswhere driving at higher speeds is permit-ted. Take into account the speed limit forvehicles with trailers in the correspondingcountry, as it could be less than the speedlimit for vehicles without a trailer.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket has been retrofittedby a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop

system must be disconnected manuallywhenever driving with a trailer. Otherwisethe brake system could be damaged andcould consequently cause a serious acci-dent or injury.● Always disconnect the Start-Stop systemmanually when using a towing bracket thathas not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm››› page 95. Otherwise, the tilt sensor couldcause the alarm to go off.● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine'sfirst 1000 km ››› page 235.● SEAT recommends that, if possible, thetow hook be removed or covered when it isnot going to be used. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehiclecould be greater if the tow hook is fitted.● Some retrofitted towing brackets coverthe rear towing eye. In these cases, thetowing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. Forthis reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-ted with a towing bracket, always keep thetow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-fitted with a towingbracket meet all the technical and legal re-quirements for driving with a trailer››› page 292.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towingbracket, only a bracket that is authorised forthe maximum authorised load of the trailerthat is to be towed may be fitted. The towingbracket must be suitable for the vehicle andthe trailer and must be properly secured tothe vehicle's chassis. Only use a towingbracket that has been authorised by SEAT forthis vehicle. Always check and take into ac-count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-structions. Never fit a towing bracket “withweight distribution” or “load compensation”.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumperNever fit a towing bracket to the bumper or tothe area where the bumper is mounted. Thetowing bracket should not impair the bum-per's function. Do not make modifications orrepairs to the exhaust system or the brakesystem. Make regular checks to ensure thatthe towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling systemDriving with a trailer increases the load on theengine and cooling system. The cooling sys-tem should have sufficient coolant and be

286


prepared for the additional effort involved indriving with a trailer.

Trailer brakesIf the trailer has its own brake system, pleasetake the relevant legal requirements into ac-count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cableAlways use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 287.

Trailer tail lightsThe trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 287.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle's electric system. If you are notsure that the trailer's electrical connection iscorrect, have it checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Exterior mirrorsIf you cannot see the area behind the trailerwith the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,additional mirrors will have to be installed inaccordance with the regulations of the coun-try in question. The exterior mirrors should beadjusted before you start driving and mustprovide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumptionNever exceed the values indicated!

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or isnot the right one, the trailer could becomedetached from the vehicle and cause seri-ous injury.

CAUTION● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.● If the trailer absorbs excessive electriccurrent, the vehicle's electronic systemmay be damaged.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces. Only use the connections intended forproviding electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 262 Schematic representation: assign-ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock-et.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10 »287

Driving

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailerThe vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the connection between the trailerand the vehicle. With the engine running,electrical devices on the trailer receive powerfrom the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected, the consumers on the trailer willreceive electricity through this connection(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.This powers, for example, the trailer's interiorlighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge ina caravan only receive electrical power if theengine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,you cannot connect the ground wires of pin3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Tow cableThe tow rope must always be securely fixedto the towing vehicle and loose enough so

that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.However, make sure that the cable does notrub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lightsAlways check the trailer's rear lights to ensurethey are working correctly and that theycomply with the relevant safety regulations.Make sure that the maximum permissiblepower that can be absorbed by the trailer isnot exceeded ››› page 287.

Include in the anti-theft alarmThe trailer is included in the anti-theft systemif the following conditions are met:

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with ananti-theft alarm and towing bracket.● If the trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer power sock-et.● If the electrical systems of the vehicle andtrailer are in perfect condition and have nofaults or damage.● If the vehicle is locked with the key and theanti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered if the electrical connection with thetrailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, alwaysturn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tiltsensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lightsFor technical reasons, trailers fitted with LEDrear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot go off when the electrical connectionwith the trailer is cut if it has rear lights withlight-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected whenhitching the trailer, this will automaticallyswitch to the Normal profile. If the systemcannot detect the attached trailer or if thetowing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-to repair shop other than SEAT, you mustmanually select the Normal profile beforeyou start driving with a trailer attached. To re-connect the Eco profile once the trailer hasbeen unhitched, switch the ignition off andback on once.

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, it may lead to an excessiveamount of current supplied to the trailer,which can cause abnormalities in the entirevehicle electronic system, as well as acci-dents and serious injuries.

288


● Ensure that any repairs that need to becarried out on the electrical system arecarried out by a specialised workshop.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces.

WARNINGContact between the pins of the trailerpower socket can cause short circuits,overloading of the electrical system or fail-ure of the lighting system, and consequent-ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-er socket to each other.● Make sure any work on bent pins is car-ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONDo not leave the trailer connected to thevehicle when parked; place it on its supportwheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises orfalls due, for example, to a variation of theload or a burst tyre, increased pressure willbe placed on the towing bracket and thetrailer, and both the vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

Note● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in

the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-spected by a specialised workshop.● If the trailer accessories consume energythrough the power socket to the trailer andthe engine is turned off, the battery will dis-charge.● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer will beautomatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the couplingdeviceThe technically permissible maximum trailerweight is the weight that the vehicle can tow››› . The vertical load on the coupling is ex-erted vertically from above on the hook of thetowing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice contained in the type plate of the towingbracket are experimental values only. Thecorrect figures for your specific model, whichmay be lower than these figures, are given inthe vehicle documentation. The information inthe vehicle documentation takes precedenceat all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-mends making the most of the maximum ver-

tical load technically permissible on thecoupling device ››› page 285. An insufficientvertical load has a negative influence on thebehaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towingvehicle and trailerThe gross combination weight is the actualweight of the loaded vehicle plus the actualweight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified intodistinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-taining information from a specialised work-shop regarding which type of trailer is mostsuitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loadingThe weight of the towing vehicle and trailermust be balanced. In order to do this, theload must be as close as possible to the max-imum vertical load technically permissible onthe coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-tributed between the back and front of thetrailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.● Secure the trailer load properly. »

289

Driving

Tyre pressureSet the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of thetowing vehicle with the maximum allowablepressure ››› page 322.

WARNINGIf the maximum permissible axle weight, themaximum load technically permissible onthe coupling point, the maximum author-ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailerare exceeded, accidents and serious inju-ries may occur.● Never exceed the values indicated!● The actual weight on the front and rearaxles must never exceed the maximum per-missible axle weight. The weight on thefront and rear axles must never exceed themaximum permissible weight.

WARNINGA shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-ity and security of the towing vehicle andtrailer, which could lead to accidents andserious injuries.

● Always load the trailer correctly.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlightsThe front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using theheadlight range adjuster ››› page 1151).

Specific features of driving with a trailer● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brakegently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-vent the jerking that can be caused by thelocking of trailer wheels.● Due to the gross combination weight of thetowing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-tance increases.● When going down a slope, go into a lowergear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-vantage of the braking power provided by the

engine. Otherwise, the braking system couldoverheat and even fail.● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-bination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, change the centre of gravity and theproperties of the vehicle.● If the towing vehicle is empty and the traileris loaded, then the load distribution is incor-rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly andwith extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailerDepending on the slope of the hill and thecombination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-wards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.● If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, push the clutch pedal all the waydown.● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-lector lever to position D/S ››› page 225.● Apply the handbrake.● Release the brake pedal.

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LEDxenon headlights.

290


● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case ofa manual gearbox, slowly release the clutchpedal.● Do not release the hand brake until the en-gine has sufficient power to start driving

WARNINGIf a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this maylead to loss of control of the vehicle andserious injury.● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects will change the ve-hicle handling and braking distances.● Always drive cautiously and carefully.Brake earlier than usual.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions. Slow down, especiallywhen driving down hills or slopes.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-vres.● Take great care when overtaking. Reducespeed immediately if you notice that thetrailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.● Take into account the speed limit for vehi-cles with a trailer, as it could be lower thanfor vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicleand trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailercombination is an additional function of theelectronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is weav-ing, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of thetrailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-tion requirements● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with acompatible towing bracket.● The ESC and ASR are active. The controllamp or is not lit up on the instrumentcluster.● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-cle through the trailer power socket.● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph).● The maximum vertical load technically per-missible is not being exceeded on the cou-pling device.● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equippedwith a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNINGThe enhanced safety provided by the elec-tric stability control of the vehicle and trail-er should not lead you to take any risks thatcould compromise your safety.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-erating.

WARNINGThe electric stability control for the vehicleand trailer may not correctly detect alldriving conditions.● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-so switched off.● The stability system does not always de-tect light trailers, so it may not stabilisethese correctly.● When driving on surfaces with poor grip,the trailer can even interfere with the sta-bility system.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over without having previously weaved.● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.installation of a bicycle rack with lights), »

291

Driving

repeated automatic braking may occur inextreme driving conditions.


Description

Fig. 263 The towing device supports trailers /tow hook / key

Depending on the country or version, the re-movable hook of the towing device is under

the cover of the load area of the luggagecompartment.

The tow hook is fitted and removed by handand is supplied with a key.

13-pin connectorSafety lugHook housingHook housing capProtective cap of the ball headRemovable tow hookLocking leverLock coverRelease boltLockLocking ballsKey

Operation and conservationPut the cover on the housing cavity so thatdirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check theball head and apply suitable grease if neces-sary.

Use the protective cap to store the tow hook.

Clean the housing cavity surfaces and treatthem with an appropriate conservation prod-uct.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

WARNING● Before each journey with the tow hook fit-ted, make sure that it is correctly adjustedand attached in its housing.● If the tow hook is not properly fitted andattached, do not use it.● Do not use the towing bracket device fortowing if it is damaged or has missing parts.● Do not modify or adapt the towing deviceconnection.● Never unhook the tow hook while thetrailer is hitched.

CAUTION● Handle the tow hook with care in order toavoid damaging the bumper paintwork.● The top part of the hook housing isgreased ››› Fig. 263 3 . When using the de-vice, make sure that it has not been re-moved.

Note● Contact a specialised workshop if youlose your key.● Towing the vehicle with the tow hook››› page 48.

292


Placing in the standby position

Fig. 264 Tow hook reserve position

Fig. 265 Reserve position: position verification

Before assembling it, place the tow hook inthe standby position with the following twosteps.

● Insert and turn the key in the direction of thearrow ››› Fig. 264 1 until the hole in the keyfaces upwards (arrow).● Grab the tow hook under the protectivecover.● Press the release bolt ››› Fig. 264 B in thedirection of arrow 2 , while pressing lever Cin the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go.● The lever will remain blocked in this posi-tion.

Verification of the reserve position● Key ››› Fig. 265 A is in the released posi-tion (the key hole is facing upwards).● The release bolt ››› Fig. 265 B can bemoved.

● Lever ››› Fig. 265 C is in the lower position.

When adjusted in this way, the tow hook isready to be installed.

CAUTIONThe key cannot be removed or turned in thestandby position.

293

Driving

Fitting the tow hook

Fig. 266 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 1.

Fig. 267 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 2.

Step 1.● Remove the hook housing cap ››› Fig. 2634 downwards.● Put the tow hook in its standby position››› page 293.● Hold the tow hook from below and fit it intothe hook hosing in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 266 1 until it is heard to fit into place››› .

Lever ››› Fig. 266 A automatically turns inthe direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the re-lease bolt B moves outwards (its red andgreen parts are visible) ››› .

If lever A does not turn or the release bolt Bdoes not come out, the tow hook should beremoved by turning the lever as far as possi-ble downwards from the housing cavity, andthe tow hook’s support surfaces and the cavi-ty should then be cleaned.

Step 2.● Turn the key to the right just half a turn, untilthe hole in the key faces downwards››› Fig. 267 1 .● Remove the key 2 .● Place the cover B on the lock 3››› Fig. 267 ››› .● Check that the tow hook is correctly fixed inplace ››› page 295, Safety check.

WARNING● Keep your hands away from the leverwhen fitting the tow hook to avoid trappingyour fingers ››› Fig. 266 A .● Do not try to force the lever up to turn thekey. The detachable ball would not be se-cured properly!

294


CAUTION● After removing the key, place the coverover the lever's lock. If the lock becomessoiled it will be impossible to insert the key.● Keep the device's housing cavity clean.Dirtiness can prevent the tow hook frombeing safety secured!● If the device is removed, always placethe cap in the hook's housing.

Safety check

Fig. 268 Tow hook fixed correctly

Make sure that the tow hook is correctly at-tached before each use.

Tow hook fixed correctly:● The tow hook will not fall out of the housingcavity after a strong “impact”.● Lever A is facing upwards ››› Fig. 268.

● The red and green part of the unlockingbolt B is completely visible ››› Fig. 268.● The key has been removed.● Cover C is over the lock ››› Fig. 268.

WARNING● Keep your hands away from the leverwhen releasing the tow hook to avoid trap-ping your fingers ››› Fig. 268 A .● The towing device should only be used ifthe tow hook has been properly locked inplace!

Removing the tow hook

Fig. 269 Removing the tow hook »

295

Driving

Fig. 270 Removing the tow hook

● Remove cover A from lock 1 ››› Fig. 269.● Insert key B in the lock 2 ››› Fig. 269.● Turn the key to the left 3 just half turn, untilthe hole in the key is facing upwards››› Fig. 269.● Hold the tow hook from below.● Press the release bolt A in the direction ofarrow 1 , and at the same time press lever Bas far as it will go in the direction of arrow 2››› Fig. 270.

Now the tow hook has been released andfalls freely. If this does not occur, press withthe other hand from above.

The tow hook is now in the standby positionand is therefore ready to be reinserted intothe hook housing ››› .

● Fit cover 4 ››› Fig. 263 onto its housing.

WARNING● Never remove the tow hook while thetrailer is hitched.● Never leave the tow hook loose in the lug-gage compartment. It could cause damagein the even of sharp braking, and even jeop-ardise passenger safety!

CAUTION● If the lever is not pressed down as far as itwill go, after removing the tow hook it willcontinue upwards and will not lock into itsstandby position. The tow hook must re-main in this position before being fittedagain.● Store the device in the reserve positionwith the key inserted and with the sameside facing upwards. Risk of damaging thekey!● When operating the lever, do not applytoo much pressure (for example, do notstand on it)!

Note● Before extracting the tow hook, we rec-ommend fitting the protective cover overthe ball head.● Remove dirt from the tow hook beforestoring it with the vehicle tools.

Connecting the trailer

Fig. 271 Turning the 13-pin connector

● Grip the connector in area A and remove itin the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 271.● Remove the protective cap from the ballhead ››› Fig. 263 5 .● Attach the trailer to the ball head.● Open the cover of connector A and con-nect the trailer ››› Fig. 271.● Hook the trailer retention cable into thesafety eyelet ››› Fig. 271 B . When hooked,the retaining cable must curve in all trailerpositions in front of the vehicle (sharp curves,reverse, etc.).

Follow these steps in reverse to unhitch thetrailer.

WARNING● Never use the safety lug to tow!

296


● After hooking up the trailer and connect-ing the socket, check that all the trailer'srear lights are working properly.

Note● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting,check the fuses on the instrument panel››› page 52.● The contact between the retainer cableand the safety lug may give cause wear inthe lug. This wear does not stop it from op-erating properly and is not a fault. It is ex-cluded from the warranty.● When hitching and unhitching the trailer,the vehicle's handbrake should be applied.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 272 Limits and attachment points for ret-rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets beretrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-

ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distancespecifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ballhead and the road ››› Fig. 272 C must neverbe less than that indicated. This also applieswhen the vehicle is fully loaded, including thetechnically permissible maximum verticalload on the coupling device.

Distance specifications ››› Fig. 272:Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-cle)65 mm (minimum)350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)1,033 mm322 mm338 mm

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, this may lead to malfunctionsin the entire vehicle electronic system, aswell as to accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem to the electrical connections of the tail »

A

B

C

D

E

F

297

Driving

lights or any other unsuitable power sour-ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-nect the trailer.● The towing bracket should be retrofittedonly at a specialised workshop.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-suitable, the trailer may separate from thevehicle while driving. This could cause seri-ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note● Only use towing brackets that have beenapproved by SEAT for the model in ques-tion.● In some versions, the fitting of a conven-tional towing hook solution is not recom-mended. Please consult your TechnicalService.

298

Checking and refilling levels

Practical tips

Checking and refilling lev-els

Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 273 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of thevehicle.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 273.● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon asthe pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuelsupply. Do not try to put in more fuel after thenozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansionchamber in the fuel tank.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.● Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 301.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 346.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-bridsEvery 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-rol until the control lamp switches off, andthen the tank must be refilled. This is neces-sary to ensure that the system works proper-ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-ing with petrol.

WARNINGFuel is highly flammable and can cause se-rious burns and other injuries.● When refuelling, turn off the engine andturn off the ignition for safety reasons.

● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank ora canister. Naked flames are forbidden inthe vicinity due to the risk of explosion.● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-ter in the vehicle.● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-cle. In an accident the canister could bedamaged and could leak.● If, in exceptional circumstances, youhave to carry a spare fuel canister, pleaseobserve the following points:– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.This could cause an explosion. Alwaysplace the canister on the ground to fillit.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-ble into the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made ofmetal, the filling nozzle must be in con-tact with the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour isexplosive. Risk of fatal accident! »

299

Practical tips

CAUTION● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It couldotherwise damage the paintwork.● Never run the tank completely dry. Thecatalytic converter can be damaged.● When filling the fuel tank after having runit completely dry on a vehicle with a dieselengine, the ignition must be switched on forat least 30 seconds before starting the en-gine. When you then start the engine it maytake longer than normal (up to one minute)to start firing.

For the sake of the environmentDo not overfill the fuel tank, it may causethe fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

NoteThere is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-essary, request assistance from special-ised personnel.

NoteDiesel vehicles are fitted with a protectivedevice that prevents the insertion of thewrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re-fuel with Diesel nozzles.

● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Be-fore trying to insert the pump nozzle byturning it, try a different pump or requestspecialist help.● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-ister, the protective device will not open.One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel invery slowly.

Refuelling natural gas

Fig. 274 Tank cap open: gas filler mouth 1 ,filler mouth retainer 2 .

Before refuelling, the engine and the ignition,mobile telephone and heating must beswitched off separately ››› .

Read the instructions on how to use the natu-ral gas pump carefully.

RefuellingThe natural gas filler mouth is behind the fueltank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth››› Fig. 274.

● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth1 .● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gasfiller mouth.● The fuel tank will be full when the pumpcompressor automatically cuts the supply.● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

If the ambient temperature is very high, thenatural gas pump’s overheating protectiondisconnects it automatically.

Closing the fuel tank cap● Check that the mouth retainer 2 of the gasfiller is not trapped with the filler. If this hap-pens, replace it in the filler mouth.● Insert the plug in the filler mouth.● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear itclick into place.

1) Depending on country300


WARNINGNatural gas is a highly explosive, easilyflammable substance. Incorrect handlingof the natural gas can cause accidents se-rious burns and other injuries.● Before refuelling with natural gas, en-gage the filling mouth correctly. If you cansmell gas, stop refuelling immediately.● Read and take note ››› in Natural gason page 304.

WARNINGThe vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),so LNG or LPG should not be used underany circumstances. Liquid gas can causean explosion of the natural gas tanks andcause severe injuries! .

WARNINGIf the vehicle underbody touches theground or in the event of a rear collision,there could be damage to the natural gastanks. If damaged, natural gas tanks arefull of fuel and can explode, causing seri-ous or fatal injuries.● Even if you don't notice the smell of gas,take the vehicle to a specialised workshopimmediately and have the natural gas sys-tem checked. Do not refuel natural gas

again until the natural gas system has beeninspected.

Note● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumpscan differ in the way they are operated. Aska qualified employee at the petrol stationto do the refuelling if you do not know how.● Noises heard when refuelling are normaland do not indicate damage in the system.● The vehicle natural gas system is pre-pared both for refuelling with a small com-pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-sor (fast refuel) at natural gas service sta-tions.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 275 Identification of fuels according toEuropean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols onthe pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. Theidentification serves to prevent confusionwhen choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-nol). The number indicates the percent-age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-diesel). The number indicates the per-centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”means, for example, a proportion of bio-diesel of max. 7%. »

1

2

1) Depending on country301

Practical tips

Natural gas: “CNG” means CompressedNatural Gas.

Type of petrol3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleadedpetrol. The petrol must comply with thestandard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuelswith a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled(E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiatedby using the octane numbers (RON) or viathe anti-knock index (AKI).

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol ornormal 91 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight powerloss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes atleastYou should use super 95 octane petrol (91AKI) at least.

3 If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol orsuper 95 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super plus 98octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.E30 - E100 button must not be used. Thefuel system would be damaged. Exception:vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 303,Ethanol fuel.● A single refuelling with leaded fuel orother metal additives entails a permanentdeterioration of the effectiveness of thecatalytic converter.

● Only use fuel additives that have beenapproved by SEAT. The products that con-tain substances to increase the octane rat-ing or decrease knocking may contain met-al additives that damage the engine andcatalytic converter. This type of productsmust not be used.● Do not use fuels shown in the pump ascontaining metals. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Risk of engine damage!● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol withan octane rating lower than the correctgrade for the engine.

Note● Fuel with an octane rating higher than theone required by the engine can be used.● In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-phur content fuel.

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

302


Ethanol fuel3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with withthe marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run withunleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any highpercentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that ››› page 302, Type of pet-rol

NoteSEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de-crease impurities that using E100 ethanolfuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according tostandard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-tures, thus affecting the start or operation ofthe engine. Ask your service station attendantif their diesel is suitable for winter use.

Water in the fuel filter2)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and isequipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-arator, the instrument panel may display thefollowing warning: Water in the fuelfilter. If this is the case, take the vehicle toa specialised workshop so that they candrain the fuel filter.

CAUTION● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,heating oil, other fuels or thinning agentsas they can cause severely damage thefuel system and the engine.● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do notstart the engine under any circumstances.Risk of damaging the fuel system and theengine! Obtain technical assistance.

Natural gas3 Valid for: vehicles with natural gas engines

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquidform, addition to others.

Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)Vehicles with a natural gas engine must onlybe working with CNG (Compressed NaturalGas CNG), or with a mixture of biomethane ifit complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.

Fuels such as liquefied natural gas (LNG), liq-uefied petroleum gas (LPG) or hithane (mix-ture of hydrogen and methane) should not beused to fill the tank.

Natural gas quality and consumptionNatural gas is divided into the groups H and Ldepending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power andinferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide contentthan type L. The higher the heating power ofthe natural gas, the lower the consumptionwill be.

The engine management automaticallyadapts to the natural gas used according toits quality. Therefore, different quality gasescan be mixed in the tank, without the need for »

1) This motor is only available in some markets.2) Depending upon country.

303

Practical tips

comprehensive draining before applying adifferent quality gas.

Updated information relating to natural gasquality is displayed on the instrument panel››› page 72.

Regular checks of the natural gas systemThe natural gas tanks may be damaged orcorroded by external factors. The walls of thegas tanks are weakened by deformations,damage or corrosion. The vehicle owner musthave a specialised workshop check (visualcheck) the gas system at least once every4 years. Natural gas tanks must be replacedat a specialised workshop.

WARNINGFailure to act when you can smell gas in thevehicle or when refuelling can cause seri-ous injuries.● Stop the vehicle immediately.● Switch the ignition off.● Open the doors to appropriately venti-late the vehicle.● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.● Move away from the vehicle or switch offobjects that may cause sparks or a fire.● If you continue to smell gas, do not con-tinue driving!● Seek specialist assistance. Have the faultrepaired.

● If necessary, warn the emergency serv-ices.

WARNINGDamaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-sult in serious injury or even death.● Have the natural gas deposits checked atleast every 4 years (visual check).● Natural gas tanks have a limited servicelife. Have the natural gas tanks replacedwhen required. You can obtain further infor-mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci-alised workshops.

AdBlue®

Information about AdBlue®


The consumption of AdBlue® depends onyour personal driving style, the temperatureof the system and on the outdoor tempera-ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13°F). The system has heating elements thatguarantee its operation even at low tempera-tures.

The capacity of the AdBlue® tank is approx.10.4 litres.

When the range is less than 2400 km theinstrument panel screen displays a messagerequesting an AdBlue® refill.

If this message is ignored, the yellow warninglamp will come on when the remainingrange is less than 1000 km. The indicationthat in XXX km it will no longer be possible torestart the engine will appear on the instru-ment panel display.

If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, whenremaining range of 0 km is displayed, it willno longer be possible to restart the engine.The red warning lamp will light up.

AdBlue® is a registered brand of the GermanAssociation of the Automotive Industry (VDA)and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (DieselExhaust Fluid).

CAUTIONFilling the AdBlue® tank excessively cancause damage to the tank.

304


Control and warning lamps

It lights up red

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue levelis too low.Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area thentop up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue››› page 305.

and They light up red

The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in theAdBlue system.Contact a specialised workshop. Have the systemchecked there.

It lights up yellow

The AdBlue reserve is low.Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) thatare indicated ››› page 305. SEAT recommends con-tacting a specialised workshop.

and They light up yellow

There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitableAdBlue fluid has been used.Contact a specialised workshop. Have the systemchecked there.

Several warning and control lamps shouldlight up for a few seconds when the ignition isswitched on, signalling that the function is be-ing verified. They will switch off after a fewseconds.


Fill AdBlue®

Fig. 277 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refillingPark the vehicle on a flat surface and turn offthe ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on acurb, the level indicator may not detect therefill properly.

If a warning message about AdBlue® levelsappears on the dash panel display, fill atleast the minimum amount required (ap-prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amountwill the system detect that AdBlue® has beenadded and you will be able to start the en-gine again. The maximum amount that canbe refilled is 11 litres.

Fill with a refill bottleOnly use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.

● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 277.● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-ti-clockwise direction.● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-tions, indicated on the refill bottle.● Check the expiry date.● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fillerneck vertically and screw the bottle on byhand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.● Press the refill bottle in the direction of thefiller neck and hold it in this position.● Wait until the contents of the refill bottlehave been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Donot compress or break the bottle!● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-rection and gently pull it upwards ››› .● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquidcomes out of the bottle.● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-tion until it is tightly closed.● Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-nition. »

305

Practical tips

● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-onds for the system to detect the fluid load.● Make sure you wait for at least 30 secondsbefore starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlueValid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-duction.

● Open the tank cap.● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise››› Fig. 277.● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for thefirst time.● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

WARNINGAdBlue® should only be stored in the origi-nal container, which should be tightlyclosed and kept in a safe place.

CAUTION● When refilling, the nozzle grip should bealigned downward. Otherwise the nozzlewill not connect automatically.● Do not try to add any more additive afterthe nozzle has stopped for the first time.The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBluecould spill out.

● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad-ditives. Any type of damage caused bysuch a mixture will not be covered by thewarranty.● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank.This could result in engine damage.● Do not carry the refill bottle inside thevehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-ture changes or damage to the bottle), theAdBlue® may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of the refill bottle in an environ-ment-friendly manner.

NoteYou can buy refill bottles that are adequatefor AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships .

Engine management andemissions control system

Introduction

WARNING● Due to the high temperatures reached bythe exhaust gas scrubbing system, you

should not park your vehicle near a surfacethat can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalyticconverter.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 307.

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by aspecialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (ElectronicPower Control) lights up and should go off once theengine has started.

306


It lights up

Diesel engine preheating system.The engine can be started straight away when thelamp switches off.

Flashes

Fault in the diesel engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by aspecialised workshop.

NoteWhile the control lamps , , or areon, there might be faults in the engine, fuelconsumption may go up and the enginemight lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines.● Never run the fuel tank dry.● When changing or adding engine oil, do notexceed the necessary amount ››› page 313,Topping up the engine oil.● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 47.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven runningor loss of power when the car is moving, havethe vehicle inspected by a specialised work-shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp will light up when any of these symptomsoccur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel canenter the exhaust system and escape into theatmosphere. The catalytic converter can alsobe damaged by overheating.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause an irregular fuel supply can causeignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel toenter the exhaust system, which couldcause overheating and damage the cata-lytic converter.

For the sake of the environmentEven when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the gases on occasions. Thisdepends on the sulphur content of the fuelused. This can quite often be avoided bychanging to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu-late filters

The particulate filter eliminates most of thesoot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-

mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. Ifthe filter does not clean itself (e.g. if shortjourneys are made continuously), it becomesblocked with soot and the following indica-tion is displayed to the driver: Particu-late filter: cleaned while the vehi-cle is moving. See Manual. The partic-ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).

Regeneration of the petrol and diesel par-ticulate filterRequirements for the regeneration journey:the engine is at operating temperature.

● Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h(31-75 mph). This increases the temperatureand burns the soot in the filter ››› .● Consider the legal speed limits as well asthe recommended gears.● End the regeneration journey once the con-trol warning lamp has gone out.

If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutesof running in regeneration mode, have a spe-cialised workshop repair the fault

WARNINGAlways adjust your speed to suit the weath-er conditions, roads, braking distance andtraffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-eration phase. Route recommendationsshould never make you disregard eachcountry's specific traffic regulations. »

307

Practical tips

CAUTION● When the exhaust system detects thatthe particulate filter is close to saturation,the self-cleaning function of this systemrecommends optimal driving for this func-tion.● Due to the high temperatures caused bythe regeneration of the particulate filter, itis possible that the radiator fan will acti-vate after stopping the engine, even it itsoperating temperature has not beenreached.● Noise, smells and high idle speeds canoccur during regeneration.● Always use the correct engine oil and thecorrect fuel to make sure the useful life ofthe particulate filter is not affected. Alsoavoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compart-ment


Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed belowand follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-tentially hazardous area ››› .

WARNINGWhen work is done in the engine compart-ment, injuries, burns, accidents and evenfires can occur.● Switch the engine off, remove the keyfrom the ignition and apply the electronicparking brake. If the vehicle has a manualgearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it hasan automatic gearbox, place the selectorlever in position P. Wait for the engine tocool down.● Never open the bonnet if you see steamor drips of coolant being released from theengine compartment. Wait until no steamor coolant can be seen before opening thebonnet.● Keep children away from the enginecompartment.● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-ant).

● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-trical system, particularly at the pointswhere the jump leads are attached››› page 47. The battery could explode.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolantexpansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.● Protect face, hands and arms by cover-ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.● Always make sure you have not left anyobjects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, inthe engine compartment.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient forsecuring the vehicle and there is a risk ofinjury.● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine running,there is an additional, potentially fatal,safety risk from the rotating parts, such asthe drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,

308


and from the high-voltage ignition system.You should also observe the following:– Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro-tating engine parts. Danger of death.Before starting any work remove jewel-lery, tie back and cover hair, and weartight-fitting clothes.

– Never accelerate with a gear engagedwithout taking the necessary precau-tions. The vehicle could move, even ifthe handbrake is applied. Danger ofdeath.

● Observe the following additional warn-ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-trical system is necessary:– Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.– Do not smoke.– Never work near naked flames.– Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment● Inspect the ground underneath your vehi-cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oilor other fluids in the area where it wasparked, have your vehicle inspected at theworkshop.

● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-vironment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids, have your vehicle inspected in aspecialised workshop.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 279 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 280 Lever under the bonnet.

Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen.

● Open the door and pull the lever under thedashboard ››› Fig. 279 1 .● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left onthe lever located under the bonnet, in thecentre ››› Fig. 280 2 . The arrester hooks arereleased.● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet. »

309

Practical tips

● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

WARNINGMake sure that the bonnet is properlyclosed. If it opens when driving, it cancause an accident.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewindscreen wiper arms, only open it when

the windscreen wipers are in place againstthe windscreen.

Checking levels

Fig. 281 Diagram for the location of the various el-ements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank ››› page 314Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 312Engine oil filler cap ››› page 313Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 316

1

2

3

4

Battery ››› page 317Windscreen washer reservoir››› page 316

5

6

310


NoteThe layout of parts may vary depending onthe engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up orchanging oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be doneby a technical service or specialised work-shop.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correct en-gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canchange the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 Lof the next oil until the next oil change:

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 orAPI SN.

–

Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00could increase consumption and the vehicle’sCO2 emissions.

Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil toguarantee high SEAT engine performance.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 312 andyou cannot obtain the oil specified for yourvehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil(once) conforming to the specificationsVW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)››› page 311.

– Engine oil additivesNo type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type Type ofService

Specifica-tion

With particulatefilter (DPF)a)

Set Serviceand FlexibleService Inter-vals

VW 507 00

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you maydamage the engine.

311

Practical tips

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine oil pressure too low.Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom-panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add moreoil ››› page 313.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil levelis correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine atidle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity todo so ››› page 313.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-til then it is advisable to check the oil level every timeyou refuel.


Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 282 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until theoperating temperature is reached and thenstop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check the oillevel ››› Fig. 282. Top up with engine oil ifnecessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones Aand C . It can never go above zone A .

● Zone A : do not add oil.● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 308.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area A , do not startthe engine. This could result in damage tothe engine and catalytic converter. Con-tact a Technical Service.

312


Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 283 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Working in the enginecompartment on page 308.

Topping up engine oil● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening››› Fig. 283.● Carefully add oil in small quantities (nomore than 0.5 l).● To avoid adding too much oil, whenever youadd a certain amount, wait about 2 minutesand recheck the oil level ››› page 312.● If necessary, add some more oil.● When the oil level reaches at least zone››› Fig. 282 B , unscrew the engine oil fillercap carefully ››› .

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartment il-lustration ››› page 310.

Engine oil specification ››› page 311.

WARNINGOil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 282 A ,do not start the engine. This could result indamage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe oil level must never be above zone››› Fig. 282 A . Otherwise oil can be drawnin through the crankcase breather and leakinto the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-tem.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGOnly change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 308.● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,such as acid burns, caused by splashes ofoil.● When removing the oil drain plug withyour fingers, keep your arm horizontal tohelp prevent oil from running down yourarm.● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach ofchildren.

CAUTIONNo additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Anydamage caused by the use of such addi-tives would not be covered by the factorywarranty. »

313

Practical tips

For the sake of the environment● We recommend that you change the en-gine oil and the filter at a technical servicecentre.● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.● Use a suitable container when drainingthe used oil. It must be large enough to holdall the engine oil.

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additiveG12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixturegives the necessary frost protection down to-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloyparts of the engine cooling system againstcorrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may be

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theadditive G12evo for optimal protectionagainst corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-tection again corrosion and should be avoi-ded.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail lead-ing to serious damage.● Ensure that the percentage of additive iscorrect for the lowest expected ambienttemperature in the zone in which the vehi-cle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT.● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G12evo additive has been

mixed with an inadequate coolant. Thecoolant must be changed as soon as possi-ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

314


Refilling coolant

Fig. 284 In the engine compartment: markingon coolant expansion tank.

Fig. 285 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 310.

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks››› Fig. 284. When the engine is hot, it maybe slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant– Wait for the engine to cool down.

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professionalassistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expansiontank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-cialised workshop to have the cooling systemexamined.

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!● Store the antifreeze in its original con-tainer and keep it out of reach of children.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

CAUTIONIf you run out of coolant in the expansiontank, park the car in a safe place and donot continue driving. Obtain technical as-sistance.

315

Practical tips

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 286 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 310.

Checking the brake fluid levelThe brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warninglight on the instrument panel display monitorsthe brake fluid level ››› page 82.

Changing brake fluidWe recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGIf the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-tem may fail or braking power may be re-duced.● Check the brake system and the brakefluid level regularly!● When the brake fluid is used and brakesare subjected to extreme braking forces,bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-tem. These bubbles can significantly re-duce braking power, notably increasingbraking distance, and could result in the to-tal failure of the brake system.● Be sure to always use the correct brakefluid. Only use brake fluid that expresslymeets the VW 501 14 standard.● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brakefluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT OfficialService. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925CLASS 4 standards, or USA StandardsFMVSS 116 DOT 4.● The replacement brake fluid must benew.● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTIONBrake fluid should not come into contactwith the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environmentBrake fluid is an environmental pollutant.Collect any spilt service fluids and allow aprofessional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the windowwasher tank and refilling it

Fig. 287 In the engine compartment: windowwasher tank cap.

The window washer tank is in the enginecompartment ››› page 310.

316


Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The window washer tank contains liquid de-tergent for the windscreen and rear window.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 308.● The window washer tank is marked with the symbol on the cap.● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion ofmixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank canbe found in ››› page 346.

CAUTIONIf the water from the windscreen washerdoes not contain enough anti-freeze, it mayfreeze on the windscreen and rear window,reducing forward and rear visibility.● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the ventila-tion system. The antifreeze could freeze onthe windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTIONNever mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen wash-er water. A greasy layer may be formed onthe windscreen which will impair visibility.● Use clean water with a window cleanerrecommended by SEAT.● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. Thiscould lead to flocculation and may blockthe windscreen washer jets.● When topping up service fluids, make ab-solutely certain that you fill the fluids intothe correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions andengine damage!● Lack of window washer fluid causes theview through the windscreen to be ob-scured.

Battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment and is almost maintenance-free. It ischecked as part of the Inspection Service.Nevertheless, check the terminals are cleanand have the correct tightening torque, espe-cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a SEAT OfficialService or a workshop specialising in batter-ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never tryto change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse anysplashes of electrolyte with plenty of water. »

317

Practical tips

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Disconnecting the batteryThe battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-connected, some of the vehicle's functionsare lost. These functions will require resettingafter the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from the ve-hicle on-board network, disconnect first thenegative cable and then the positive cable.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

Winter conditionsDuring the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the battery shouldbe charged ›››

WARNINGAlways be aware of the danger of injuryand chemical burns as well as the risk ofaccident or fire when working on the bat-tery and the electrical system:

● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particlescontaining lead.● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Donot tilt the batteries. This could spill acidthrough the vents.● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes onthe skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. Ifacid is swallowed by mistake, consult adoctor immediately.● Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited. When handling cables andelectrical equipment, avoid causing sparksand electrostatic charge. Never short thebattery terminals. High-energy sparks cancause injury.● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.● Keep children away from acid and bat-teries.● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical devices. The negative ca-ble on the battery must be disconnected.When a light bulb is changed, you need on-ly switch off the light.● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-locking the vehicle before you disconnect

the battery! The alarm will otherwise betriggered.● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positivecable.● Switch off all electrical devices beforereconnecting the battery. Reconnect firstthe positive cable and then the negativecable. Never reverse the polarity of theconnections. This could cause an electricalfire.● Never charge a frozen battery, or onewhich has thawed. This could result in ex-plosions and chemical burns. Always re-place a battery which has frozen. A flatbattery can also freeze at temperaturesclose to 0°C (+32°F).● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-light over a long period of time, as the in-tense ultraviolet radiation can damage thebattery housing.● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-ditions for a long period, protect the bat-tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will bedamaged.

318


Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It should go out when the enginehas started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolytelevel

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries.

● Open the bonnet and then lift the coverthat protects the front part of the battery››› in Working in the engine compart-ment on page 308.● Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.

● If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment diagram››› page 310.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the topof the battery changes colour, depending onthe charge state and electrolyte level of thebattery.

There are two different colours:

● Black: correct charge status.● Transparent/light yellow: the battery mustbe replaced. Contact a specialised work-shop.

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the batteryshould be checked by a specialised work-shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle batterychecked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the batteryThe vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries usingspecial technology have been installed andthey must be charged in a controlled environ-ment.

Replacing a vehicle batteryThe battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features. If the battery must be re-placed, consult a technical service for infor-mation on electromagnetic compatibility, thesize and maintenance, performance andsafety requirements of the new battery inyour vehicle before you purchase one. SEATrecommends you have the battery replacedby a technical service.

Start-Stop systems (››› page 223) are equip-ped with a special battery. Therefore, it mustonly be replaced with a battery of the samespecifications.

WARNING● Always use only maintenance free bat-teries that do not run flat alone and whoseproperties, specifications and size corre-spond to the standard battery. The specifi-cations are indicated on the battery case.● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in General information on page 318. »

319

Practical tips

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances suchas sulphuric acid and lead. They must bedisposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres have a wider tread, a largerwheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres, for instance due tostrong knocks, potholes, manhole covers andkerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important››› page 323.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-pact or have been damaged, have a special-ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected.

320

Wheels

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre● Do not remove foreign bodies if they havepenetrated through the tyre wall!● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobilitysystem, where necessary seal the damagedtyre as shown in section ››› page 38. Use aspecialised workshop for repair or replace-ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre treadwraps around the foreign body and provision-ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This makes surethat optimal use is made of tyre properties interms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noiseand wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

Speed symbolsThe speed rating indicates the maximumspeed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)max. 160 km/h (99 mph)max. 170 km/h (106 mph)max. 180 km/h (112 mph)max. 190 km/h (118 mph)max. 200 km/h (124 mph)max. 210 km/h (130 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” fortyres with a maximum authorised speedabove 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-ing the first 500 km. Drive particularlycarefully to avoid possible accidents.● Never drive with damaged tyres. Thismay cause an accident.● If you notice unusual vibrations or if thevehicle pulls to one side when driving, stopthe vehicle immediately and check thetyres.● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known history of use.

PQRSTUHV

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres servicedby a specialised workshop. There they havethe required knowledge, the special tools andthe corresponding spare parts.

● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If youhave installed new tyres, drive the first 500km carefully and at a moderate speed.● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and, if possible, tread pattern.● When changing tyres, do not change justone; change at least two on the same axle.● If you want to equip your vehicle with acombination tyres and rims that are differentto those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-cialised workshop before purchasing them››› The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformityor COC document1)). The vehicle documen-tation varies depending on the country of res-idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form thenormal wheels — e.g. in the case of wintertyres or particularly wide tyres — the sparewheel should only be used temporarily in the »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.321

Practical tips

event of a puncture, and the vehicle shouldbe driven with care. Refit the normal roadwheel as soon as possible.

Manufacturing dateThe manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of thewheel):

DOT ... 2218 ...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING● Use only combinations of tyres and rims,as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved bySEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-aged, causing an accident.● For technical reasons it is not possible touse wheels of other vehicles; in some casesnot even wheels from the same vehiclemodel should be used.● Always ensure that the tyres you havechosen have adequate clearance. Whenselecting replacement tyres, do not relyentirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manu-facturer. Lack of clearance can damagethe tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-danger road safety. Risk of accident!● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old inan emergency, and drive with due care.

● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-hibited use can cause accidents or candamage your vehicle.● If decorative hubcaps are subsequentlyfitted, make sure that they allow enough airin to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-dent!

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-ted to find out whether wheels or tyres ofdifferent sizes to those originally fitted bySEAT can be fitted, and to find out aboutthe combinations allowed between thefront axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).● Never mount used tyres if you are notsure of their “previous history”.

Tyre life

Fig. 288 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 288.● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 326.

322

Wheels

● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

Tyre pressureThe tyre inflation pressures are listed on asticker on the rear of the front left door frame››› Fig. 288.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-rect inflation pressures are very important,especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (tyre pressure ››› Fig. 288).When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuelconsumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If thevehicle is going to carry the maximum load,the tyre pressure should be increased to themaximum value indicated on the sticker››› Fig. 288.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checkingthe tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-flated to the highest pressure required for theroad wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to a

pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyrepressure label ››› Fig. 288.

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, youshould check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-ficial Service.

WARNINGUnsuitable handling of the wheels andtyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out.

● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-ted to the right pressure. The recommen-ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label››› Fig. 288.● Check tyre pressures regularly and en-sure they are maintained at the pressuresindicated. Tyre pressure that is too lowcould cause overheating, resulting in treaddetachment or even burst tyres.● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressureshould be that indicated on the label››› Fig. 288.● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-sure of the tyres. If necessary, change thetyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while theyare cold.● Regularly check your tyres for damageand wear.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type oftyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

323

Practical tips

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 289 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 290 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can befound on the base of the original tyre treads,ordered at regular intervals and runningacross the tread ››› Fig. 289. The letters "TWI"

or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre markthe position of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth1) havebeen reached when the tyres have worndown to the wear indicators. Replace thetyres with new ones ››› .

Changing wheels aroundTo ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 290. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

WARNINGThe tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread is worn down to the treadwear indicators. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Particularly in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible andbe approximately the same on the tyres ofboth the front and the rear axles.● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-cient tread depth is particularly evident invehicle handling, when there is a risk of“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water

and when driving through corners, andbraking is also adversely affected.● The speed has to be adapted according-ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing controlover the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel nuts withthe right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel nuts* ››› page 42.

WARNINGWheel nuts should never be greased oroiled.● Use only wheel nuts which belong to thewheel.● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nutsis too low, they could loosen whilst the

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

324

Wheels

vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If thetightening torque is too high, the wheel nutsand threads can be damaged.

CAUTIONSee ››› page 44 to find out the recommen-ded tightening torque for wheel nuts forsteel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-fective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pressureslisted on the rear of the front left door frame››› page 322.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-

sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehiclesequipped with wide section tyres or withhigh speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y onthe sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's documents(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)).The vehicle documentation varies dependingon the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit isstamped on all winter tyres ››› page 321.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attachedso that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-ice and specialised workshop. Please notethe regulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-ratingPlease note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissible speedfor your vehicle may be significantly lower.The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-pends directly on the maximum axle weightsfor your car and on the listed weight rating ofthe tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service tocheck the maximum speed which is permissi-ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car onthe basis of this information.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum speed permittedfor the winter tyres fitted on your car cancause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environmentWhen winter is over, change back to sum-mer tyres at an appropriate moment. Intemperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-ance will be improved if summer tyres areused. Fuel consumption, wear and noiseswhile driving will all be reduced.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.325

Practical tips

Snow chains

Snow chains should only be used on thefront wheels.

● Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions.● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).● If there is a danger of being trapped de-spite having mounted the chains, it is best todisable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC››› page 267, Connecting and disconnect-ing the ESC and ASR*.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

195/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 13.5mm

205/60 R16

Chains with links of maximum 9 mm205/55 R17

215/45 R18

Remove any central wheel trims and the rimring before fitting snow chains.

WARNINGThe use of unsuitable or incorrectly fittedchains could lead to serious accidents anddamage.● Always the appropriate snow chains.● Observe the fitting instructions providedby the snow chain manufacturer.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION● Remove the snow chains to drive onroads without snow. Otherwise they will im-pair vehicle handling, damage the tyresand wear out very quickly.● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-ed if the chains come into direct contactwith them. SEAT recommends the use ofcovered snow chains.

Tyre pressure loss indicator*

Control lamp

It lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than thevalue set by the driver ››› in Tyre monitor systemon page 327.

Or: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.


Tyre monitor system

Fig. 291 Centre console: tyre pressure loss in-dicator button.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheelrevolutions and, with this information, thetread of each wheel using the ABS sensors.

It a wheel diameter changes, the tyre controlgives a warning of this .

326

Wheels

Wheel tread changeThe wheel diameter changes when:

● Tyre pressure is changed manually.● Tyre pressure is insufficient.● The tyre structure is damaged.● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload.● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.● The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre monitoring indicator or it may not indi-cate anything under certain circumstances(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-paved roads, or when driving with snowchains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring indicatorAfter changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, forexample, when the front and rear wheels areswapped.

● Switch the ignition on.● Store the new inflation pressure in the EasyConnect system with the button >SETTINGS > Tyres ››› page 85 .

● Vehicles without the Easy Connect system:press and hold button ››› Fig. 291 until asound is heard.

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and thewheels fitted. After a long journey with variedspeeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before calibra-tion ››› Fig. 288.

If the tyre monitor system button is presseddown, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

WARNINGWhen the tyres are inflated at differentpressures or at a pressure that is too lowthen a tyre may be damaged resulting in aloss of control of the vehicle and a seriousor fatal accident.● If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-mediately and avoid any sudden turning orbraking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,and check the tyre pressure and status.● The tyre monitoring system can only op-erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-ted to the correct pressure when cold.● If a tyre has not been punctured and itdoes not have to be changed immediately,drive to the nearest specialised workshopat a moderate speed and have the tyre

checked and inflated to the correct pres-sure.

Note● Driving for the first time with new tyres ata high speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an airpressure warning.● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoringsystem. Regularly check your tyres to en-sure that the tyre pressure is correct andthat the tyres are not damaged due topuncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.Remove objects from the tyres only whenthey have not pierced the tyres.● The tyre monitoring indicator does notfunction when there is a fault in the ESC orABS ››› page 266.● If the battery is disconnected, the yellowwarning lamp lights up after turning theignition on. This should turn off after a briefjourney.

327

Practical tips

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporaryspare wheel

Fig. 292 In the luggage compartment: removethe subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyres checked and replaced assoon as possible at a SEAT Official Service orat a specialised workshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for aspare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel● Lift and hold up the floor panel to removethe temporary spare wheel ››› page 129.● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise.● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicleswith BEATS Audio 6 speakers (with sub-woofer)*To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

● Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get itout.● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-ment floor: lift and secure the floor storagecompartment as explained in ››› page 129.● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 292 1speaker cable.● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction ››› Fig. 292 2 .● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place thesubwoofer on the base of the wheel rim withcare. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the

subwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace.

Removing the 16” temporary spare wheel(without subwoofer)● Remove the luggage compartment varia-ble floor to access the wheel and the tools››› page 129.● Loosen the strap that secures the box bypressing on the buckle.● Remove the toolbox.● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise andremove it.● Press the thread and turn it 90° clockwiseor anti-clockwise and remove it.● Pull on the front part of the spare wheel toremove it.

ChainsFor technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the rearwheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheelthat you have removed and replace thepunctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as

328

Wheels

possible. Failure to do so may cause an ac-cident. The tyre pressure is listed on theback of the left front door frame ››› Fig. 288.● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fittedon the vehicle: risk of accident!● Never travel more than 200 km using atemporary spare wheel.● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering: risk of accident!● Never use more than one temporaryspare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-dent.● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off during the journey. Switch off thesystem when starting off.

329

Maintenance

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro-gramme

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Main-tenance Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop records Service receipts in a centralsystem. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-mentation of the service history, it is possibleto reproduce the services performed anytime. SEAT recommends requesting a Servicereceipt after every service carried out con-taining all the services carried out on the sys-tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt isreplaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-able in some markets. In this case, yourSEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-rent documentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEATauthorised service or specialised workshopdocuments the following information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the nearfuture.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information is docu-mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe in-juries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carriedout by a SEAT authorised service or speci-alised workshop.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with SEATguidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service In-tervals

Services are classified as oil change serviceand inspection. The service interval displayon the instrument panel display serves as areminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine andthe conditions of use of the car, either theFixed service or the Flexible service will beapplied for an oil change service..

330

SEAT Maintenance Programme

How to know which type of service needsto his vehicle● Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type ofservice Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after1 yearb)



QI6 Flexible According to the service in-terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 311.

Particular characteristics of the FlexibleServiceRegarding the Flexible Service, the oilchange service only has to be performedwhen the vehicle needs it. To calculate whenyou have to carry out this service, take intoaccount the individual conditions of use andpersonal driving style. A major component ofthe flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 311.

If you do not want to the flexible serviceyou can select the fixed service However,a fixed service may affect service costsThe Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval displayAt SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-ted by the service interval display on the in-strument panel ››› page 79 or in the Vehiclesettings menu of the infotainment system››› page 85.

The service interval display gives informationfor service dates that involve an engine oilchange or an inspection. When the time forthe corresponding service comes, additionalwork required, such as the change of brakefluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-verse conditions of use, some of the workmust be carried out before the next serviceperiod or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.● Frequent short trips.● Letting the engine idle for a long period oftime, as in the case of taxis.● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Frequent driving with a trailer (dependingon equipment).● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter● Air filter● Toothed chain● Particulate filter● Engine oil »

331

Maintenance

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about theneed of performing service work betweennormal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic and cause accidents and severeinjuries.● Have the services conducted at author-ised SEAT services or specialised work-shops.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenanceworks needed to ensure the safety and thesmooth running of the vehicle (depending onthe conditions of use and the features ofthe vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, oroperating fluids). Maintenance services aredivided into inspection and review services.Consult the details of the jobs required foryour vehicle at:

● Your SEAT authorised service● Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-opment of components) the sets of servicesmay vary. Your SEAT authorised service orspecialised workshop is always receiving up-dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the manu-facturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. For thisreason, we always recommend the use ofOriginal SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-facturer's requirements, are an additionalservice to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,gearboxes, heads, control units, electricalcomponents, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT OriginalAccessories and SEAT approved accessoriesfor your vehicle. The reliability, safety andsuitability of these accessories have been in-spected specifically for this type of vehicle.SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety andsuitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility

Since the moment you purchase your SEATvehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefitsand coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long asyou carry out the recommended Inspection

332

Vehicle maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-ised Service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT MobilityService differs depending on the country inwhich the vehicle was purchased. For furtherinformation ask your SEAT dealership or theSEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfectcondition of new vehicles. Check the pur-chase agreement or complementary addi-tional documentation provided by your Tech-nical Service to see the conditions and theterms of the warranty. Consult further infor-mation in this regard in your SEAT OfficialService.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safeplace, out of the reach of children. Dangerof poisoning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resinor anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, themore damage it can cause to the surface.High temperatures, for instance strong sun-light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, birddroppings or tree resin, use a lot of water anda microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipmentWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thedistance between the spraying water. Do notaim the jet directly to the side window gas-kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-ses, soundproofing material, sensors* orcamera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner. »

333

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car washesSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreenwipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-structions of the car wash tunnel operator,especially if your vehicle has detachableparts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-ployed electrically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are prepared toprevent oily water from getting into thepublic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checked inthe following tables. The contents should beunderstood merely as a recommendation. Goto your specialised workshop if you have

334

Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.Take he general considerations into account››› in Take special care with... onpage 338.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-vent-free cleaning productCamera lenses: soft cloth withan alcohol-free cleaning prod-uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spraywith no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaningproduct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if asteel cleaning product is re-quired


Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flawsCheck the paint's colour codein an authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and thenapply hard wax. Go you yourspecialised workshop if youhave any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work-shop take care of this

The water doesnot create drop-lets on the cleanpaint

Maintain with hard wax (atleast 2 times a year)

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative after-wards if the wax used does notcontain preservative ingredi-ents

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, birddroppings, treesap, road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt,e.g. cosmeticproducts orsunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-ted parts ››› page 333 »

335

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos-sible solvent-free plastic clean-er


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al-lowed to dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirtstuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved greaseand paint particles drying withan absorbent cloth, in case youmust treat it with water after-wards

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry withan absorbent cloth, if applica-ble, apply neutral soap solutionafterwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: stain remover suita-ble for leather

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand suitable stain remover forleatherDry stains: grease solventspray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable forleather

336

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid scratches, the scraper should only bepushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damaging thepaint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel● The screens, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ofscratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.● Seat belts and their components must nev-er be cleaned with chemical products, norshould they be allowed to come into contactwith corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question. »

337

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-er● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantaraleather with leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removersor similar products.● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,spot removers or similar products on leather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight forlong periods, otherwise it may tend to losesome of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best tocover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditionssuch as humid weather, darkness or whenthe sun is in its lowest point, visibility maybe impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-ings can also cause the windscreen wiperblades to make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regardingthe vehicle's battery ››› page 317.

Accessories and modifi-cations to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andrepair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessoriesand replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT OfficialService has the latest information from themanufacturer and can recommend accesso-ries and replacement parts which are suita-ble for your requirements. They can also an-swer any questions you might have regardingofficial regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT hastested these parts and accessories for suita-bility, reliability and safety. SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally.

338

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it isdriven, such as a cruise control system orelectronically-controlled suspension, mustbe approved for use in your vehicle and bearthe e mark (the European Union's authorisa-tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptopor ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working rangeof the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents, software, wiring or data transferin the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealershipcannot be held liable for any damagecaused by modifications and/or work per-formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work shouldbe performed by a SEAT Official Service us-ing genuine SEAT parts®.

WARNINGIncorrectly performed modifications orother work on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEATgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The antenna is installed correctly.● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle without »

339

Maintenance

a properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields thatcould cause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

340

Information for the user



Information stored by thecontrol units

Storage of accident data (EventData Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. These da-ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.● Whether the driver and the occupants werewearing their seat belts.● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as whetherthe systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in theaforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)● Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist).● Park Pilot system

The EDR data are only recorded in specificaccident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-ces are personal data such as name, age, orgender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personalreference in the context of an accident inves-tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) thevehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unlessthe owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lesseeor hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, SEAT may use the EDR data forfield research and in order to improve vehiclesystem quality. Any data used for the purpo-ses of research will be treated anonymously(in other words, no reference will be made tothe vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-cycling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials. »

341


● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includingodour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-cle transport.● Use of solvent-free adhesives.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electron-ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) thatare not permanently fitted in the vehicle mustbe marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not bediscarded as home waste but through selec-tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-clare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declarationis available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you toassociate the name of the device in the dec-laration of compliance with the features ofthe vehicle and the terminology used in theon-board documentation.

Features of thevehicle

Name of the deviceaccording to the dec-laration of compli-ance

Radiofrequency re-mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,FS94

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxili-ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

342




Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-tem

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

Connection to the ex-ternal antenna of thecar

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

LTE-MBC-EU



Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated indashboard moduleinstrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Bigfamily

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG720166002

8S7.035.503.B

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.2256F9.035.225

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-nents that, due to their size or nature, cannotinclude a sticker are listed below, as long as itis legally required:

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt,GERMANY

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxiliaryheater)

Digades gmbHÄußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 982205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg,GERMANY

343


Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

Auxiliary heating868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

Bluethooth2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

344


Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambraand Tarraco

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

Tarraco




LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

345

Technical data

Technical data

Indications about thetechnical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical datamay differ depending on optional equipmentor version of the model, as well as in the caseof special vehicles and equipment for certaincountries.

The information in the official vehicle docu-mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die-sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.


Vehicle ID numberThe vehicle ID number can be found in thefollowing places:

● In the infotainment system using button > SETTINGS > Service > VehicleID number.● One the vehicle's data label.● In front, under the windscreen.● To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plateThe type plate is located on the vehicle’s righthand door frame. Vehicles for certain exportcountries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to thelegislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-pend on the equipment/features of each indi-vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-mental conditions, load or number of passen-gers.

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and die-sel engines 40 l, 7 l reserve

Natural gas en-ginea)

approx. 13.8 kgAdditional petrol tank: 9 l, of

which approx 7.6 l is a reserve

a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-teristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi-cated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200bar.

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

Windscreen washerfluid container approx. 3 litres

346

Indications about the technical data

Weights

Load on the roofThe maximum authorised roof load for yourvehicle is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loadsThe empty weight of the vehicle with driver(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment canincrease the empty weight, which means thatthe possible useful load decreases propor-tionally.

Trailer weightThe maximum permitted drawbar load on theball head of the towing device is 55 kg.

WARNINGThe values indicated for the maximum per-mitted weights must not be exceeded.There is a risk of accident and damage!

347

Technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.0 TSI Start-Stop 1.6 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 81 (110)/5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/2,000-3,500 200/2,000-3,500 155/3,800-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 3/999 4/1,598

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual DSG manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 175 (IV) 190 (V) 190 (VI) 181 (IV) 181 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.4 9.8 10.0 11 11.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,615-1,700a) 1,625-1,710a) 1,655-1,740a) 1,595-1,680a) 1,635-1,720a)

a) Varies depending on the features.

Natural gas / petrol engine 1.0 TGI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 66 (90)/4,000-5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1,800-3,800

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999

FuelCNG

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual (VI)

Top speed (km/h) 176 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1710

348


Diesel engines 1.6 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/2,750-4,600

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-2,600

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,598

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 178 (V) 178 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.9 12.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,715-1,800a) 1,745-1,830a)

a) Varies depending on the features.

349

Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 293 Dimensions and angles.

350


››› Fig. 293 ARONA

A Front projection (mm) 803

B Rear projection (mm) 769

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,138

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,503

F Backa) track (mm) 1,486

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,552b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 190

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.1°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 29.5°

Turning radius (m) 11.0

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.b) Dimension to the roof bars.

351

Index

IndexAABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 338Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249function to prevent overtaking on the right . 254indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

AdBluecontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Adjustfront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Air conditioningClimatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 164Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 38

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Anti-trap function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 163Aspects to think about before starting the ve-

hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 269blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-

sistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . 244parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 111Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229emergency release of the selector lever. . . 232ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

353

Index

operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 228tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 228towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

BBackrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 258malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Blown bulbschange a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Bluetooth®connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 310opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262BSD

see blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

CCapacities

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Caresee Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58DRL/side light (daytime running light) . . . . . . 59front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61tail light bulb in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60tail light bulb in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Childproof locks

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Child seats

group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34

Cleaning the vehiclehigh pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 333special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Clocks

set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Communication between the Infotainment

System and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159354

Index

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 267audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 267fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 307press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 249rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 299replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Controls and displaysoverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 91Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

DDAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

see: RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Deactivation of cylinders

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 70Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . 149

Dieselengine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Disposalseat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Distance controlsee Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 238with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290, 292, 296

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

355

Index

DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Electrical accessories

see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 222Electronic parking brake

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 266Emergencies

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Emergency braking assist systemindications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Emergency opening

driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Emergency operationfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Emissions control systemAdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Engineassisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Engine and ignitionautomatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 219emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 220switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 310battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 315engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Engine failurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Engine oilchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 313checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

356

Index

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Enlarge

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 338ESC

electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 266multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120fold manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

FFabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Filling capacities

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299First aid kit

housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 113Frequency band

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 244Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Fuel

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Fuel consumptioninertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . 306

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 54recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

GGALA (speed-dependent volume) . . . . . . . . . . . 154Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Gear change

engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . 225manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

HHandbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 17Head-protection airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

357

Index

Headlightschange a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 123, 124Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

IIdentification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184change the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153FM, AM, DAB settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Media settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190navigation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 146phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199rotary/push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151scroll (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151search on lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . . 173share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . . 154station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155voice control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158volume and sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Infotainment system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 330Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 82use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 149Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47358

Index

KKeyless Access

Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keyless Access lock and ignition system:see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keyless Entrysee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keyless Exitsee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Keysassign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 105vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

LLeather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Leaving a parking space with the parking as-

sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . . 113headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . . 62interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Loading the luggage compartmentfastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 127positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Lock and unlockin the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 127emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 129

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

MMain beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Malfunctions

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 269clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

359

Index

Mediachanging track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180playback modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181playback order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179requirements for data media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177select track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183switching the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182unreadable CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

MEDIAsettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Mirrors

adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Multifunction steering wheel

without voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

NNatural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 303special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192import vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193selecting the destination on the map . . . . . . 192settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200special destinations (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Noiseadaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321, 325

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

OOctane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Operating faultautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Operation in winterbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

PPainting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Park Assist

see the assisted parking system (Park As-sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268with the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273360

Index

Parking aidautomatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . 280fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 281parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280see the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 281surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 281

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 277, 280

Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 274leaving a parking space (only when paral-

lel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 277, 280

Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 229ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 277, 280Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 14

Petroladditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Power sockets

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 233Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Preheating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Properties of oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

RRadar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 250Radio

frequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169indications and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172save station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

RADIOadditional DAB services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171additional DAB stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174DAB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171DAB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171DAB radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171DAB slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171DAB station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

DAB transmission standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171indication of station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . . 173set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175station tracking by RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170tracking of DAB stations on FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Radio-operated remote controlsee Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 257RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

automatic station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170RDS Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 261control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Rear fog lightcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Rear seat

folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . 124Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

361

Index

Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76gas tank indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68, 76Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Rotary/push knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

SSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Safetychild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safety instructions

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Save fuelinertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Seat

removable covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 21safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

data transmission and control functions . . . 166

Seatsadjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

ServiceDigital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

362

Index

service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 228Side airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Special characteristics

AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 51tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290volume reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 223

the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Station

set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 70adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 70ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 70identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 226service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 74

Steeringcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 91shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 228

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134storage bag in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Storage compartment accessoriessee Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Storing objects

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 132trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

363

Index

TTail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Tail lights on the bodywork

remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Tail lights on the rear lid

remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Telephone

Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210favourites (quick access to the phone

book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 205settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Temperature indicatorexterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Timeadjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 75

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 226, 228To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94To park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34Torque

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288Tow hook

fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294place in the reserve position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295safety check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292operation and conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Towing devicefitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 50automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 51tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 292

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 296exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 281power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 285, 289

Trailer modesee Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

364

Index

Tyre Mobility Systemsee Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Tyre monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Tyre pressure loss indicator

tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Tyres

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

UUnlock and lock

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216connecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . . 185error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . 129Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 99vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Vehicle batteryassisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 317electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Vehicle carewiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Voice control

available languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

WWarning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 114Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 333high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 333sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 324

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Wheelschange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 44changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Wheel trim

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

365

Index

Window washerwindow washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Winter conditionstrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Wiper and rear window wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Wiper bladescleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

connect external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

366

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19


Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Owner’s manualSEAT Arona

6F9012720BF

Ingl

és 6

F901

2720

BF (

11.19

)

SEA

T A

rona

Ing

lés

(11.19

)

(11.19) Inglés Owner’s manual Arona SEAT Arona SEAT...Owner’s manual SEAT Arona 6F9012720BF...

Documents

Transcript of (11.19) Inglés Owner’s manual Arona SEAT Arona SEAT...Owner’s manual SEAT Arona 6F9012720BF...